TASKalfa 250ci 300ci 400ci 500ci 552ci ENG

OPERATION GUIDE
TASKalfa
FS-1100
250ci/300ci/400ci/500ci/552ci
FS-1300D
Introduction
Thank you for your purchase of TASKalfa 250ci/300ci/400ci/500ci/552ci.
This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly, perform routine maintenance and
take a simple troubleshooting action as necessary, so that you can always use the machine in good condition.
Please read this Operation Guide before you start using the machine, and keep it close to the machine for easy
reference.
We recommend the use of our own brand supplies. We will not be liable for any damage caused by the use of
third party supplies in this machine.
A label shown in the illustration assures that the supplies are our own brand.
In this Operation Guide, TASKalfa 250ci/300ci/400ci/500ci/552ci are referred to as 25/25 ppm model, 30/30 ppm
model, 40/40 ppm model, 50/40 ppm model, and 55/50 ppm model respectively.
Included Guides
The following guides are supplied with the machine. Refer to them as necessary.
Operation Guide (This Guide)

Describes how to load paper, basic copy, print and scan operations, and troubleshooting.
Quick Guide to Adjusting Image Quality

Adjustments to color image quality are explained using sample images.
Safety Conventions in This Guide
The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect
the user, other individuals and surrounding objects, and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine. The
symbols and their meanings are indicated below.
WARNING: Indicates that serious injury or even death may result

from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the
related points.
CAUTION: Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage
may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance
with the related points.
Symbols
The  symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings. Specific points of attention are
indicated inside the symbol.
.... [General warning]
.... [Warning of danger of electrical shock]
.... [Warning of high temperature]
The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions. Specifics of the
prohibited action are indicated inside the symbol.
.... [Warning of prohibited action]
.... [Disassembly prohibited]
The  symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed.
Specifics of the required action are indicated inside the symbol.
.... [Alert of required action]
.... [Remove the power plug from the outlet]
[Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground

....
connection]
Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide
are illegible or if the guide itself is missing (fee required).
NOTE: An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases
because this machine is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function.
i
Contents
Contents
Quick Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi
Caution / Warning Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Installation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
Precautions for Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Laser Safety (Europe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power (Europe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Legal and Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
1 Part Names
Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
2 Preparation before Use

Check the Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Power On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Sleep and Auto Sleep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Switching the Language for Display [Language]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Setting Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Installing Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Loading Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Loading Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
3 Basic Operation
Login/Logout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Enter key and Quick No. Search key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Original Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Selecting Color Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Printing - Printing from Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Confirmation Screen of Destinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Specifying Destination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Using Document Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Basic Operation for Document Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Canceling Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Quick Setup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Program (Copying and Sending). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Using the Internet Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
4 Copying Functions
Original Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
ii OPERATION GUIDE
Contents
Paper Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Mixed Size Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Original Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Output Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Combine Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Margin/Centering Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Border Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Booklet from Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Cover Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Form Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Page Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Memo Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Poster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Image Repeat/Double Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
EcoPrint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Single Color Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Color Balance Adjust. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Hue Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
One-touch Image Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Sharpness Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Background Density Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Continuous Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Auto Image Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Negative Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Mirror Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Job Finish Notice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
File Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Priority Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Repeat Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
OHP Backing Sheet Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
5 Sending Functions
Original Size Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Sending Size Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Centering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Mixed Size Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
1-sided/2-sided Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Original Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
File Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
PDF Encryption Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Adjusting Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Scan Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Sharpness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Background Density Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Color / Grayscale / Black and White Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Continuous Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Border Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Enter Document Name/File Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Enter E-mail Subject and Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
WSD Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Job Finish Notice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Send and Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
OPERATION GUIDE iii

Contents
Send and Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

FTP Encrypted TX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Color Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
About Color Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
6 Document Box
Using a Custom Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Using a Job Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
7 Status / Job Cancel

Checking Job Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Checking Job History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Sending the Log History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Pause and Resumption of Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Canceling of Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Priority Override for Waiting Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Reordering Print Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Device/Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
8 Default Setting (System Menu)

Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Copy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Sending Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Document Box Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Printing Reports/Sending Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Adjustment/Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Date/Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55
Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One Touch Keys). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60
Internet Browser Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-67
Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-69
System Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-72
Restarting the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-72
Network Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-73
Interface Block Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-80
Security Level (Security Level setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-81
Document Guard Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-81
Optional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-83
Accessibility Display (Enlarged Touch Panel Display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-84
9 Maintenance
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Toner Container and Waste Toner Box Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
10 Troubleshooting
Solving Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Responding to Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Clearing Paper Jams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
11 Management
User Login Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
iv OPERATION GUIDE
Contents
Job Accounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14

Data Security Kit Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27
Appendix
Optional Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-2
Character Entry Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-7
Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-10
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-18
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-28
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Index-1
OPERATION GUIDE v
Quick Guide Be sure to read Precautions for Use before using
this machine.
Administrator tasks
To make copies To print

Simply press the Start key to make You can print via a network or print
copies. You can also fine-tune the a PDF file directly from USB
It copies. It prints.
copy settings by changing the memory.
paper size, adjusting the density,
etc.
Copying with Printing Documents Print

What specific Stored in Removable via a
you want settings USB Memory network
to do
Connecting Cables
Network Setup
(LAN Cable Connection)
Install the printer

driver on your
computer *1
Setup
Loading Paper...2-20
Placing Originals on
the Platen...2-32
Printing Printing -
Copying Functions Documents Stored Printing from
Operation
...4-1 in Removable USB Applications
Memory... 6-20 ...3-22
*1: For more information, refer to the Printer Driver User Guide.
vi
Administrator tasks
To send documents
You can send scanned images via a network. Or, you can also store scanned images in
USB memory.
It sends.
Send Send to Saving

What as Folder Documents to
you want E-mail (SMB) USB Memory
to do
Connecting Cables
Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) Plug the USB

memory
Create a shared folder on the destination computer.
Setup
Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding
One Touch Keys)...8-60
Place the originals on the platen
Sending...3-24 *1 Saving Documents

Operation to USB Memory
Sending Functions...5-1
(Scan to USB)...6-22
*1: If the destination is not stored in the address book, you can send by entering the address
directly.
vii
Administrator tasks
To send a FAX
As well as sending a FAX via the telephone lines, you can also send a FAX via a network.
It faxes. NOTE: For more information on setting up and sending a FAX, refer to the FAX System
(S) Operation Guide.
FAX directly FAX without using the

What Send a FAX from a telephone line
you want computer (Internet FAX (i-FAX))
to do
Connect the modular cord for the

telephone line to this machine.
Selection of Telephone Line

(Inch version only)
Network Setup
(LAN Cable Connection)
Install the Network FAX

Driver on your computer *1
Setup
Using the Address Book...3-17

on the FAX System (S) Operation Guide *2
Loading Paper...2-20
FAX Operation About Network Internet Fax (i-FAX)

(Basic)...3-1 FAX...9-1 (Optional)...8-1
Operation on the FAX System (S) on the FAX System (S) on the FAX System (S)
Operation Guide Operation Guide Operation Guide
*1:For more information, refer to the Network FAX Driver Operation Guide.
*2: If the destination is not stored in the address book, you can send the FAX by entering the
address directly.
viii
Caution / Warning Labels
Caution / Warning labels have been attached to the machine at the following locations for safety purposes. Be
sufficiently careful to avoid fire or electric shock when removing a paper jam or when replacing toner.
High temperature inside. Do not

touch parts in this area, because
there is a danger of getting burned.
Do not touch the support area for the

document processor as there is a
danger that your fingers or other
objects may become caught or
pinched, and this can result in injury.
High temperature inside.

Do not touch parts in this
area, because there is a
danger of getting burned.
Label inside the machine

(Laser radiation warning)
Do not incinerate toner and toner

container. Dangerous sparks may
cause burn.
High temperature inside. Do not touch parts in this area, NOTE: Do not remove these labels.
because there is a danger of getting burned.
ix
Installation Precautions
Environment
CAUTION
Avoid placing the machine on or in locations which are unstable or not level. Such locations may cause
the machine fall down or fall over. This type of situation presents a danger of personal injury or damage
to the machine.
Avoid locations with humidity or dust and dirt. If dust or dirt become attached to the power plug, clean
the plug to avoid the danger of fire or electrical shock.
Avoid locations near radiators, heaters or other heat sources, or locations near flammable items to
avoid the danger of fire.
To keep the machine cool and facilitate changing of parts and maintenance, allow access space as
shown below. Leave adequate space, especially around the rear cover, to allow air to be properly
ventilated out of the machine.
3 15/16"
10 cm
11 13/16" 11 13/16"
30 cm 30 cm
39 3/8"
100 cm
Other precautions
The service environmental conditions are as follows:
• Temperature: 50 to 90.5 °F (10 to 32.5 °C), but humidity should be 70% or less when temperature is 90.5
°F (32.5 °C)
• Humidity: 15 to 80%, but temperature should be 86 °F or less (30 °C or less) when humidity is 80%
However, adverse environmental conditions may affect the image quality. It is recommended to use the machine
at a temperature: around 60.8 to 80.6 °F or less (16 to 27 °C), humidity: around 36 to 65%. In addition, Avoid
the following locations when selecting a site for the machine.
The machine automatically detects and displays the following message when the environmental temperature is
too high or too low.
Message: "Warning for high temperature. Adjust the room temperature." or "Warning for low temperature.
Adjust the room temperature."
x
To use the machine under optimum conditions, adjust the temperature and the humidity of your room if the
message is displayed.
• Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight.

• Avoid locations with vibrations.
• Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations.
• Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air.
• Avoid poorly ventilated locations.
If the floor is delicate against casters, when this machine is moved after installation, the floor material may be
damaged.
During copying, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one’s health. If,
however, the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an
extremely large number of copies, the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain the appropriate environment
for copy work, it is suggested that the room be properly ventilated.
Power supply/Grounding the machine
WARNING
Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections in the
same outlet. These types of situations present a danger of fire or electrical shock.
Plug the power cord securely into the mains power outlet and the power socket on the machine. A
buildup of dust around the prongs on the plug or contact between the prongs and metallic objects may
cause a fire or electric shock. Incomplete electrical contact could cause overheating and ignition.
Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground connection to avoid the danger of fire or
electrical shock in case of an electric short. If an earth connection is not possible, contact your service
representative.
Other precautions
Connect the power plug to the closest outlet possible to the machine.
Handling of plastic bags
WARNING
Keep the plastic bags that are used with the machine away from children. The plastic may cling to their
nose and mouth causing suffocation.
xi
Precautions for Use
Cautions when using the machine
WARNING
Do not place metallic objects or containers with water (flower vases, flower pots, cups, etc.) on or near
the machine. This type of situation presents a danger of fire or electrical shock should they fall inside.
Do not remove any of the covers from the machine as there is a danger of electrical shock from high
voltage parts inside the machine.
Do not damage, break or attempt to repair the power cord. Do not place heavy objects on the cord,
pull it unnecessarily or cause any other type of damage. These types of situations present a danger
of fire or electrical shock.
Never attempt to repair or disassemble the machine or its parts as there is a danger of personal injury,
fire, electrical shock or exposure to the laser. If the laser beam escapes, there is a danger of it causing
blindness.
If the machine becomes excessively hot, smoke appears from the machine, there is an odd smell, or
any other abnormal situation occurs, there is a danger of fire or electrical shock. Turn the main power
switch off immediately, be absolutely certain to remove the power plug from the outlet and then contact
your service representative.
If anything harmful (paper clips, water, other fluids, etc.) falls into the machine, turn the main power
switch off immediately. Next, remove the power plug from the outlet to avoid the danger of fire or
electrical shock. Then contact your service representative.
Do not remove or connect the power plug with wet hands, as there is a danger of electrical shock.
Always contact your service representative for maintenance or repair of internal parts.
xii
CAUTION
Do not pull the power cord when removing it from the outlet. If the power cord is pulled, the wires may
become broken and there is a danger of fire or electrical shock. (Always grasp the power plug when
removing the power cord from the outlet.)
Always remove the power plug from the outlet when moving the machine. If the power cord is
damaged, there is a danger of fire or electrical shock.
Always hold the designated parts only when lifting or moving the machine.
If this machine will be left unused for an extended period (e.g. overnight), turn it off at the main power
switch. If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time (e.g. vacation), remove the
power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution. If the optional Fax kit is installed, note that turning
the machine off at the main power switch disables fax transmission and reception.
For safety purposes, always remove the power plug from the outlet when performing cleaning
operations.
If dust accumulates within the machine, there is a danger of fire or other trouble. It is therefore
recommended that you consult with your service representative in regard to cleaning of internal parts.
This is particularly effective if accomplished prior to seasons of high humidity. Consult with your
service representative in regard to the cost of cleaning the internal parts of the machine.
Other precautions
Do not place heavy objects on the machine or cause other damage to the machine.
Do not open the front cover, turn off the main power switch, or pull out the power plug during copying.
When lifting or moving the machine, contact your service representative.
When moving the machine, please turn the four adjusters of the paper feeding unit until they reach the floor in
order to stabilize the machine.
Do not touch electrical parts, such as connectors or printed circuit boards. They could be damaged by static
electricity.
Do not attempt to perform any operations not explained in this guide.
Caution: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may
result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Do not look directly at the light from the scanning lamp as it may cause your eyes to feel tired or painful.
This machine comes equipped with an HDD (hard disk drive). Do not attempt to move the machine while the
power is still on. Since any resulting shock or vibration may cause damage to the hard disk, be sure to turn off
the power before attempting to move the machine.
In the event there is a problem with the machine’s HDD (hard disk drive), stored data may be erased. It is
recommended that important data be backed up on a PC or other media. Be also sure to store originals of
important documents separately.
xiii
Cautions when handling consumables
CAUTION
Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may cause
burns.
Keep the toner container and the waste toner box out of the reach of children.
If toner happens to spill from the toner container or the waste toner box, avoid inhalation and ingestion,
as well as contact with your eyes and skin.
• If you do happen to inhale toner, move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of
water. If coughing develops, contact a physician.
• If you do happen to ingest toner, rinse your mouth with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the
contents of your stomach. If necessary, contact a physician.
• If you do happen to get toner in your eyes, flush them thoroughly with water. If there is any remaining
tenderness, contact a physician.
• If toner does happen to get on your skin, wash with soap and water.
Do not attempt to force open or destroy the toner container or the waste toner box.
If the optional Fax kit is installed and the main power switch is off, transmitting/receiving Fax is disabled. Do not
turn off the main power switch, but press the Power key on the operation panel to enter Sleep.
Other precautions
Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The
collected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant
regulations.
Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight.
Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40ºC while avoiding sharp changes of
temperature and humidity.
If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the paper from the cassette and the Multi
Purpose (MP) Tray, return it to its original package and reseal it.
xiv
Laser Safety (Europe)
Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body. For this reason, laser radiation emitted inside this
machine is hermetically sealed within the protective housing and external cover. In the normal operation of the
product by user, no radiation can leak from the machine.
This machine is classified as Class 1 laser product under IEC 60825.
Caution: Performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
These labels are attached to the laser scanner unit inside the machine and are not in a user access area.
The label shown below is attached on the right side of the machine.
xv
Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power (Europe)
Caution: The power plug is the main isolation device! Other switches on the equipment are only functional
switches and are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source.
VORSICHT: Der Netzstecker ist die Hauptisoliervorrichtung! Die anderen Schalter auf dem Gerät sind nur
Funktionsschalter und können nicht verwendet werden, um den Stromfluß im Gerät zu unterbrechen.
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
TO
2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EEC, 93/68/EEC, 1999/5/EC, and 2005/32/EC
We declare under our sole responsibility that the product to which this
declaration relates is in conformity with the following specifications.
EN55024
EN55022 Class B
EN61000-3-2
EN61000-3-3
EN60950-1
EN60825-1
EN300 330-1
EN300 330-2
EN62301
Radio Frequency Transmitter (Europe)

This machine contains the transmitter module. We, the manufacturer hereby declare that this equipment is in
compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Radio Tag Technology (Europe)

In some countries the radio tag technology used in this equipment to identify the toner container may be subject
to authorization and the use of this equipment may consequently be restricted.
NOTE: Product marked with the Crossed-out Wheeled Bin Symbol includes the battery that complies with the
European Parliament and Council Directive 2006/66/EC (the "Battery Directive") in European Union.
Do not remove and dispose of the batteries included in this machine.
xvi
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning
• It may be prohibited to copy/scan copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner.
• Copying/Scanning the following items is prohibited and may be penalized by law.
It may not be limited to these items. Do not knowingly copy/scan the items that are not to be copied/
scanned.
Paper money
Bank note
Securities
Stamp
Passport
Certificate
• Local laws and regulations may prohibit or restrict copying/scanning of other items not mentioned above.
xvii
xviii
Legal and Safety Information
Please read this information before using your machine. This chapter provides information on
the following topics.
• Legal Information ................................................................................. xx

• Regarding Trade Names..................................................................... xxi
• Energy Saving Control Function ........................................................ xxv
• Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function ..................................................... xxv
• Paper Recycling................................................................................. xxv
• Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program .......................................... xxv
• About this Operation Guide................................................................xxvi
xix
Legal Information
Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide without the prior written consent of Kyocera Mita
Corporation is prohibited.
xx
Regarding Trade Names
• PRESCRIBE and ECOSYS are trademarks of Kyocera Corporation.
• KPDL is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation.
• Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, Windows NT and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the U.S.A. and/or other countries.
• Windows Me, Windows XP and Windows Vista are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
• PCL is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
• Adobe Acrobat, Adobe Reader and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
• Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
• Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.
• IBM and IBM PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
• Power PC is a trademark of IBM in the U.S.A. and/or other countries.
• AppleTalk is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
• This machine has been developed using embedded real-time operating system Tornado™ by Wind River
Systems, Inc.
• TrueType is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
• TypeBankG-B, TypeBankM-M and Typebank-OCR are trademarks of TypeBank®.
• All European language fonts installed in this machine are used under licensing agreement with Monotype
Imaging Inc.
• Helvetica, Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype-Hell AG.
• ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Bookman, ITC ZapfChancery and ITC ZapfDingbats are registered
trademarks of International Type-face Corporation.
• UFST™ MicroType® fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc. are installed in this machine.
• This machine contains the NF module developed by ACCESS Co., Ltd.
• This machine contains the software having modules developed by Independent JPEG Group.
• This product contains NetFront Browser of ACCESS CO., LTD.
• ACCESS, ACCESS logo and NetFront are trademarks or registered trademarks of ACCESS CO., LTD.in
the United States, Japan and other countries.
• © 2009 ACCESS CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
• This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
PANTONE®* Colors generated may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current
PANTONE Publications for accurate color. PANTONE® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the
property of Pantone, Inc. © Pantone, Inc., 2009.
All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies. The
designations ™ and ® will not be used in this Operation Guide.
xxi
GPL
Firmware of this machine is using in part the GPL applied codes (www.fsf.org/copyleft/gpl.html). Please access
“http://www.kyoceramita.com/gpl” for more information on how to make GPL applied codes available.
Open SSL License
Copyright (c) 1998-2006 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgment:
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http:/
/www.openssl.org/)”
4 The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without prior written permission.
For written permission, please contact [email protected].
5 Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may “OpenSSL” appear in their
names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: “This product includes
software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE

DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY
OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
xxii
Original SSLeay License
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected]) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young ([email protected]). The implementation was
written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to.
The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code;
not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright
terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]).
Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed.
If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library
used.
This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided
with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgment:
“This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected])”
The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic
related :-).
4 If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application
code) you must include an acknowledgment:
“This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be
changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU
Public Licence.]
xxiii
Monotype Imaging License Agreement
1 Software shall mean the digitally encoded, machine readable, scalable outline data as encoded in a
special format as well as the UFST Software.
2 You agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights, styles
and versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (Typefaces) solely for your own customary
business or personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype
Imaging. Under the terms of this License Agreement, you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three
printers. If you need to have access to the fonts on more than three printers, you need to acquire a multi-
user license agreement which can be obtained from Monotype Imaging. Monotype Imaging retains all
rights, title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights are granted to you other than a
License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement.
3 To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging, you agree to maintain the Software and other
proprietary information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable
procedures regulating access to and use of the Software and Typefaces.
4 You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces, except that you may make one backup
copy. You agree that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the
original.
5 This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces, unless sooner terminated.
This License may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License
and such failure is not remedied within thirty (30) days after notice from Monotype Imaging. When this
License expires or is terminated, you shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the
Software and Typefaces and documentation as requested.
6 You agree that you will not modify, alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile the
Software.
7 Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery, the Software will perform in
accordance with Monotype Imaging-published specifications, and the diskette will be free from defects in
material and workmanship. Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs,
errors and omissions.
The parties agree that all other warranties, expressed or implied, including warranties of fitness for a
particular purpose and merchantability, are excluded.
8 Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and
Typefaces is repair or replacement of defective parts, upon their return to Monotype Imaging.
In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits, lost data, or any other incidental or
consequential damages, or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and
Typefaces.
9 Massachusetts U.S.A. law governs this Agreement.
10 You shall not sublicense, sell, lease, or otherwise transfer the Software and/or Typefaces without the prior
written consent of Monotype Imaging.
11 Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in
Technical Data and Computer Software clause at FAR 252-227-7013, subdivision (b)(3)(ii) or
subparagraph (c)(1)(ii), as appropriate. Further use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions
applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR 52.227-19 (c)(2).
12 You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement, understand it, and agree to be bound by its terms
and conditions. Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not contained in this
Agreement. No change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized
representatives of each party. By opening this diskette package, you agree to accept the terms and
conditions of this Agreement.
xxiv
Energy Saving Control Function
The device comes equipped with a Low Power Mode where energy consumption is reduced after a certain
amount of time elapses since the device was last used, as well as a Sleep where printer and fax functions
remain in a waiting state but power consumption is still reduced to a minimum when there is no activity with the
device within a set amount of time.
Low Power Mode

The device automatically enters Low Power Mode when 3 minutes for 25/25 ppm, 30/30 ppm, 40/40 ppm and
50/40 ppm models, or 5 minutes for 55/50 ppm model have passed since the device was last used. The amount
of time of no activity that must pass before Low Power Mode is activated may be lengthened. For more
information refer to Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode on page 2-9.
Sleep
The device automatically enters Sleep when 30 minutes for 25/25 ppm and 30/30 ppm models, 45 minutes for
40/40 ppm model, or 60 minutes for 50/40 ppm and 55/50 ppm models have passed since the device was last
used. The amount of time of no activity that must pass before Sleep is activated may be lengthened. For more
information see Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2-10.
Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function

This device includes 2-sided copying as a standard function. For example, by copying two 1-sided originals onto
a single sheet of paper as a 2-sided copy, it is possible to lower the amount of paper used. For more information
see Duplex Copying on page 3-12.
Paper Recycling
This device supports the recycled paper which reduces the load on the environment. Your sales or service
representative can provide information about recommended paper types.
Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program

We have determined as a participating company in the International Energy Star Program that
this product is compliant with the standards laid out in the International Energy Star Program.
xxv
About this Operation Guide
This Operation Guide contains the following chapters.
Chapter 1 - Part Names

Identifies machine parts and operation panel keys.
Chapter 2 - Preparation before Use

Explains adding paper, placing originals, connecting the machine, and necessary configurations before first use.
Chapter 3 - Basic Operation

Describes the procedures for basic copying, printing and scanning.
Chapter 4 - Copying Functions

Describes the functions you can use when copying.
Chapter 5 - Sending Functions

Describes the functions you can use when sending originals.
Chapter 6 - Document Box

Provides a basic guide to using document boxes.
Chapter 7 - Status / Job Cancel

Explains how to check the job status and job history and how to cancel jobs being printed or waiting to print.
Also explains how to check the remaining paper and device status and how to cancel fax transmission
Chapter 8 - Default Setting (System Menu)

Describes the System Menu options for general machine operation.
Chapter 9 - Maintenance
Describes cleaning and toner replacement.
Chapter 10 - Troubleshooting
Explains how to handle error messages, paper jams and other problems.
Chapter 11 - Management
Explains user login administration and job accounting.
Appendix
Explains how to enter characters, and lists the machine specifications.
Introduces the convenient optional equipment available for this machine.
Provides information on media types and paper sizes. Also includes a glossary of terms.
xxvi
Conventions in This Guide
The following conventions are used depending on the nature of the description.
Convention Description Example
Bold Indicates the operation panel Press the Start key.

keys or a computer screen.
[Regular] Indicates the touch panel keys. Press [OK].
Italic Indicates a message displayed Ready to copy is displayed.

on the touch panel.
Used to emphasize a key word, For more information refer to Sleep and
phrase or references to Auto Sleep on page 2-9.
additional information.
Note Indicates supplemental

information or operations for NOTE:
reference.
Important Indicates items that are required

or prohibited so as to avoid IMPORTANT:
problems.
Caution Indicates what must be

observed to prevent injury or
CAUTION:
machine breakdown and how to
deal with it.
Description of Operation Procedure

In this Operation Guide, continuous operation of the keys on the touch panel is as follows:
Description in this
Actual procedure
Operation Guide
Press [Copy]. Press [Copy], [Next] of Quick

 Setup, [ ] twice, and then
Press [Next] of Quick Setup. [Change] of Original Image.

Press [ ] twice.

Press [Change] of Original Image.
xxvii
Originals and Paper Sizes
This section explains the notation used in this guide when referring to sizes of originals or paper sizes.
As with A4, B5 and Letter, which may be used either in the horizontal or vertical direction, horizontal direction is
indicated by an additional letter R in order to indicate the orientation of the original/paper.
Placement direction Indicated size *
Vertical direction A4, B5, A5, B6,

B B A6, 16K, Letter,
Statement
A A
Original Paper
For the originals/paper, dimension A is longer

than B.
Horizontal direction A4-R, B5-R, A5-R,

B B B6-R, A6-R, 16K-
R, Letter-R,
Statement-R
A
A
Original Paper
For the originals/paper, dimension A is shorter

than B.
* The size of the original/paper that can be used depends on the
function and source tray. For further details, refer to the page
detailing that function or source tray.
Icons on the Touch Panel

The following icons are used to indicate originals and paper placement directions on the touch panel.
Placement direction Originals Paper
Vertical direction
Horizontal direction
xxviii
1 Part Names
This chapter identifies the machine parts and operation panel keys.
• Operation Panel ..................................................................................1-2

• Machine ..............................................................................................1-4
1-1
Part Names
Operation Panel
Displays the Status/Job Cancel screen.

Displays the System Menu.
Displays number of sheets printed and number of pages scanned.
Displays help guidance.
Blinks during printing operation.

Blinks while data is transmitted.
Selects auto color mode.

Selects full color mode.
Selects black and white mode.
Displays the Copy screen.
Displays the screen for sending.
You can also change this to show the address book screen.
Switches the touch panel display to enlarged display in the
Copy screen or Send screen.
Displays the Document Box screen.
Displays the Application screen.
Displays the Program screen.
1-2
Part Names
Blinks while data is received.

Blinks while the machine is accessing the hard disk, fax memory or USB memory
1
(general-purpose item).
Lights or blinks when an error occurs and a job is stopped.
Displays the Interrupt Copy screen.
Ends operation (logs out) on the Administration screen.
Puts the machine into Low Power Mode.
Puts the machine into Sleep Mode.
Recovers from Sleep if in Sleep Mode.
Lit when the machine's
main power is on.
Numeric keys. Returns settings to

Enter numbers and symbols. their default states.
Clears entered numbers and characters. Cancels or pauses the

printing job in progress.
Recalls already registered destinations and
programs for sending. Starts copying and scanning
operations and processing for setting
Finalizes numeric key entry, and finalizes screen during operations.
setting of functions. Operates linked with the on-screen
[OK].
1-3
Part Names
Machine
1
12
2
4 3
13
14
15
5
6
7 16
8
9
17
10
18
11
1 Original Cover (Option)

2 Platen
3 Original Size Indicator Plates
4 Slit Glass
5 Left Cover 1
6 Left Cover 1 Indicator
7 Left Cover 1 Lever
8 Left Cover 2 Indicator
9 Left Cover 2
10 Left Cover 3
11 Handles
12 Clip Holder
13 Operation Panel
14 Attention Indicator ... Lights or blinks when an error occurs and a job is stopped
15 Receive Indicator ... Blinks while data is received
16 Front Cover
17 Cassette 1
18 Cassette 2
1-4
Part Names
19 1
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29 30
19 Toner Container Release Lever (Magenta)

20 Toner Container (Magenta)
21 Toner Container Release Lever (Cyan)
22 Toner Container (Cyan)
23 Toner Container Release Lever (Yellow)
24 Toner Container (Yellow)
25 Toner Container Release Lever (Black)
26 Toner Container (Black)
27 Cleaning Brush
28 Waste Toner Box
29 Waste Toner Tray
30 Release button
1-5
Part Names
32 31
34 33
41
42
43
44
45
35 46
40
36
37 38 39
31 Top Tray
32 USB Memory Slot (A1)
33 Paper Feed Unit Cover
34 Paper Feed Unit
35 Green Knob
36 Paper Width Adjusting Tab
37 Paper Length Guide
38 Handles
39 Multi Purpose Tray
40 Paper Width Guide
41 Option Interface Slot (OPT2)
42 USB Port (A2)
43 Network Interface Connector
44 USB Interface Connector (B1)
45 Option Interface Slot (OPT1)
46 Main Power Switch
1-6
2 Preparation before Use
This chapter explains the preparations before using this equipment for the first time as well
as the procedures for loading paper and originals.
• Check the Accessories .......................................................................2-2

• Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables...............2-3
• Connecting Cables..............................................................................2-5
• Power On/Off ......................................................................................2-7
• Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode ....................................2-9
• Sleep and Auto Sleep .......................................................................2-10
• Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle ................................................2-11
• Switching the Language for Display [Language]...............................2-11
• Setting Date and Time ......................................................................2-12
• Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) ..........................................2-13
• Installing Software.............................................................................2-16
• COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail) ......................................2-17
• Loading Paper...................................................................................2-20
• Loading Originals ..............................................................................2-32
2-1
Preparation before Use
Check the Accessories

Check that the following accessories are included.
• Operation Guide (This Guide)

• Quick Guide to Adjusting Image Quality
• CD-ROM (Product Library)
Documents Contained in the Included CD-ROM

The following documents are contained in the included CD-ROM (Product Library). Refer to them as necessary.
Documents
KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide
Printer Driver User Guide
Network FAX Driver Operation Guide
TWAIN/WIA Driver Operation Guide
KM-NET for Direct Printing Operation Guide
KMnet Viewer User Guide
Scan to SMB (PC) Setup Guide
PRESCRIBE Commands Technical Reference
PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference
Data Security Kit (E) Operation Guide
2-2
Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables

Check the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network, and prepare the necessary cables.
Connection Example 2
Determine the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network by referring to the illustration below.
Connecting a scanner to your PC network with a network

cable (100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T)
COMMAND CENTER
Network Send E-mail
Administrator’s
PC Network settings, Scanner
default settings, User and Sends the image data
destination registration of scanned originals to
the desired recipient
as a file attached to an
E-mail message.
MFP
Printing
Network Send SMB

USB
Saves the scanned
image as a data file on
your PC.
Network
Network FAX Network Network

(Option) Send FTP
Sends the scanned

image as a data file on
the FTP.
FAX TWAIN Scanning

FAX (Option)
Network
WIA Scanning
Network TWAIN and WIA are

standardized interface
for communication
between software
applications and image
acquisition devices.
2-3
Preparing Necessary Cables

The following interfaces are available to connect the equipment to a PC. Prepare the necessary cables
according to the interface you use.
Available Standard Interfaces
Function Interface Necessary Cable
Printer/Scanner Network interface LAN (10Base-T or

/Network FAX* 100Base-TX, Shielded)
Printer USB interface USB2.0 compatible cable

(Hi-Speed USB compliant,
Max. 5.0 m, Shielded)
* Function available when using optional fax kit. For details on
Network FAX, refer to the Fax Kit Operation Guide.
2-4
Connecting Cables
Connecting LAN Cable (Optional)

Follow the steps below to connect a LAN cable to the machine. 2
1 When the machine is powered up, first press the
Power key on the operation panel. Check that the
Power indicator and the memory indicator are off.
After this, turn off the main power switch.
Check that
the indicators
are off.
2 Connect the LAN cable to the network interface

located on right side of the body.
3 Connect the other end of the cable to the hub.
4 Configure the network. For details, refer to Network

Setup (LAN Cable Connection) on page 2-13.
2-5
Connecting USB Cable

Follow the steps below to connect a USB cable to the machine.
1 When the machine is powered up, first press the

Power key on the operation panel. Check that the
Power indicator and the memory indicator are off.
After this, turn off the main power switch.
Check that
the indicators
are off.
2 Connect the USB cable to the appropriate interface

located on the right side of the body.
3 Connect the other end of the cable to the PC.
Connecting the Power Cable

Connect one end of the supplied power cable to the machine and the other end to a power outlet.
IMPORTANT: Only use the power cable that comes with the machine.
2-6
Power On/Off
Power On
When the main power indicator is lit... 2

Press the Power key.
When the main power indicator is off...

Open the main power switch cover and turn the main
power switch on.
NOTE: If the optional Data Security Kit is installed, a message might display indicating the security function is
being activated and time may be taken to start up when the power is turned on.
IMPORTANT: When turning off the main power switch, do not turn on the main power switch again immediately.
Wait more than 5 seconds, and then turn on the main power switch.
2-7
Power Off
Before turning off the main power switch, press the Power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the
Power key and the memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch.
CAUTION: The hard disk may be operating when the Power key or Memory indicator is lit or blinking. Turning
off the main power switch while the hard disk is operating may cause damage.
Make sure
that the
indicators
are off.
In case of not using the machine for an extended period of time
CAUTION: If this machine will be left unused for an extended period (e.g. overnight), turn it off at the
main power switch. If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time (e.g. vacation),
remove the power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution. If the optional Fax kit is installed, note that
turning the machine off at the main power switch disables fax transmission and reception.
CAUTION: Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to protect it from humidity.
2-8
Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode

Low Power Mode
To activate Low Power Mode, press the Energy Saver key. Touch panel and all indicators on the operation
panel will go out to save power except the Energy Saver, Power, and main power indicators. This status is
2
referred to as Low Power Mode.
If print data is received during Low Power Mode, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing.
Also when fax data arrives while the machine is in Low Power Mode when using the optional fax, the machine
automatically wakes up and starts printing.
To resume, perform one of the following actions. The machine will be ready to operate within 30 seconds.
• Press any key on the operation panel.

• Open the original cover or the optional document
processor.
• Place originals in the optional document processor.
Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as

ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more
slowly.
Auto Low Power Mode
Auto Low Power Mode automatically switches the machine into Low Power Mode if left idle for a preset time.
The default preset time is 3 minutes for 25/25 ppm model, 30/30 ppm model, 40/40 ppm model, and 50/40 ppm
model or 5 minutes for 55/50 ppm model.
2-9
Sleep and Auto Sleep

Sleep
To enter Sleep, press the Power key. Touch panel and
all indicators on the operation panel will go out to save
a maximum amount of power except the Main Power
indicator. This status is referred to as Sleep.
If print data is received during Sleep, the print job is

performed while the touch panel remains unlit.
When using the optional fax, received fax data is printed

out while the operation panel also remains unlit.
To resume, press the Power key. The 25/25 ppm or 30/

30 ppm model will be ready to use within 30 seconds,
the 40/40 ppm or 50/40 ppm model will be ready within
45 seconds, or the 55/50 ppm model will be ready within
57.5 seconds.
Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as

ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more
slowly.
Auto Sleep
Auto Sleep automatically switches the machine into Sleep if left idle for a preset time in the Low Power Mode.
The default preset time is 30 minutes for 25/25 ppm and 30/30 ppm models, 45 minutes for 40/40 ppm model,
or 60 minutes for 50/40 ppm model and 55/50 ppm models.
2-10
Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle

Adjust the angle of the operation panel in two as shown
by releasing the operation panel lock lever.
2
Switching the Language for Display [Language]

Select the language displayed on the touch panel.
Use the procedure below to select the language.
1 Press the System Menu key.
2 Press [Common Settings] and then [Change] of

Language.
Common Settings - Language 3 Press the key for the language you want to use.
Set the language to use for the touch panel display.
English Deutsch Français Español Italiano
Nederlands ǸțșșȒȐȑ Português
Cancel OK
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
4 Press [OK].
The touch panel language will be changed.
2-11
Setting Date and Time

Follow the steps below to set the local date and time at the place of installation.
When you send an E-mail using the transmission function, the date and time as set here will be printed in the
header of the E-mail message. Set the date, time and time difference from GMT of the region where the machine
is used.
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges. If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter
a login user name and password, and press [Login]. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-5 for the default login
user name and password.
Be sure to set the time difference before setting the date and time.
If you change Date/Time setting, trial functions will be unavailable. For details, refer to Optional Functions on
page 8-83.
2 Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of

Time Zone.
Date/Timer - Time Zone

3 Select the region.
Set time zone.
Select the location nearest you.
Time Zone
NOTE: Press [ ] or [ ] to view the next region.
-12:00 International Date Line West
-11:00 Midway Island, Samoa
-10:00 Hawaii
4 Press [Off] or [On] of Summer Time and press [OK].
Summer Time
1/13
-09:00 Alaska Off
-08:00 Pacific Time (US & Canada)

On NOTE: If you select a region that does not utilize
-07:00 Arizona
summer time, the summer time setting screen will not
Cancel OK appear.
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
5 Press [Change] of Date/Time.
Date/Timer - Date/Time
6 Set the date and time. Press [+] or [–] in each
Set the date and time.
setting.
7 Press [OK].
2008 Year 10 Month 10 Day
Off
10 Hour 10 Minute 31 Second
Cancel OK
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
2-12
Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection)

The machine is equipped with network interface, which is compatible with network protocols such as TCP/IP
(IPv4), TCP/IP (IPv6), IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, IPSec, and AppleTalk. It enables network printing on the Windows,
Macintosh, UNIX, NetWare and other platforms. 2
This section explains the TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup and AppleTalk Setup procedures. For other network settings,
refer to the Network Setup on 8-73.
• TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup...2-13

• AppleTalk Setup...2-15
administrator privileges. If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter
a login user name and password, and press [Login]. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-5 for the default login
user name and password.
TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup (by Entering IP Addresses)

Set up TCP/IP to connect to the Windows network. Set the IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateway
addresses. The default settings are "TCP/IP Protocol: On, DHCP: On, Bonjour: Off, Auto-IP: On".
NOTE: Prior to the IP address entries, obtain permission from the network administrator.
Auto-IP is available with 55/50 ppm model.
Use the procedure below.
2 Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Next]

of TCP/IP Setting.
3 Press [Change] of TCP/IP.
4 Press [On] and then press [OK].
5 Press [Change] of IPv4.
System - IPv4
6 Press [DHCP].
Set TCP/IP (IPv4).
7 Press [Off] of DHCP and then press [OK].
IP Address 0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0

8 Press [Bonjour].
On
Default
Gateway 0.0.0.0 9 Press [Off] of Bonjour and then press [OK].
On Off On 10 Press [IP Address] and enter the address using the
DHCP Bonjour Auto-IP numeric keys.
Cancel OK
11 Press [Subnet Mask] and enter the address using
the numeric keys.
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
12 Press [Default Gateway] and enter the address

using the numeric keys.
2-13
13 Check if all the address entries are correct and

press [OK].
14 After changing the setting, restart the system or

turn the machine OFF and then ON again.
For detailed information on restarting the system,

refer to Restarting the System on page 8-72.
DHCP Settings
Select whether or not to use the DHCP server. The default setting is On.

of TCP/IP Setting.
6 Press [DHCP].
7 Press [On] or [Off] of DHCP and then press [OK].


Bonjour Settings
Select whether or not to use Bonjour. The default setting is Off.

of TCP/IP Setting.
6 Press [Bonjour].
7 Press [On] or [Off] of Bonjour and then press [OK].
2-14


2
Auto-IP Settings
Select whether or not to use Auto-IP. The default setting is On.

of TCP/IP Setting.
6 Press [Auto-IP].
7 Press [On] or [Off] of Auto-IP and then press [OK].


AppleTalk Setup
Select the Apple Talk network connection. The default setting is On.
2 Press [System], [Next] of Network and then

[Change] of AppleTalk.
3 Press [On] or [Off].
4 Press [OK].


2-15
Installing Software
Install appropriate software on your PC from the included Product Library CD-ROM (Product Library) if you want
to use the printer function of this machine or perform TWAIN / WIA transmission or FAX transmission from your
PC.
NOTE: Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
Plug and Play is disabled on this device when in Sleep. Wake the device from Low Power Mode or Sleep before
continuing. See Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode on page 2-9 and Sleep and Auto Sleep on page
2-10.
2-16
COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail)

COMMAND CENTER is a tool used for tasks such as verifying the operating status of the machine and changing
the settings for security, network printing, E-mail transmission and advanced networking.
2
NOTE: Here, information on the FAX settings has been omitted. For more information on using the FAX, refer
to the Fax Kit Operation Guide.
The procedure for accessing COMMAND CENTER is explained below.
1 Launch your Web browser.
2 In the Address or Location bar, enter the machine’s IP address.
E.g.) http://192.168.48.21/
The web page displays basic information about the machine and COMMAND CENTER as well as their
current status.
3 Select a category from the navigation bar on the left of the screen. The values for each category must be
set separately.
If restrictions have been set for COMMAND CENTER, enter the correct user name and password to access
pages other than the startup page.
For details, refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide.
2-17
Sending E-mail
Specifying the SMTP settings allows you to send images loaded onto this machine as E-mail attachments.
To use this function, this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol.
Before sending images loaded onto this machine as E-mail attachments, check the following:
• The network environment used to connect this machine to the mail server
A full-time connection via a LAN is recommended.
• SMTP Settings
Use COMMAND CENTER to register the IP address or host name of the SMTP server.
• If limits have been set on the size of E-mail messages, it may not be possible to send very large E-mails.
The procedure for specifying the SMTP settings is explained below.
1 Click Advanced -> SMTP -> General.
2-18
2 Enter the correct settings in each field.
The settings to be specified in the SMTP settings screen are shown below.
Item Description
2
SMTP Protocol Enables or disables SMTP protocol. To use E-mail, this protocol must be
enabled.
SMTP Port Number Set the SMTP Port Number or use the SMTP default port 25.
SMTP Server Name Enter the SMTP server IP address or its name. The maximum length of the
SMTP server name and IP address is 64 characters. If entering the name, a DNS
server address must also be configured. The DNS server address may be
entered on the TCP/IP General tab.
SMTP Server Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds.
Authentication Enables or disables the SMTP authentication protocol or sets POP before SMTP
Protocol as the protocol. The SMTP authentication supports Microsoft Exchange 2000.
Authenticate as Authentication can be set from three POP3 accounts or you can choose a
different account.
Login User Name When Other is selected for Authenticate, the login user name set here will be
used for SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the login user name is
64 characters.
Login Password When Other is selected for Authenticate, the password set here will be used for
authentication. The maximum length of the login password is 64 characters.
POP before SMTP Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds when you have
Timeout selected POP before SMTP as the Authentication Protocol.
Test This will test if the SMTP connection can be successfully established.
E-mail Size Limit Enter the maximum size of E-mail that can be sent in kilobytes. When the value is
0, the limitation for E-mail size is disabled.
Sender Address Enter the E-mail address of the person responsible for the machine, such as the
machine administrator, so that a reply or non-delivery report will go to a person
rather than to the machine. The sender address must be entered correctly for
SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the sender address is
128 characters.
Signature Enter the signature. The signature is free form text that will appear at the end of
the E-mail body. It is often used for further identification of the machine. The
maximum length of the signature is 512 characters.
Domain Restriction Enter the domain names that can be permitted or rejected. The maximum length
of the domain name is 32 characters. You can also specify E-mail addresses.
3 Click Submit.
2-19
Loading Paper
Paper can be loaded standardly in the two cassettes and the multi purpose tray. A paper feeder is also available
as an option (refer to Optional Equipment on Appendix-2).
Before Loading Paper

When you open a new package of paper, fan the sheets
to separate them slightly prior to loading in the following
steps.
1 Bend the whole set of sheets to swell them in the

middle.
2 Hold the stack at both ends and stretch it while

keeping the entire stack risen.
3 Raise the right and left hands alternately to create

a gap and feed air between the paper.
4 Finally, align the paper on a level, flat table.
If the paper is curled or folded, straighten it before

loading. Paper that is curled or folded may cause a
jam.
CAUTION: If you copy onto used paper (paper already

used for copying), do not use paper that is stapled or
clipped together. This may damage the machine or
cause poor image quality.
NOTE: If printouts are curled or not neatly stapled,

turn the stack in the cassette upside down.
Avoid exposing opened paper to high temperatures

and high humidity as dampness can be a cause of
problems. Seal any remaining paper after loading
in the multi purpose tray or cassettes back in the
paper storage bag.
If the machine will not be used for a prolonged

period, protect all paper from humidity by removing
it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper
storage bag.
NOTE: If you use special paper such as letterhead,

paper with holes or paper with pre-prints like logo or
company name, refer to the Paper on Appendix-10.
2-20
Loading Paper in the Cassettes

The 2 standard cassettes will each hold plain paper, recycled paper or color paper.
Cassette 1 holds up to 500 sheets of A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m2) or up to 250 sheets of B4 or larger
plain paper (80 g/m2). Cassette 2 holds up to 500 sheets of plain paper (80 g/m2) (or up to 550 sheets of 64 g/ 2
m2 plain paper).
The following paper sizes are supported: Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 8.5×13.5", Letter, Letter-R, Statement, A3,
B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5, Folio, 8K, 16K, and 16K-R.
IMPORTANT:
• For clearer and brighter color copies, use the special color paper.
You should not use inkjet printer paper or any paper with a special surface coating. (Such paper may cause
paper jams or other faults.)
• When using media types other than plain paper (such as recycled or colored paper), always specify the
media type setting. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2-28)
The cassettes can hold paper with weights up to 163 g/m2. If you are using a paper weight between 106
and 163 g/m2, set the media type to Thick.
• Do not load thick paper that is heavier than 163 g/m2 in the cassettes. Use the multi purpose tray for paper
that is heavier than 163 g/m2.
1 Pull the cassette out toward you until it stops.
NOTE: Do not pull out more than one cassette at a

time.
2 Using the paper length guide, move the plate to fit

the paper.
When loading A4 or smaller paper into cassette 1,

lift up the paper length guide. For B4 or larger
paper, lower the paper length guide.
NOTE: Paper sizes are marked on the cassette.
2-21
3 Holding the paper width adjusting tab, move the

paper width guides to fit the paper.
NOTE: Paper sizes are indicated on the cassettes.

To change between inch size and metric size (A, B
A
sizes), follow the steps below to adjust the size switch.
1. Holding the paper width adjusting tab, move the

B
paper width guide to a position other than that of the
paper.
2. Turn the size switch A 90°.

>
3. Move the size lever B up (C) or down (I).

C:metric size (centimeters) (A, B sizes)
I:inch size
4. Turn the size switch 90°to lock it.

>
4 Align the paper flush against the left side of the

cassette.
2-22
IMPORTANT:
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not
curled or folded. Paper that is curled or folded may
cause paper jams. 2
• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the
level indicator (see illustration below).
• When loading the paper, keep the side that was
closest the package seal facing up.
• The paper length and width guides must be
adjusted to the paper size. Loading the paper
without adjusting these guides may cause skewed
feeding and paper jams.
• Be sure that the paper length and width guides rest
securely against the paper. If there is a gap,
readjust the guides to fit the paper.
5 Insert the appropriate paper size card in the slot to

indicate the size of the paper inside.
6 Gently push the cassette back in.
NOTE: If the machine will not be used for a prolonged

period, protect all paper from humidity by removing it
from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage
bag.
7 Select the media type (plain, recycled, etc.) loaded

in the cassette. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size
and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2-28.)
2-23
Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray
The multi purpose tray will hold up to 100 sheets of A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m2) or up to 50 sheets of
plain paper (80 g/m2) lager than A4.
The multi purpose tray accepts paper sizes from A3 to A6 and Hagaki and from Ledger to Statement-R, 8K, 16K
and 16K-R. Be sure to use the multi purpose tray when you print on any special paper.
IMPORTANT: When using media types other than plain paper (such as recycled or colored paper), always
specify the media type setting. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on
page 2-30.) If you are using a paper weight of 106 g/m2 or more, set the media type to Thick.
The capacity of the multi purpose tray is as follows.
• A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m2), recycled paper or color paper: 100 sheets
• B4 or larger plain paper (80 g/m2), recycled paper or color paper: 50 sheets
• Hagaki: 30 sheets
• OHP film: 10 sheets
• Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10), Monarch, Youkei 4, Youkei 2: 10 sheets
NOTE: When you load custom size paper, enter the paper size by referring to Specifying Paper Size and
Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-30.
When you use special paper such as transparencies or thick paper, select the media type by referring to
Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-30.
1 Open the multi purpose tray.
2 When loading paper sizes from A3 to B4 and

Ledger to Legal, extend the support tray section of
the multi purpose tray.
2-24
3 Adjust the paper width guides to the width of the

paper.
4 Insert the paper along the paper width guides into

the tray until it stops.
IMPORTANT: Keep the side that was closest the

package seal facing up.
Curled paper must be uncurled before use.
Straighten the top edge if it is curled.
When loading paper into the multi purpose tray, check
that there is no paper left over in the tray from a previous
job before loading the paper. If there is just a small
amount of paper left over in the multi purpose tray and
you want to add more, first remove the left-over paper
from the tray and include it with the new paper before
loading the paper back into the tray.
2-25
Loading Envelopes
Up to 10 envelopes may be loaded in the multi purpose tray.
Acceptable envelope sizes are as follows.
Acceptable Envelope Size
Monarch 3 7/8"×7 1/2"
Envelope #10 (Commercial #10) 4 1/8"×9 1/2"
Envelope DL 110×220 (mm)
Envelope C5 162×229 (mm)
Youkei 2 162×114 (mm)
Youkei 4 235×105 (mm)
1 Open the multi purpose tray.
2 Adjust the paper width guides to the width of the

envelope.
3 For landscape form envelopes, close the flap.

Insert the envelope all the way along the width
guides, keeping the printing side face-up and the
edge with the flap facing towards you.
For portrait form envelopes, close the flap. Insert

the envelope all the way along the width guides,
keeping the printing side face-up and the edge with
the flap facing the insertion slot.
2-26
When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multi purpose tray

Load envelope with the print side facing up.
2
Landscape form
envelopes
Close the flap.
Portrait form envelopes

Close the flap.
Cardstock (Hagaki)
Return postcard (Oufuku Hagaki)
IMPORTANT: Use unfolded return postcard (Oufuku Hagaki).

Close the lap of envelopes.
IMPORTANT: How to load envelopes (orientation and

facing) will differ depending on the type of envelope. Be
sure to load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be
done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face.
NOTE: When you load envelopes in the multi purpose

tray, select the envelope type by referring to Specifying
Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose
Tray on page 2-30.
2-27
Specifying Paper Size and Media

The default paper size setting for cassettes 1 and 2, for multi purpose tray and for the optional paper feeder
(cassettes 3 and 4) is [Auto], and the default media type setting is [Plain].
To fix the type of paper to be used in cassettes, specify the paper size and media type setting. (Refer to
Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2-28.)
To fix the type of paper to be used in multi purpose tray, specify the paper size setting. (Refer to Specifying
Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-30.)
Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes
To fix the type of paper to be used in cassettes 1 or 2 or the optional paper feeder (cassettes 3 and 4), specify
the paper size. Also, you use a media type other than plain paper, specify the media type setting.
Selection Item Selectable Size/Type
Paper Auto Paper size is automatically detected and

Size selected. Select whether the paper is in Metric
size or in Inch size.
Standard Select from the standard sizes. Selectable paper

Sizes 1 sizes are as follows.
Inch size: Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal,
Statement-R, 8.5×13.5" and Oficio II
Metric size: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R,
and Folio
Standard Select from the standard sizes not included in

Sizes 2 Standard Sizes 1. Selectable paper sizes are as
follows.
Inch size: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R,
Folio, 8K, 16K-R and 16K
Metric size: Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal,
Statement-R, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II, 8K, 16K-R and
16K
Media Type Plain (105 g/m2 or less), Rough, Vellum (64 g/m2
or less), Recycled, Preprinted**, Bond*, Color,
Prepunched**, Letterhead**, Thick (106 g/m2 and
more)*, High Quality and Custom 1~8*
* To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Paper Weight on
page 8-7. When the paper weight settings shown below are
selected, the media indicated for each setting cannot be selected.
• Bond: Heavy 3
• Thick: Heavy 3 or Extra Heavy
• Custom 1 to 8: Heavy 3 or Extra Heavy
** To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to
Special Paper Action on page 8-10.
NOTE: If the optional FAX kit is installed, the available media types for printing received faxes are as shown
below.
Plain, Recycled, Bond, Color, High Quality, Rough and Custom 1 to 8
2-28
2 Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original /

Paper Settings, [Next] of Cassette Setting.
3 Cassette Setting, select one of [Cassette 1] to

[Cassette 4] and press [Next].
Then press [Change] of Paper Size.
NOTE: [Cassette 3] and [Cassette 4] are shown when

the optional paper feeder is installed.
4 For automatic detection of the paper size, press

[Auto] and select [Metric] or [Inch] as the unit.
Common Settings - Paper Size

To select the paper size, press [Standard Sizes 1]
Set cassette paper size. or [Standard Sizes 2] and select the paper size.
5 Press [OK]. The previous screen reappears.

Auto A3 A4 A4 A5
Standard B4 B5 B5 Folio
Sizes 1
Standard
Sizes 2
Cancel OK
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Common Settings - Media Type

6 Press [Change] of Media Type and select the
Select type of paper in Cassette 1.
media type. Then press [OK].
Plain Rough Vellum
Recycled Preprinted Bond Color
Prepunched Letterhead Thick High Quality
Custom 1 Custom 2 Custom 3 Custom 4 Custom 5
Custom 6 Custom 7 Custom 8
Cancel OK
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
2-29
Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray
To fix the type of paper to be used in the multi purpose tray, specify the paper size.When using other than a
plain paper, specify the media type.
Item Description
Paper Auto Paper size is automatically detected and selected.

Size Select whether the paper is in Metric size or in Inch size.
Standard Select from the standard sizes. Selectable paper sizes

Sizes 1 are as follows.
Inch size: Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R,
Executive, 8.5×13.5" and Oficio II
Metric size: A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A6-R, B4-R, B5-R, B5,
B6-R and Folio
Standard Select from the standard sizes not included in Standard

Sizes 2 Sizes 1. Selectable paper sizes are as follows.
Inch size: A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A6-R B4-R, B5-R, B5,
B6-R, Folio, 8K, 16K-R and 16K
Metric size: Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R,
Executive, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II, 8K, 16K-R and 16K
Others Select from special standard sizes and custom sizes.

Selectable paper sizes are as follows.
ISO B5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10), Envelope #9
(Commercial #9), Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4),
Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,
Envelope C4, Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4,
Youkei 2
Size Enter the size not included in the standard size.

Entry Selectable paper sizes are as follows.
Inch size
X (Horizontal): 5.83~17" (in 0.01" increments),
Y (Vertical): 3.86~11.69" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric size
X (Horizontal): 148~432 mm (in 1mm increments),
Y (Vertical): 98~297 mm (in 1mm increments)
Media Type Selectable media types are as follows.

Plain (105g /m2 or less), Rough, Transparency,
Vellum (64 g/m2 or less), Labels, Recycled, Preprinted**,
Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched**, Letterhead**,
Envelope, Thick (106 g/m2 and more), Coated,
High Quality and Custom 1~8
* To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Paper Weight on page
8-7.
** To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special
Paper Action on page 8-10.
NOTE: If the optional FAX kit is installed and the multi purpose tray is used to print a received FAX, the
available media types are as shown below.
Plain, Recycled, Bond, Color, High Quality, Rough and Custom 1 to 8
2-30
2 Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original /

Paper Settings, [Next] of MP Tray Setting, and then
[Change] of Paper Size.
Common Settings - Multi Purpose Tray Setting

3 For automatic detection of the paper size, press
Set the multi-purpose tray paper size. [Auto] and select [Metric] or [Inch] as the unit.
To select the paper size, press any of [Standard

Auto A3 A4 A4 A5
Sizes 1], [Standard Sizes 2], [Others] or [Size
Standard
Sizes 1
A6 B4 B5 B5 Entry] and select the paper size.
Standard B6 Folio
Sizes 2
Others
Size Entry
Cancel OK
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Common Settings - Paper Size

If you have chosen [Size Entry], press [+] or [–] to
Set the multi-purpose tray paper size.
enter X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) sizes. You may
enter the size directly using the numeric keys by
pressing [# Keys].
Auto
Standard
Sizes 1
X(148 - 432) Y(98到297) 4 Press [OK]. The previous screen reappears.
420 mm
297 mm
Standard
Sizes 2
Others
# Keys # Keys
Size Entry
Cancel OK
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Common Settings - Media Type

5 Press [Change] of Media Type and select the
Select type of paper in Multi-Purpose Tray. media type. Then press [OK].
Plain Transparency Rough Vellum Labels
Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color
Prepunched Letterhead Envelope Thick Coated
High Quality Custom 1 Custom 2 Custom 3 Custom 4
Custom 5 Custom 6 Custom 7 Custom 8
Cancel OK
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
2-31
Loading Originals
Follow the steps below to load originals for copying, sending or storing.
Placing Originals on the Platen

You may place books or magazines on the platen in addition to ordinary sheet originals.
1 Open the original cover.
NOTE: If the optional document processor is installed,

open the document processor. Before opening the
document processor, be sure that there are no originals
left on the original table or on the original eject table.
Originals left on the original table or on the original
eject table may fall off when the document processor is
opened.
Keep the document processor open if the original is
40 mm (1 5/8") or thicker.
2 Place the original. Put the scanning side facedown

and align it flush against the original size indicator
plates with the back left corner as the reference
point.
2-32
 Original size indicator plates

(Inch models)
(Metric models)
3 Close the original cover.
IMPORTANT: Do not push the original cover forcefully

when you close it. Excessive pressure may crack the
platen glass.
NOTE: Shadows may be produced around the edges

and in the middle of open-faced originals.
CAUTION: Do not leave the document processor open

as there is a danger of personal injury.
2-33
Loading Originals in the Document Processor

The optional document processor automatically scans each sheet of multiple originals. Both sides of two-sided
originals are scanned.
Part Names of the Document Processor

(1) (1) Original placement indicator
(2) (2) Top cover
(3)
(4) (3) Original width guides
(5) (4) Original table
(6) (5) Original eject table
(6) Original stopper
(7) (7) Opening handle
Originals Supported by the Document Processor
The document processor supports the following types of originals.
Weight 45 to 160 g/m2 (duplex: 50 to 120 g/m2)
Size Maximum A3 to Minimum A5

Maximum Ledger to Minimum Statement-R
Capacity Plain paper (80 g/m2), Colored paper, Recycled paper:

100 sheets (Mixed size originals: 30 sheets)
Thick paper (120 g/m2): 66 sheets
Thick paper (160 g/m2): 50 sheets
Art paper: 1 sheet
High quality paper (110 g/m2): 72 sheets
Originals Not Supported by the Document Processor
Do not use the document processor for the following types of originals.
• Soft originals such as vinyl sheets

• Transparencies such as OHP film
• Carbon paper
• Originals with very slippery surfaces
• Originals with adhesive tape or glue
• Wet originals
• Originals with correction fluid which is not dried
• Irregularly shaped (non-rectangular) originals
• Originals with cut-out sections
• Crumpled paper
• Originals with folds (Straighten the folds before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam).
• Originals bound with clips or staples (Remove the clips or staples and straighten curls, wrinkles or creases
before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam).
2-34
How to Load Originals
IMPORTANT: Before loading originals, be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table.
Originals left on the original eject table may cause the new originals to jam.
2
1 Adjust the original width guides to fit the originals.
2 Place the originals. Put the side to be scanned (or

the first side of two-sided originals) face-up. Slide
the leading edge into the document processor as
far as it will go. The original placement indicator will
be lit.
IMPORTANT: Confirm that the original width guides

exactly fit the originals. If there is a gap, readjust the
original width guides. The gap may cause the originals
to jam.
Ensure that loaded originals do not exceed the

level indicator. Exceeding the maximum level may
cause the originals to jam (see the figure).
Originals with punched holes or perforated lines

should be placed in such a way that the holes or
perforations will be scanned last (not first).
Original placement indicator

The original placement indicator is lit or unlit depending
on how originals are placed.
Indications and their status are as follows.
• Green (left indicator) lit: Original is placed

properly.
• Green (left indicator) blinking: Original is not
placed properly. Remove and place again.
• Red (right indicator) blinking: Original is jammed.
Remove the jammed original and place it properly.
2-35
2-36
3 Basic Operation
This chapter explains the following operations.
• Login/Logout .......................................................................................3-2
• Enter key and Quick No. Search key ..................................................3-2
• Touch Panel Display ...........................................................................3-4
• Original Preview..................................................................................3-5
• Selecting Color Mode..........................................................................3-6
• Copying...............................................................................................3-7
• Printing - Printing from Applications..................................................3-22
• Sending.............................................................................................3-24
• Specifying Destination ......................................................................3-30
• Using Document Box ........................................................................3-33
• Basic Operation for Document Box...................................................3-35
• Canceling Jobs .................................................................................3-42
• Quick Setup Screen ..........................................................................3-43
• Program (Copying and Sending) ......................................................3-46
• Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings) ...3-46
• Using the Internet Browser ...............................................................3-49
3-1
Basic Operation
Login/Logout
If user login administration is enabled, it is necessary to enter the login user name and password to use the
machine.
NOTE: You will be unable to login if you forget your login user name or login password. In this event, login with
administrator privileges and change your login user name or login password.
Login
1 If the screen shown appears during operations,
Enter login user name and password. press [Login User Name].
Press [# Keys] to enter the login data using the

Login to: Local
Login
User Name abcdef numeric keys.
# Keys
Login
********
Password
# Keys
IC Card
Login
Check Counter Cancel Login
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
2 Enter the login user name and press [OK].
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on

Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.
3 Press [Login Password].

numeric keys.
4 Enter the password and press [OK].
5 Check the login user name and password are

correct, and press [Login].
NOTE: If Network Authentication is selected as the

user authentication method, either Local or Network
can be selected as the authentication destination.
Logout
To logout from the machine, press the Logout key to

return to the login user name/password entry screen.
3-2
Basic Operation
Enter key and Quick No. Search key

This section explains how to use the Enter key and Quick No. Search key on the operation panel.
Using the Enter ( ) key

The Enter key works in the same way as keys displayed on the touch panel, such as [OK] and [Close].
3
The Enter symbol ( ) is displayed next to the keys whose operations are carried out by the Enter key (e.g.
[ OK], [ Close]).
The operation of the Enter key is explained below using copy paper selection as an example. For details of the
procedure, refer to Paper Selection on page 4-3.
Ready to copy. Copies 1 In the paper selection screen, press the key for the
cassette containing the required paper size.
Place original.
The Enter ( ) symbol appears on the [OK] on the

Place original.
Auto touch panel, indicating that the Enter key performs
A4 A4 the same action as [OK].
Plain Plain
A3 MP Tray
Original : ---
Plain Setting
2 To copy using the selected paper, press the Enter
key (or [OK]).
A4
Zoom : 100%
Plain
Paper : ---
A4
Preview
Plain
Add Shortcut Cancel OK
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Using the Quick No. Search ( ) key

Use the Quick No. Search keys to perform an action by simply entering a number directly using the numeric
keys. For example, you can specify the speed dial for a transmission destination or recall a stored program by
its program number.
The Quick No. Search key performs the same action as the [No.] displayed on the touch panel.
The use of the Quick No. Search key is explained below using an example in which a speed dial number is
specified and used to select a destination. For more information on speed dialing, refer to Specifying
Destination on page 3-30.
1 Press the Quick No. Search key (or [No.]) in the

basic send screen.
Ready to send. Destination 2 In the number entry screen, use the numeric keys
Place original. to enter the speed dial number.
Destination Detail Address
Book
A OFFICE
B OFFICE
1234567890
1/10
E-mail 3 If you entered speed dial number between 1 and 3
Enter One Touch key number
using # keys.
Addr Entry
digits long, press the Enter key (or [OK]).
C OFFICE Folder Path
(0001 - 1000) Entry
On Hook Direct 0011
FAX No. The specified destination appears in the
Entry
AAA
0001
BBB
00
i-FAX
destination list.
Cancel OK Addr Entry
0006 0007 0008 0009 0010 1/100
WSD Scan
FFF GGG HHH III JJJ
Destination Quick Setup Original/Sending Color/ Advanced

NOTE: If you enter a 4-digit speed dial number, the
Status
Data Format Image Quality Setup
08/08/2009 10:10
operation in step 3 can be omitted. The basic send
screen appears and the specified destination appears
in the destinations list.
3-3
Basic Operation
Touch Panel Display

Display for Originals and Paper
The touch panel displays the selected paper source and output tray.
Press Start key to start printing. Copies

Press [Cancel] to change settings. 1
Copy Image Original position Shortcut 1
Output
tray Shortcut 2
Paper Shortcut 3
source
Auto 100% Normal 0
Size/orientation of Shortcut 4
original and paper Original : A4

Paper Zoom Density
Selection
Zoom : 100% Shortcut 5
Paper : A4 2-sided 2 in 1 Off
>>2-sided
Cancel Duplex Combine Staple/Punch Shortcut 6
Quick Setup Org./Paper/ Color/ Layout/Edit Advanced

Finishing Image Quality Setup
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
3-4
Basic Operation
Original Preview
You can display a preview image of the scanned document on the panel.
NOTE: To view a preview of an image stored in a Custom Box, refer to Previewing Documents/Checking
Document Details on page 3-39.
The procedure for previewing scanned originals is explained below.
3
The procedure described here is for copying a single-page original.
1 Press the Copy key and place the original on the

platen.
Ready to copy. Copies 2 Press [Preview].
Copy Image Shortcut 1
Shortcut 2
Place original.
Shortcut 3
Auto 100% Normal 0

Shortcut 4
Paper Zoom Density
Original : --- Selection
Paper : --- 2-sided 2 in 1 Off
>>2-sided
Preview Duplex Combine Staple/Punch Shortcut 6

Status 10/10/2008 10:10
3 The machine starts scanning the original. When

scanning is completed, the preview image appears
on the panel.
Press Start key to start printing. Copies 4 To change the quality or the layout, press [Cancel]
Press [Cancel] to change settings. 1 or the Stop key. Change the settings and press
[Preview] again to see a preview image with the
Shortcut 2 new settings.
Shortcut 3
Auto 100% Normal 0

Shortcut 4 NOTE: If you scan a multi-page original, only the first
Original : A4
Paper
Selection
Zoom Density
Shortcut 5
page is previewed.
Zoom : 100%
Paper : A4 2-sided 2 in 1 Off
>>2-sided
Cancel Duplex Combine Staple/Punch Shortcut 6

Status 10/10/2008 10:10
5 If there is no problem with the preview image, press

the Start key. Copying begins.
3-5
Basic Operation
Selecting Color Mode

When you scan and then copy, send or store documents, you can select the color mode used for scanning from
the operation panel.
Automatically recognizes whether scanned

documents are color or black & white.
Scans all documents in full color.
Scans all documents in black & white.
The basic procedure for selecting the color mode is explained below, using an example in which the scanned
document is copied.
1 Press the Copy key.
2 Place the originals in the document processor or on

the platen.
3 Press the Auto Color key, Full Color key or Black

& White key to select the color mode.
4 Specify the required settings for copying.
5 Press the Start key.
NOTE: You can fine-tune the color mode from the

touch panel.
• Copying: You can use Single Color copying
in Cyan, Green, etc. (page 4-29).
• Sending/Storing: You can select Auto Color (Color/
Gray), Auto Color (Color/B & W)
or Grayscale (page 5-21).
You can also change the default color mode for copying
and sending/storing. For details, refer to Color Selection
(Copy) on page 8-17 or Color Selection (Send/
Store) on page 8-18.
3-6
Basic Operation
Copying
Follow the steps as below for basic copying.
1 Press the Copy key when the Copy key/indicator

is off.
NOTE: If the touch panel is turned off, press the 3

Energy Saver key or the Power key and wait for the
machine to warm up.
2 Place the originals on the platen or in the optional

document processor.
NOTE: For loading instructions, refer to Loading

Originals on page 2-32.
Ready to copy. Copies 3 Check that [Auto] is selected of Paper Selection on

the touch panel. Paper that matches the size of the
original will be selected automatically.
Shortcut 2
Place original. To change the paper size, press, [Org./Paper/

Finishing], [Paper Selection] and select the desired
Shortcut 3
paper source.
Auto 100% Normal 0
Shortcut 4
Paper Zoom Density
NOTE: Select paper size manually, if necessary,

>>2-sided

instead of using automatic paper selection.
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
4 Use the numeric keys to enter the copy quantity.

Specify the desired number up to 999.
5 Press the Start key to start copying.
6 Remove the finished copies from the top tray.
3-7
Basic Operation
Adjusting Density
Use this procedure to adjust the density when copying.
Density Adjustment Option Description
Manual Adjust density using 7 or 13 levels.
Auto Optimum density is selected according

to the density of the original.
NOTE: You may choose Auto mode as the default setting (refer to Density on page 8-19).
The procedure for adjusting the density of copies is explained below.
2 Place the originals on the platen.
3 Set the original on the platen and press [Color/

Image Quality] -> [Density].
Ready to copy. Copies 4 Adjust density manually pressing [-3] (Lighter) to

[+3] (Darker). You can change the density level [-3]
Density
(Lighter) to [+3] (Darker) in half-steps.
Auto
Place original.
To change density adjustment from Manual to Auto,
Lighter Normal Darker
press [Auto].
Original : ---
-3 -2 -1 0 +1 +2 +3
5 Press [OK].
Zoom : 100% -2.5 -1.5 -0.5 +0.5 +1.5 +2.5
Paper : ---
Preview
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
6 Press the Start key. Copying begins.
3-8
Basic Operation
Selecting Image Quality

Select image quality suited to the type of original.
The table below shows the quality options.
Image Quality Option Description
Text+Photo For originals with both text and

3
photographs.
Text For originals primarily consisting of text.
Photo For photos taken with a camera.
Printed Photo For photos printed in magazines, etc.
Map For maps, etc.
Printed Document For documents printed from this machine.
The procedure for selecting the quality of copies is explained below.
3 Set the original on the platen and press [Color/

Image Quality] -> [Original Image].
Ready to copy. Copies 4 Select the image quality.

1
Original Image 5 Press [OK].
Select original image type for best results.
[Printed Document]: Suitable for documents printed from
this machine.
Place original.
Text+Photo Photo Printed Photo
Original : ---
Zoom : 100%
Paper : ---
Text Map Printed
Preview Document
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
3-9
Basic Operation
Zoom Copying
Adjust the magnification to reduce or enlarge the original image. The following zoom options are available.
Auto Zoom
Ledger: 129 % Automatically reduces or enlarges the original image
suitably to the selected paper size.
Letter-R
A3: 141 %
Statement-R: 64 %
A4
A5: 70 %
Manual Zoom
Manually reduces or enlarges the original image in 1%
increments between 25% and 400%.
25 %
400 %
Preset Zoom
Reduces or enlarges at preset magnifications.
The following magnifications are available.
Model Zoom Level (Original Copy)
Inch Models 100%, Auto, 400% (Max.), 200% (STMT >>

Ledger), 154%(STMT >> Legal), 129% (Letter >>
Ledger), 121% (Legal >> Ledger), 78% (Legal >>
Letter), 77% (Ledger >> Legal), 64% (Ledger >>
Letter), 50% (Ledger >> STMT), 25% (Min.)
Metric Models 100%, Auto, 400% (Max.), 200% (A5 >> A3),
141% (A4 >> A3, A5 >> A4), 127% (Folio >>
A3), 106% (11×15" >> A3), 90% (Folio >> A4),
75% (11×15" >> A4),
70% (A3 >> A4, A4 >> A5), 50%, 25% (Min.)
Metric Models (Asia 100%, Auto, 400% (Max.), 200% (A5 >> A3),
Pacific) 141% (A4 >> A3, B5 >> B4), 122% (A4 >> B4,
A5 >> B5), 115% (B4 >> A3, B5 >> A4), 86%
(A3 >> B4, A4 >> B5), 81%(B4 >> A4, B5 >>
A5), 70% (A3 >> A4, B4 >> B5), 50%, 25%
(Min.)
3-10
Basic Operation
XY Zoom
Select vertical and horizontal magnifications
individually. Reduce or enlarge original images in 1%
increments between 25% and 400%.
3
X
The procedure for using zoom copying is explained below.
3 Set the original on the platen and press [Layout/

Edit] -> [Zoom].
Ready to copy. Copies 4 Press [Standard Zoom] to use Auto Zoom.

1
Zoom
(25 - 400)
Press [+] or [–] to change the displayed
Standard
Zoom 400 %
magnification as desired. You can also enter the
Place original. XY Zoom 400%
Max.
90%
Folio
>>A4
magnification directly using the numeric keys by
200%
A5>>A3
# Keys 75% 11x15"
pressing [# Keys].
>>A4
A4>>A3 100% 70% A3>>A4

When using Preset Zoom, select the key of desired
141%
A5>>A4 A4>>A5
Original : ---
Folio Auto
Zoom
Paper
: 100%
: ---
127%
>>A3
50%
magnification.
106% 11x15" 25%
Min.
Preview >>A3
When using XY Zoom, press [XY Zoom].
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Press [+] or [–] to change the displayed

magnifications of X (horizontal) and Y (vertical).
You can also enter the magnification directly using
the numeric keys by pressing [# Keys].
Ready to copy. Copies Press [Original Orientation] to select orientation of

the originals, either [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge
Zoom
(25 - 400)
Left]. Then press [OK].
Standard X
Zoom 100 %
Place original. XY Zoom
# Keys
(25 - 400)
Y
Original : --- 100 %

Top Edge Top
Zoom : 100%
Paper : ---
Original
Preview # Keys Orientation
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
5 Press [OK].
3-11
Basic Operation
Duplex Copying
Produce two-sided copies. The following duplex options are available.
You can also create single-sided copies from two-sided originals or originals with facing pages such as books.
The following modes are available.
One-sided to Two-sided
Produces two-sided copies from one-sided originals. In
5
case of an odd number of originals, the back side of the
4 5 last copy will be blank.
3 3
4
2 1
2
Original Copy
The following binding options are available.

ghi A B
ghi
def ghi
abc
abc
abc
A Original Left/Right to Binding Left/Right: Images on
def
the second sides are not rotated.

def
B Original Left/Right to Binding Top: Images on the
Original Copy second sides are rotated 180°. Copies can be bound
on the top edge, facing the same orientation when
turning the pages.
Two-sided to One-sided
Copies each side of a two-sided original onto two
1 1 2
individual sheets. The optional document processor is
2
required.
Original Copy
• Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides

are not rotated.
• Binding Top: Images on the second sides are
rotated 180°.
Two-sided to Two-sided
Produces two-sided copies from two-sided originals.
5 5
3 3
The optional document processor is required.
4
1 1
2
NOTE: The paper sizes supported in Two-sided to

Two-sided are Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R,
Original Copy Executive, Statement-R, Oficio II, 8.5×13.5", A3, B4,
A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R and Folio.
3-12
Basic Operation
Book to One-sided
Produces a 1-sided copy of a 2-sided or open book
1 2 1 2 original.
Original Copy • Binding Left: Originals with facing pages are

copied from left to right.
• Binding Right: Originals with facing pages are 3
copied from right to left.
NOTE: The following sizes of originals and paper are

supported in Two-sided to One-sided and Book to One-
sided. Original: Ledger, Letter-R, A3, B4, A4-R, B5-R,
A5-R and 8K. Paper: Letter, A4, B5 and 16K. You may
change paper size and reduce or enlarge copy to
match that size.
Book to Two-sided
Facing pages Facing pages Produces two-sided copies from an open book original
-> Two-sided -> Facing pages with facing pages.
3
1 2 3 4 1 2
4
3
NOTE: The following sizes of originals and paper are
1
0
2
supported in Book to Two-sided mode. Original:

3 Ledger, Letter-R, A3, B4, A4-R, B5-R, A5-R and 8K.
2 1 4 3 2 1
4
1 0
Paper: Letter, A4 and B5.
3
2
Original Copy
The procedure for using two-sided/duplex copying is explained below.
3 Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Duplex].
Ready to copy. Copies 4 Select the desired Duplex option.
Duplex 5 If you choose [1-sided>>2-sided] or

1-sided
>>1-sided [2-sided>>2-sided], select the binding edge of the
Place original.
1-sided
>>2-sided
finished copies of Finishing.
2-sided
>>1-sided
2-sided Finishing
If you choose [Book>>2-sided], press [Book>>2-
Original : ---
>>2-sided
sided] or [Book>> Book] of Finishing to select the
setting for duplex.
: 100% Book Top Edge Top
Zoom
>>1-sided
Paper : --- Binding Binding
Left/Right Top Original
Book Orientation
Preview >>2-sided
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
3-13
Basic Operation
Ready to copy. Copies 6 If you choose [2-sided>>1-sided],

[2-sided>>2-sided], [Book>>1-sided] or
Duplex
Original
[Book>>2-sided], select the binding edge of the
originals of Original.
1-sided
>>1-sided
1-sided
Place original. >>2-sided Binding Binding
2-sided
>>1-sided
Left/Right Top
7 Press [Original Orientation] to select orientation of
2-sided
Original : ---
>>2-sided
Book Top Edge Top

Zoom : 100%
>>1-sided
Paper : ---
Preview
Book
>>2-sided
Original
Orientation 8 Press [OK].
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Once an original placed on the platen is scanned,

replace it with the next one. Then, press the Start
key.
After scanning all originals, press [Finish Scan] to

start copying.
Collate/Offset Copying
The machine can collate and offset at the same time as it copies.
You can use the Collate/Offset copy function for tasks such as those shown below.
Collate
3
Scan multiple originals and deliver complete sets of
2 copies as required according to page number.
3 1
3
2 2
1
1 3
2
1
Original Copy
Offset
Without Document Finisher

If the optional document finisher is not installed, when
you use offsetting, printed copies are produced after
3
2
1
rotating each set (or page) by 90º.
3
2
3
2
1
NOTE: You need to load the same sized paper with
1
2
3 different orientation in the paper source other than the
1 selected paper source. The paper sizes supported in
Offset are A4, B5, Letter and 16K.
Original Copy (each set)
3-14
Basic Operation
With Document Finisher

When you use offsetting, printed copies are segregated
3
2
3
after each set of copies (or after each page).
2 3 1
2
1 3 1
2
1
NOTE: The optional document finisher or 3,000 sheet
document finisher is required.
3
Original Copy (each set)
The procedure for using collate/offset copying is

explained below.
3 Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Collate/

Offset].
Ready to copy. Copies 4 To use collate copying, press [On] of Collate.
Collate/Offset To use offset copying, press [Each Set] of Offset.

Collate
Place original.
Press [OK].
Off On
Offset
Original : ---
Zoom : 100% Off Each Set
Paper : ---
Preview
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Ready to copy. Copies If [Off] is selected for Collate, press [Off] or [Each
Page] of Offset.
Collate/Offset
Collate 5 Press [OK].

Place original. Off On
Offset
Original : ---
Zoom : 100% Off Each Page
Paper : ---
Preview
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
3-15
Basic Operation
Reserve Next
This function allows you to reserve the next job during printing. Using this function, the original will be scanned
while the machine is printing. When the current print job ends, the reserved copy job is printed. The procedure
differs depending on the Reserve Next Priority (refer to page 8-28).
If Reserve Next Priority is set to [On]
The Copy function default screen appears on the touch panel during printing.
Ready to copy. Copies 1 Place the originals onto the machine for reserving
copy, and configure the copy settings.
Shortcut 2
Place original.
Shortcut 3
Auto 100% Normal 0

Shortcut 4
Paper Zoom Density
>>2-sided

Status 10/10/2008 10:10
The machine starts scanning the originals.

When the current print job ends, the reserved copy
job is printed.
If Reserve Next Priority is set to [Off]
The Copying screen appears on the touch panel during printing.
Copying... Copies 1 Press [Reserve Next].
Job No.: 000021 Job Name: doc20081010101034 User Name: ----- The default screen for copying appears.
Scanner Setting Printer Setting
Scanned Pages Copies
2 2/ 24
A4 A4 Plain
100% 2-sided
2-sided Collate
Top Edge Top
Top Tray
Cancel Reserve Next
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
2 Place the originals onto the machine for reserving

The machine starts scanning the originals.

When the current print job ends, the reserved copy
job is printed.
3-16
Basic Operation
Interrupt Copy
This function allows you to pause the current jobs in progress when you need to make copies immediately.
When interruption copy ends, the machine resumes the paused print jobs.
NOTE: If the machine is left unused for 60 seconds in interrupt copy mode, interrupt copying is automatically
cancelled and printing resumes. You can change the delay until interrupt copying is cancelled. Change the
delay as required. For more information, refer to Interrupt Clear Timer on page 8-59. 3
Ready for interrupt copy. Copies 1 Press the Interrupt key.
1
Copy Image Shortcut 1 Ready for interrupt copy. is displayed.
Shortcut 2
Place original.
The current print job is temporarily interrupted.
Shortcut 3
Auto 100% Normal 0

Shortcut 4
Paper Zoom Density
>>2-sided

Status 10/10/2008 10:10
2 Place the originals onto the machine for interrupt

3 Press the Start key to start interrupt copying.
4 When interrupt copying ends, press the Interrupt

key.
The machine resumes the paused print jobs.
3-17
Basic Operation
Staple
Use this feature to staple your finished copies.
NOTE: Stapling requires the optional document finisher or 3,000 sheet document finisher. Note also that
saddle stitching (center stapling) requires the folding unit.
The following stapling options and orientations are available.
Original Orientation: Original Orientation:

Original Orientation: Original Orientation:
Left Top Edge (Left top Left Top Edge (Left top
Top Edge (Back Edge) Top Edge (Back Edge)
corner) corner)
3,000 Sheet Document

Finisher
Cassette Paper Load
Direction
3,000 Sheet Document

Finisher
Cassette Paper Load
Direction
Document Finisher
Cassette Paper Load
Direction
Document Finisher
Cassette Paper Load
Direction
3-18
Basic Operation
Use the procedure below to produce stapled copies.
3 Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Staple/

Punch].
4 Select the staple position.

3
Copies
Ready to copy.
Staple/Punch
Staple Top
Left
2 staples
Top NOTE: To use saddle stitching, press [Bind and Fold].
Place original.
Off Top
Right
2 staples
Right
When placing originals, be sure to place the cover
2 staples
Left
Bind
and Fold
page at the bottom. For more information on saddle
stitching, refer to Booklet from Sheets on page 4-18.
Punch 2 holes 4 holes
Left Left
Original : ---
Off 2 holes 4 holes Top Edge Top
Zoom : 100%
5
Top Top
Paper : ---
2 holes 4 holes
Original
Orientation
Press [Original Orientation] to choose orientation of
Preview Right Right

Status 10/10/2008 10:10
6 Press [OK].
3-19
Basic Operation
Punch
Punch holes in sets of finished copies in preparation for binding.
NOTE: Requires the optional 3,000 sheet document finisher and punching unit.
The orientations of the original and corresponding punch positions are as follows.
Original Copy Orientation of Original
Platen Document
processor
NOTE: The inch model provides two-hole and three-hole punching. The metric model provides two-hole and
four-hole punching.
Follow the steps as below for punching.
3 Press [Org./Paper/Finishing]and then press

[Staple/Punch].
3-20
Basic Operation
Ready to copy. Copies 4 Select the type of hole punching.
Staple/Punch 5 Press [Original Orientation] to choose orientation of

Staple Top 2 staples
Left Top
Place original.
Off Top
Right
2 staples
Right Left]. Then press [OK].
2 staples Bind
6
Left and Fold
Press [OK].
Punch 2 holes 4 holes
Left Left
Original
Zoom
Paper
: ---
: 100%
: ---
Off 2 holes
Top
4 holes
Top
Top Edge Top
Original
3
2 holes 4 holes
Preview Orientation
Right Right
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
If the original is placed on the platen. Place the next

original and press the Start key. Copying begins.
If all original pages have been scanned, press

[Finish Scan]. Copying begins.
3-21
Basic Operation
Printing - Printing from Applications

Follow the steps below to print documents from applications.
NOTE: To print the document from applications, install the printer driver on your computer from the supplied
CD-ROM (Product Library).
1 Create a document using an application.
2 Click File and select Print in the application. The

Print dialog box appears.
3 Click the  button next to the Name field and select

this machine from the list.
4 Enter the desired print quantity in the Number of

copies box. Enter any number up to 999.
When there is more than one document, select

Collate to print out one by one in the sequence of
the page numbers.
5 Click Properties button. The Properties dialog

box appears.
3-22
Basic Operation
6 Select the Basic tab and click Page Size button to

select the paper size.
To print on the special paper such as thick paper or

transparency, click the Media Type menu and
select the media type.
7 Click Source and select the paper source.
NOTE: If you choose Auto Select, paper is supplied

automatically from the paper source loaded with paper
of optimum size and type. To print on special paper
such as envelope or thick paper, place it on the multi
purpose tray and select MP Tray.
8 Select paper orientation, either Portrait or

Landscape, to match the orientation of the
document.
Selecting Rotate 180° will print the document

rotated 180°.
9 Click OK button to return to the Print dialog box.
10 Click OK button to start printing.
3-23
Basic Operation
Sending
This machine can send a scanned image as an attachment to an E-mail message or to a PC linked to the
network. In order to do this, it is necessary to register the sender and destination (recipient) address on the
network.
A network environment which enables the machine to connect to a mail server is required. It is recommended
that a Local Area Network (LAN) be used to assist with transmission speed and security issues.
At the same time as you send a scanned image, you can also print the image or send it to the Document Box.
To use the Scanning Function perform the following steps:
• Program the settings, including the E-mail setting on the machine.

• Use COMMAND CENTER (the internal HTML web page) to register the IP address, the host name of the
SMTP server, and the recipient.
• Register the destination in the Address Book or One Touch keys.
• When the PC Folder (SMB/FTP) is selected, it is necessary to share the destination folder. For setting-up
the PC Folder, contact your administrator.
• Creating/Registering a Document Box (when a Document Box is selected as the destination)
• Detailed transmission settings (to select a Document Box as the destination or to print and send the image
at the same time)
Follow the steps below for basic sending. The following four options are available.
• Send as E-mail: Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment...page 3-25

• Send to Folder (SMB): Stores a scanned original image in a shared folder of any PC...page 3-26
• Send to Folder (FTP): Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server...page 3-26
• Send to Document Box: Sends a document stored in a document box on this machine...page 6-6
• Image Data Scanning with TWAIN / WIA: Loads the document data stored in a Custom Box to a PC...Refer
to the TWAIN/WIA Driver Operation Guide
NOTE: Different sending options can be specified in combination. Refer to Sending to Different Types of
Destinations (Multi Sending) on page 3-32.
3-24
Basic Operation
Send as E-mail
Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment.
NOTE:
• You must have a network environment in which this machine can connect to a mail server. It is
recommended that the machine be used in an environment in which it can connect to the mail server at any
time over a LAN. 3
• Access the COMMAND CENTER beforehand and specify the settings required for sending e-mail. For
details, see COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail) on page 2-17.
1 Press the Send key.
NOTE: Depending on the settings, the address book

screen may appear. In this event, press [Cancel] to
display the screen for sending.
Ready to send. Destination 2 Press [E-mail Addr Entry] and then [E-mail
Place original.
Address].
E-mail Address Entry
E-mail
Address
NOTE: Destination can be specified using the
Address Book or the One Touch Keys. Refer to
Specifying Destination on page 3-30.
Add a new e-mail destination.
Press [E-mail Address], then enter
the address using the keyboard screen.
Add to Addr Book Next Dest. Cancel OK
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
3 Enter destination E-mail address and press [OK].
4 Press [Next Dest.] and repeat steps 3 to specify the

destination. Up to 100 E-mail addresses can be
specified.
NOTE: When [Add to Addr Book] is displayed, the

destinations are registered in the Address Book.
5 Press [OK]. The destinations are registered in the

destination list.
3-25
Basic Operation
Ready to send. Destination 6 Check the destination list.

Place original.
Destination Detail
Address
Book
Select a destination and press [Detail/Edit] to check
ABCD [email protected] To:
TUVW 10.200.188.120 Auto 1/1

E-mail
and edit it.
Addr Entry
Group1 Group1
Folder Path
Entry Select a destination and press [Delete] to remove
On Hook Direct Chain Detail/Edit Delete Recall
FAX No. the destination from the list.
Entry
0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 No.
AAA BBB CCC DDD EEE i-FAX
Addr Entry
FFF
0006
GGG
0007
HHH
0008
III
0009
JJJ
0010 1/100
WSD Scan NOTE: When selecting [On] for Entry Check for New
Destination (page 8-31), the confirmation screen
Status
08/08/2009 10:10
appears. Enter the same destination again and press
[OK].
When selecting [On] for Destination Check before Send
(page 8-30), the confirmation screen appears after
pressing the Start key. For details, refer to Confirmation
Screen of Destinations on page 3-29.
Send to Folder (SMB)/Send to Folder (FTP)

Stores a scanned original image file in the specified shared folder of any PC.
Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server.
NOTE:
• Refer to Help of your operating system for details on how to share a folder.
• Be sure that SMB Protocol or FTP in the COMMAND CENTER is On. For details, refer to the KYOCERA
COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide.

2 Press [Folder Path Entry] and then [SMB] or [FTP].
NOTE: Destination can be specified using the

Address Book or the One Touch Keys. For details, refer
to Specifying Destination on page 3-30.
3-26
Basic Operation
Ready to send. Destination 3 Enter host name, path, login user name and login
Place original.
password. Press the key of each item to first
Folder Path Entry
display the entry screen.
SMB Host Name
Path
FTP
Login
User Name
Login
3
Password
Specify the folder on the destination

computer.
Connection
Test
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
4 Enter the destination data and press [OK].

Use the keyboard to enter.
Limit: 128 characters
Input: 0 characters
Backspace
! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ + ˜
Q W E R T Y U I O P { } |
A S D F G H J K L : "
Z X C V B N M < > ?
Lower-case
Upper-case Lower-case No./Symbol Space
Cancel OK
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Data to be entered are as follows.
NOTE: You will be unable to send the data if you forget your login user name or login password. Contact your
administrator and check your login user name or login password.
For send to folder (SMB)
Max.
Item Data to be entered
characters
Host Name* Host name or IP address of the PC to receive the data. Up to 70

characters
Path Path to the receiving folder such as follows. Up to 128

For example, \User\ScanData. characters
Login User Name User name to access the PC Up to 64

For example, abcdnet\james.smith characters
Login Password Password to access the PC Up to 64

characters
* To specify a port number different from the default (139), enter using the format “host name:
port number” (e.g., SMBhostname:140).
To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].
(e.g., [3ae3:9a0:cd05:b1d2:28a:1fc0:a1:10ae]:140)
3-27
Basic Operation
For send to folder (FTP)
Max.
Item Data to be entered
characters
Host Name* Host name or IP address of FTP server Up to 70

characters
Path Path to the receiving folder. Up to 128

For example, \User\ScanData. characters
Otherwise the data will be saved in the home directory.
Login User Name FTP server login user name Up to 64

characters
Login Password FTP server login password Up to 64

characters
* To specify a port number different from the default (21), enter using the format “host name:
port number” (e.g., FTPhostname:140).
Ready to send. Destination 5 Upon completion of all entries, press [Connection

Place original.
Test] to check the connection.
Folder Path Entry
SMB Host Name
FTP
Path NOTE: Connected. appears when connection to the
Login
destination is correctly established. If Cannot connect.
User Name
appears, review the entry.
Login
Password
Specify the folder on the destination

computer.
Connection
Test
To specify another destination, go to the step 6. To
specify only one destination, go to step 7.
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
6 Press [Next Dest.] and repeat steps 3 to 5 to

specify the destination. You can specify a
combined total of up to 10 FTP and SMB
destination folders.
NOTE: When [Add to Addr Book] is displayed, the

entry is registered in the Address Book.
7 Press [OK] to register the entry in the destination

list.
3-28
Basic Operation
Ready to send. Destination 8 Check the destination list.

Place original.
Destination Detail
Address
Book
Select a destination and press [Detail/Edit] to check
TUVW 10.200.188.120 Auto 1/1

E-mail
and edit it. Edit it, if necessary, referring to steps 3
Group1 Group1
Addr Entry
to 5.
Folder Path
Entry
FAX No. Select a destination and press [Delete] to remove
Entry
the destination from the list.
3
0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 No.
Addr Entry
0006 0007 0008 0009 0010 1/100
WSD Scan
FFF GGG HHH III JJJ

NOTE: When On is selected in FTP Encrypted TX
Status
08/08/2009 10:10
(page 5-31), keys appear for selecting the encryption
method for the FTP transmission destination. Select
Auto, DES, 3DES or AES as the encryption method.
When selecting [On] for Entry Check for New
Destination (page 8-31), the confirmation screen
appears. Enter the same host name and path again,
and press [OK].
When selecting [On] for Destination Check before Send
(page 8-30), the confirmation screen appears after
pressing the Start key. For details, refer to Confirmation
Screen of Destinations on page 3-29.
Confirmation Screen of Destinations

When selecting [On] for Destination Check before Send (page 8-30), the confirmation screen of destinations
appears after pressing the Start key.
Follow the steps below to confirm the destinations.
Ready to send. Destination 1 Press [ ] or [ ] to confirm every destination.

Place original.
Press [Detail] to display the detailed information on

Destination Detail
the selected destination.
A OFFICE 1234567890
To delete the destination, select the destination you

want to delete and press [Delete]. Press [Yes] in the
Detail
confirmation screen. The destination is deleted.
Delete
Check To add the destination, press [Cancel] and then

return to the destination screen.
Cancel
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
2 Press [Check].
NOTE: Be sure to confirm every destination by

displaying them on the touch panel. You cannot press
[Check] unless you have confirmed every destination.
3 Press the Start key to start sending.
3-29
Basic Operation
Specifying Destination
When specifying destination, choose from the Address Book or use the One Touch Keys.
NOTE: You can set the machine up so that the address book screen appears when you press the Send key.
For details, refer to Setting the Default Send Screen on page 8-32.
Choosing from the Address Book

Select a destination registered in the Address Book.
Ready to send. Destination 1 In the basic screen for sending, press [Address
Place original.
Book].
Destination Detail
Address
ABCD [email protected] To: Book
E-mail
TUVW 10.200.188.120 Auto 1/1
Addr Entry
Group1 Group1
Folder Path
Entry
FAX No.
Entry
0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 No.
Addr Entry
0006 0007 0008 0009 0010 1/100
WSD Scan
FFF GGG HHH III JJJ

Status 08/08/2009 10:10
Address Book
2 Press the checkbox to select the desired
Addr Book Address Book Sort Name destination from the list. You may choose multiple
Dest. No. Type Name Detail destinations. The selected destinations are
indicated by a checkmark in the check box. To use
0001 ABCD [email protected]
Search(Name)
[email protected]
an address book on the LDAP server, select [Ext
0002 TUVW
Search(No.)
0003 Group1 1/2
Register/Edit Address Book] from the Addr Book pull-down
0004 Group2 Address Book
0005 Group3
Detail menu.
ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ 0-9
You can change the order in which the destinations
E-mail Folder FAX i-FAX Group
are listed by selecting [Name] or [No.] from the Sort
Cancel OK pull-down menu.
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
NOTE: To cancel the selection, press the check box

and remove the checkmark. For details on the external
address book, refer to KYOCERA COMMAND
CENTER Operation Guide.
3 Press [OK] to register the selected destination in

the destination list.
NOTE: To delete a destination in the list, select the

destination and press [Delete].
3-30
Basic Operation
Destination Search
Destinations registered in the Address Book can be searched.

Advanced search by type or by initial letter is also available.
Address Book
Addr Book Address Book Sort Name
Dest. No. Type Name Detail
(1) 3
0001 ABCD [email protected]
Search(Name)
0002 TUVW [email protected]
(2) 0003 Group1 1/2
Search(No.)
Register/Edit
0004 Group2 Address Book
Detail
0005 Group3
(3) ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ 0-9
(4) E-mail Folder FAX i-FAX Group
Cancel OK
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
Keys
Search type Subjects searched
used
1 Search by name Search by registered name.
2 Search by address Search by registered address number.

number
3 Advanced search Advanced search by initial letter of registered name.

by initial letter
4 Advanced search Advanced search by type of registered destination

by destination (E-mail, Folder (SMB/FTP), FAX, i-FAX or Group).
(FAX: Only when the optional fax kit is installed.i-FAX:
Only when the optional internet fax kit is installed).
You can set this function up so that destination types
are selected when the address book is displayed.
For more information, refer to Narrow Down
Settings on page 8-66.
The procedures for using the different search modes are explained below.
Search by name
Press [Search(Name)] and enter the required name.
Search by address number
Press [Search(No.)] and enter the address number you wish to search.
Advanced search by initial letter
Press the key for the required initial letter.
Advanced search by destination
Press any of [E-mail], [Folder], [FAX], [i-FAX] or [Group]. The destinations registered by that type are displayed.
3-31
Basic Operation
Choosing by One Touch Key

Ready to send. Destination Select the destination using the One Touch Keys.
Place original.
Destination Detail
Address
Book
In the basic screen for sending, press the One Touch
TUVW 10.200.188.120 Auto 1/1

E-mail
Keys where the destination is registered.
Addr Entry
Group1 Group1
Folder Path
Entry
FAX No.
NOTE: If the One Touch Keys for the desired
0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 No.
Entry
destination is hidden on the touch panel, press [ ] or
i-FAX
[ ] to scroll and view next or previous One Touch
AAA BBB CCC DDD EEE
Addr Entry
FFF
0006
GGG
0007
HHH
0008
III
0009
JJJ
0010 1/100
WSD Scan Keys.
This procedure assumes that One Touch Keys have
Status
08/08/2009 10:10
already been registered.
Refer to Adding a Destination on One Touch Key on
page 8-64 for more information on adding One Touch
keys.
Choosing by Speed Dial

Ready to send. Destination Access the destination by specifying the 4-digit (0001 to
Place original.
1000) One Touch Key number (speed dial).
Destination Detail
Address
ABCD [email protected] To: Book
TUVW 10.200.188.120 Auto 1/1

E-mail In the basic screen for sending, press the Quick No.
Group1 Group1
Addr Entry
Search key or [No.] and use the numeric keys to enter
the One Touch key number in the numeric entry
Folder Path
Entry
FAX No.
Entry
screen.
0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 No.
Addr Entry
FFF
0006
GGG
0007
HHH
0008
III
0009
JJJ
0010 1/100
WSD Scan NOTE: if you entered the speed dial in 1 to 3-digit,
press [OK].
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending)

You can specify destinations that combine e-mail addresses, folders (SMB or FTP) and fax numbers (optional).
This is referred to as Multi Sending. This is useful for sending to different types of destination (e-mail addresses,
folders, etc.) in a single operation.
No. of broadcast items E-mail : Up to 100

Folders (SMP, FTP) : Total of 10 SMB and FTP
FAX : Up to 500
i-FAX : Up to 100
Also, depending on the settings, you can send and print at the same time.
Procedures are the same as used in specifying the destinations of respective types. Continue to enter E-mail
address or folder path so that they appear in the destination list. Press the Start key to launch transmission to
all destinations at one time.
3-32
Basic Operation
Using Document Box
What is Document Box?

Document Box is an area in the hard disk in which you can save documents for later retrieval or sharing among
multiple users.
Document Box contains four types of component boxes which provide the following functions. 3
Custom Box...page 6-2
Custom Box is a component box which you can create within the Document Box and store data for later retrieval.
You can create or delete a Custom Box, and manipulate data in various ways as described below:
• Creating a box...page 6-2

• Storing Documents in a Custom Box...page 6-4
• Printing a Document in a Custom Box...page 6-5
• Sending a Document from a Custom Box...page 6-6
• Moving/ Copying /Joining Documents in a Custom Box...page 6-8
• Deleting Documents in a Custom Box...page 6-11
Job Box
Job Box holds temporary or permanent print data for use with job options including Private Print, Stored Job,
Quick Copy, Proof and Hold, Repeat copy and Form Overlay which will be discussed later.
Four individual Job Boxes corresponding to these job options are already provided in the Document Box.
These Job Boxes cannot be created or deleted by a user.
NOTE: You can set up the machine so that temporary documents in job boxes are automatically deleted. For
details, refer to Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents on page 6-17.
Private Print/Stored Job Box...page 6-12
In Private Printing, you can specify that a job is not printed until you release the job at the operation panel. When
sending the job from the application software, specify a 4-digit access code in the printer driver.
The job is released for printing by entering the access code on the operation panel, ensuring confidentiality of
the print job.
The data will be deleted upon completion of print job or after the main power switch is turned off.
In Hold Job, access codes are not mandatory, but can be set on the printer driver if printing with PIN security is
required. In this event, you need to enter the access code to print the stored jobs. Print data will be stored in the
hard disk after printing. This will allow printing of the same print data repeatedly.
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Box...page 6-13
Quick Copy feature facilitates additional prints of a document already printed.
Activating Quick Copy and printing a document using the printer driver allow the print data to be stored in the
Quick Copy Job Box.
3-33
Basic Operation
When additional copies are required, you can reprint the required number of copies from the operation panel.
By default, up to 32 documents can be stored.
When power is turned off, all stored jobs will be deleted.
NOTE: When you attempt to store documents in excess of the above maximum, the oldest document data will
be overwritten by the latest document data.
The Proof and Hold feature produces only a single proof print of multiple-print job and holds printing of the
remaining copies.
Printing a multiple-print job in Proof and Hold using the printer driver allows only a single copy to be printed while
maintaining the document data in the Job Box.
To continue to print the remaining copies, use the operation panel.
You can change the number of copies to print.
Repeat Copy Box...page 6-15
Repeat Copy feature stores the copied original document data in the Job Box and allows you to print additional
copies later.
By default, up to 32 documents can be stored.
When power is turned off, the original data will be deleted.
NOTE: Repeat Copy function is not available when the optional Data Security Kit is installed.
Form for Form Overlay Box...page 6-17
Image Overlay feature copies the original document overlaid with a form or image.
This Job Box is used to store the forms or images for overlaying.
Removable Memory Box
A USB memory inserted into the USB memory slot (A1) of the machine is also recognizable as a Job Box. This
allows printing of the PDF data stored in the USB memory.
You can print PDF data directly from the USB memory without a PC.
Image files scanned using this machine can also be saved to USB memory in the PDF, TIFF, JPEG, XPS or
high compression PDF format (Scan to USB).
Fax Box
Fax Box stores the fax data received. For details, refer to the Operation Guide supplied with the fax kit.
3-34
Basic Operation
Basic Operation for Document Box

This section explains basic operations for document boxes, using examples where tasks are carried out with
custom boxes.
NOTE: In the following explanation, it is assumed that user login administration is enabled. For details on User
Logon privileges, refer to User Privileges on page 3-40.
3
The basic procedure for using document boxes is explained below.
1 Press the Document Box key.
The default document box screen appears.
Custom Box. 2 Press [Custom Box], [Job Box] or [Removable

Memory] to select the type of document box you
No. Name Owner Used Area
want to work with.
0001 SALES Anonymous ---- Search(Name)
Search(No.) In this example, press [Custom Box].

1/1 Register/Edit
Box
The box list screen appears.
You can use this screen for tasks such as

Store File Detail Open registering and editing boxes. For more information
Custom Box Job Box Removable Memory FAX Box
on using the box list, refer to Custom Box List on
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
page 3-36.
NOTE: For more information on registering boxes,

refer to Creating a New Custom Box on page 6-2.
You cannot access boxes if you forget your password.
In this event, access the machine using administrator
privileges and overwrite your box password.
Custom Box. 3 Select the box containing the document you want
to work with and press [Open].
0001 0001 Box 1 User 10% Search(Name) The document list screen appears.
0002 0002 Box 2 User 20% Search(No.)
0003 0003 Box 3 User 30%

Register/Edit
You can use this screen for tasks such as printing
and sending documents. For more information on
1/1 Box
using the document list, refer to Document List on

page 3-37.
Store File Detail Open
NOTE: If a custom box is protected by a password,

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

enter the correct password.
3-35
Basic Operation
Custom Box List

The box list shows the registered custom boxes. The custom boxes can be listed by box number or by box name.
You can manipulate the list in a range of ways, as shown below.
Listing the boxes by number in ascending/ Listing the boxes by name in

descending order. alphabetical order.
Custom Box.
0001 0001 Box 1 User 10% Search(Name)
0002 0002 Box 2 User 20% Search(No.)

Registers new boxes and
0003 0003 Box 3 User 30%
1/1
Register/Edit checks, modifies or
Box
deletes box information.

Opens the selected box.
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

Displays the details for
Saves the document in the the selected box.
selected box.
3-36
Basic Operation
Document List
The document list is a list of the documents stored in the custom box. Documents can be listed either by name
or as thumbnails. The list can be used as shown below.
List
Listing the documents by name Listing the documents by time of update in Listing the documents by size in
in alphabetical order. ascending/descending order. ascending/descending order. 3
Selecting more than one Box:
document at a time.
File Name Date and Time Size
0001 0404200710574501 10/10/2008 09:40 21 MB Search(Name) Highlighting a document to

Selecting documents by display its details with [Detail].
0002 0404200710574511 10/10/2008 09:50 21 MB
checking checkboxes.
0003 0404200710574521 10/10/2008 10:00 21 MB
1/1
Detail
Preview
Previews the selected
Print Send Join Move/Copy Delete Store File document.
Close
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
Thumbnail
Switches between list display
Selecting more than one
and thumbnail display.
Box:
document at a time. SALES
Search(Name)
Highlighting a document Prints, sends, joins, moves,

to display its details with 040420075501 040420075502
copies or deletes the
[Detail].
1/1
selected documents.
Detail
Preview
Selecting documents by Print Send Join Move/Copy Delete Store File

Saves the document in the
checking checkboxes.
Close open box.
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
NOTE: You can select multiple documents by pressing the respective document checkboxes. However, note
that you cannot select multiple documents when you are sending documents.
3-37
Basic Operation
Viewing/Editing Box Details

You can check and modify box information.
1 Press [Register/Edit Box] in the box list screen.
Document Box/Removable Memory - Register/Edit Box 2 Highlight the box whose details you wish to check
or edit and press [Detail/Edit].
0001 SALES Anonymous ----

1/1 Add enter the correct password.
Detail/Edit Delete
Close
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Box: 3 Check the box details.

Box No.: Change
0001 To edit details, press [Change] of the detail you
Box Name: Change Usage Restriction: Change wish to edit. Edit the detail as desired and press
SALES 21 MB
[OK].
Box Password: Change
********
Auto File Deletion: Overwrite Setting: Change

Change
30 day(s) Permit
Free Space: Delete after Printed: Change

30 GB Off
Cancel Register
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
4 If you have changed the details, press [Register]

and then press [Yes] in the confirmation screen.
If you did not change the details, press [No].
5 Press [Close]. The display returns to the default

Document Box screen.
3-38
Basic Operation
Previewing Documents/Checking Document Details

You can use this function to preview the documents stored in a document box or display the document details
for checking.
1 Select (highlight) a document to preview and then

press [Preview] or [Detail]. 3
2 Preview the document or check the document
details.
The operations available in the preview screen are

shown below.
When you have zoomed in, you can use these keys to move
the displayed area.
In multiple-page documents,
Preview: 2007040410574501
you can change pages by
Size :
No.
entering the desired page
Resol. : number.
Color :
1/6
In multiple-page documents,
you can use these buttons to
change pages.
Close
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
Zoom out. Zoom in.
3 When you have finished previewing documents or

checking document details, press [Close].
3-39
Basic Operation
User Privileges
When user login administration is enabled, accessibility to the Document Box components will vary depending
on the given user privilege.
Accessibilities vary depending on user privilege as follows:
Access level
Administrator User
Accessibility
Creating a box Yes No
Changing box owner Yes No

Operation
Deleting a box Others Yes No
Owner Yes Yes
Changing box Others Yes No

number
Owner Yes No
Renaming a box Others Yes No
Owner Yes Yes
Changing the Others No No

password to a box
Owner Yes Yes
Overwriting the Others Yes No

password to a box
Owner Yes No
Box information
Adjusting the box Others Yes No
capacity
Owner Yes No
Changing the owner Others Yes No
Owner Yes No
Changing the Others Yes No

permission
Owner Yes Yes
Changing the Others Yes No

period of using a
box Owner Yes Yes
Restricting the Accessibility to a Box
The accessibility to a Custom Box differs depending on the level of privileges as follows:
Administrator: An administrator can gain access and manipulate all boxes.

User: A user can gain access and manipulate his/her own boxes and the shared boxes.
3-40
Basic Operation
Password Entry Requirement
When user login administration is enabled, requirement of a password differs depending on the level of
privileges as follows:
Administrator: The administrator is not required to enter a password to gain access

to any box.
User: The user is required to enter a password to gain access to a box
which is protected by a password. The user is not required to enter a 3
password to gain access to his/her own boxes.
Creating new Custom Boxes when user login administration is enabled

Box: **
If you create a new Custom Box when user login
Box No.: Change Owner: Change
administration is enabled, the screen appears and you
0001 DCBA9876 can change the owner and permission settings. Only
Box Name: Change
Usage Restriction: Change administrators and machine administrators can create
SALES 21 GB
new Custom Boxes.
Box Password: Change Permission: Change
********** Private
Auto File Deletion: Change Overwrite Setting: Change

Changing the owner: Press [Change] of Owner and
30 day(s) Permit select the new owner for the
Free Space: Delete after Printed: Change box from the displayed list.
Then press [OK].
30 GB Off
Cancel Register Changing the permission:Press [Change] of

Status 08/08/2009 10:10
Permission and select either
[Private] or [Shared]. Then
press [OK].
NOTE: For information on specifying other settings,

refer to Creating a New Custom Box on page 6-2.
Working With User Privileges When User Login Administration is Enabled

Box: When user login administration is enabled, the owner of
Box No.: Owner:
a box with user privileges set can change the following
0001 DCBA9876 box information: the box name, the box password, the
Box Name: Change Usage Restriction: permission, the auto file deletion and the overwrite
SALES 21 MB
setting.
Box Password: Change Permission: Change
******** Private
Overwrite Setting:
Auto File Deletion: Change Change
30 day(s) Permit
Free Space: Delete after Printed: Change

30 GB Off
Cancel Register
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
3-41
Basic Operation
Canceling Jobs
Follow the steps below to cancel any print or send job being executed.
Canceling Jobs
You can also cancel jobs by pressing the Stop key.
Printing jobs
1 Press the Stop key.
Cancelling job screen appears.
The current print job is temporarily interrupted.
2 Select the job you wish to cancel and press

[Cancel]. And then press [Yes] in the confirmation
screen.
Sending jobs
1 Press the Stop key.
Job Cancel appears.
NOTE: Pressing the Stop key will not temporarily stop

a job that you have already started sending.
2 To cancel printing, select [Cancel], and then press

[Yes] in the confirmation screen.
Copying... Copies NOTE:

Job No.: 000021
Scanner Setting
Job Name: doc20081010101034 User Name: -----
Printer Setting
If Reserve Next Priority (refer to page 8-28) is set to
Scanned Pages Copies
[Off]
2 2/ 24
A4 A4 Plain
The Copying screen appears in the touch panel during
100% 2-sided printing.
2-sided Collate
Top Edge Top

1 Press the Stop key or [Cancel].
Top Tray
Cancel Reserve Next The current print job is cancelled.

Status 10/10/2008 10:10
3-42
Basic Operation
Quick Setup Screen

In the initial screen for copying and sending (the screen which appears immediately after the Copy or Send key
is first pressed after power-on), important and generally often used functions are registered from among the
versatile functions of this machine. This initial screen is called Quick Setup Screen. Registration of functions in
the Quick Setup Screen can be adjusted to suit your work environment for better efficiency.
Functions Available for Registration in the Quick Setup Screen 3

Default registrations and the functions available for registration are as follows.
Functions Available for

Function Default Registration
Registration
Copying 1: Paper Selection • Paper Selection

2: Zoom • Zoom
3: Density • Density
4: Duplex • Duplex
5: Combine • Combine
6: Staple/Punch • Staple/Punch
• Original Orientation
• Collate/Offset
• Color Selection
• Original Image
• Original Size
• Continuous Scan
Sending 1: Zoom • Zoom

2: Scan Resolution • Scan Resolution
3: FAX TX Resolution • FAX TX Resolution
5: 2-sided/Book Original • 2-sided/Book Original
6: File Format • File Format
• Original Size
• Sending Size
• Original Image
• Color Selection
• Continuous Scan
3-43
Basic Operation
Functions Available for

Function Default Registration
Registration
Document Document 1: Color Selection • Color Selection

Box Storage 2: Resolution • Resolution
4: 2-sided/Book Original • 2-sided/Book Original
5: Original Orientation • Original Orientation
6: Original Image • Original Image
• Original Size
• Zoom
• Continuous Scan
• Storing Size
Sending 1: File Format • File Format

From Box 2: Delete after Transmitted • Delete after Transmitted
3: FAX TX Resolution • FAX TX Resolution
4: Sending Size • Sending Size
Printing 1: Paper Selection • Paper Selection

From Box 2: Delete after Printed • Delete after Printed
3: Collate/Offset • Collate/Offset
4: Duplex • Duplex
5: Staple/Punch • Staple/Punch
6: Combine • Combine
Changing Registration
Ready to copy. Copies The following procedure is one example for replacing
the registration of Density with Original Image in the
Quick Setup Screen for copying.
Shortcut 2
Place original.
Shortcut 3
Auto 100% Normal 0

Shortcut 4
Paper Zoom Density
>>2-sided

Status 10/10/2008 10:10
2 Press [Copy], [Next] of Quick Setup Registration,

and then [Change] of Original Image.
3-44
Basic Operation
Copy - Original Image 3 Press [Key 3] here as the key to set replacement
Register Original Image function on the Quick Setup screen.
location.
4 Press [OK]. A confirmation screen appears. Press

Off [Yes]. The Original Image Quality function will be
Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 newly registered.
Key 4 Key 5 Key 6
3
Cancel OK
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
3-45
Basic Operation
Program (Copying and Sending)

By registering sets of frequently used functions as a single program, you can simply press the program number
as needed to recall those functions. You can also name the programs for easy identification when recalling.
NOTE: Sending operation can be registered in the program as well. Up to 50 functions combining copying and
sending can be registered in the program.
If user login administration is enabled, you can only register functions by logging in with administrator privileges.
Registering Programs
Use the procedure below to register a program.
The following procedure is an example of registering the copying function.
1 Press the Program key while the copy mode is

accessed.
2 Press [Register] and press a number (01 to 50) for

the program number.
If entering Program screen from the Copy screen or
Send screen, go to step 4.
NOTE: If you select a program number already

registered, the currently registered functions can be
replaced with a new set of functions.
3 Check that [Copy] is selected, and press [Next].
4 Enter the new program name and press [Register]

to register the program.
Recalling Programs
Use the procedure below to recall a registered program.
1 Press the Program key.
Program recalling.
2 Press [Recall] and press the key corresponding to
the program number (01 to 50) to recall. Press the
No.
Quick No. Search key or [No.] to enter the
01 FAX 1 06
program number directly for recalling.
02 FAX 2 07
03 08
NOTE: If the program cannot be recalled, the
04 09 Document Box or the form overlay specified in the
program might have been deleted. Check the
05 10
Document Box.
Recall Register Edit
3
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Place the originals and press the Start key.
Copying is performed according to the registered
program.
3-46
Basic Operation
Editing and Deleting Programs

You can change program number and program name, or delete program.
Use the procedure below to edit or delete a program.
1 Press the Program key.
2 Press [Edit] and press the key(s) corresponding to 3

the program number (01 to 50) to change or delete.
3 To edit a program, use the procedure for registering

a program and press [Change]. Then change the
program number and program name and press
[Register]. Choose [Yes] in the confirmation screen
to change the program.
To delete the program, press [Delete this Program].

Choose [Yes] in the confirmation screen to finally
delete the program.
3-47
Basic Operation
Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings)

Add shortcuts in the Quick Setup screen for easy access to the frequently used functions. A function name linked
to a registered shortcut can be changed as necessary. You can register up to 6 shortcuts for copying functions,
sending functions, and functions set for document box.
Adding Shortcuts
Shortcut registration is performed in the setup screen of each function. Shortcuts can be registered for all
functions in which [Add Shortcut] appears on the screen.
Use the procedure below to register a shortcut.
Ready to copy. Copies 1 After making the desired settings in the setup
screen of each function, press [Add Shortcut].
Memo Page
Layout
Off
Place original. Layout A

Top Top
L to R R to L None
Layout B
Border Line
Original : ---
Top Edge Top
Zoom : 100% Top Top
Paper : --- L to B R to B Original
Preview Orientation
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
2 Press the keys corresponding to the shortcut

number (01 to 06) to register.
NOTE: If you select a shortcut number already

registered, the currently registered shortcut can be
replaced with a new one.
3 Enter the shortcut name and press [Register] to

add the shortcut.
Editing and Deleting Shortcuts

Follow the steps as below to change shortcut number/name or delete shortcut.
1 In the setup screen of each function, press [Add

Shortcut] in the bottom of the screen.
2 Press [Edit] and press the keys corresponding to

the shortcut number (01 to 06) to change or delete.
3 To edit a shortcut, press [Change] to change the

shortcut button number and name and press [OK]
and then [Register]. Choose [Yes] in the
confirmation screen to change the shortcut.
To delete the shortcut, press [Delete this Shortcut].

Choose [Yes] in the confirmation screen to delete
the shortcut.
3-48
Basic Operation
Using the Internet Browser

This section explains how to use the Internet browser.
NOTE: To use the internet browser, internet browser must be set to [On] in Internet Browser Setting on page
8-67.
3
Launching and Exiting the Browser
Use the procedure below to launch and exit the Internet browser.
1 Press the Application key.
The application list screen appears.
Application 2 Press [Internet Browser].
The Internet browser starts up.
Internet Browser
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
3 Use the browser screen to browse web pages.
For information on how to use the browser screen,

refer to Using the Browser Screen on page 3-50.
4 To exit the browser, press [X] (Close) and then

press [Yes] in the exit confirmation screen.
The application list screen reappears.
NOTE: You can specify preferences such as the way

the Internet browser screen is displayed. For details,
refer to Internet Browser Setup (page 8-67).
3-49
Basic Operation
Using the Browser Screen
The operations available in the Internet browser screen are shown below.
Search box
Pressing the text box displays a keyboard.
You can then perform a search by entering
a keyword and pressing the [Search].
Title bar
Displays the page title. Close
Closes the Internet browser and returns
you to the application list screen.
KYOCERA MITA
Scroll bars
These allow you to scroll the
displayed page up, down, left
and right by pressing [ ], [ ],
[ ] or [ ] or by moving one of
the slide bars with your finger.
Security lock icon

Displayed when you are viewing
a protected page.
Enter URL Search Menu
Loader/Progress bar
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Shows the status of page
loading. When the browser is
loading a web page, the loader
changes to an animated display.
Menu
Displays the browser setup menu. You can use
this menu to specify the browser's display
magnification, set the text encoding scheme
and check the server certificate.
Search (Search Internet/Retrieval in page)

Enter URL Displays a search menu in which you can select [Retrieval
Use this display a desired web in page] or an Internet search site.
page by entering the URL for Search Internet: Use the selected search site to search
that page. with the entered keyword.
Home page Retrieval in page: Search from the entered keyword in
Displays your specified home page. the currently displayed page. You can
You can set your home page in the continue your search by pressing
Browser Preferences on page 8-67. [SearchUp] or [SearchDown].
Reload
Updates the page.
Back/Forward
Displays the previous
page or the next page.
NOTE: Pressing the Reset key while the Internet browser is displayed will exit the browser and return you to
the application list screen without displaying the browser exit
3-50
4 Copying Functions
This chapter explains the functions available for copying.
• Original Size........................................................................................4-2
• Paper Selection...................................................................................4-3
• Mixed Size Originals ...........................................................................4-6
• Original Orientation .............................................................................4-9
• Output Destination ............................................................................4-11
• Combine Mode..................................................................................4-12
• Margin/Centering Mode ....................................................................4-14
• Border Erase.....................................................................................4-16
• Booklet from Sheets..........................................................................4-18
• Cover Mode ......................................................................................4-21
• Form Overlay ....................................................................................4-22
• Page Numbering ...............................................................................4-23
• Memo Mode ......................................................................................4-24
• Poster................................................................................................4-26
• Image Repeat/Double Copy..............................................................4-27
• EcoPrint ............................................................................................4-29
• Single Color Copy .............................................................................4-29
• Color Balance Adjust ........................................................................4-30
• Hue Adjustment ................................................................................4-31
• One-touch Image Adjust ...................................................................4-33
• Sharpness Adjust..............................................................................4-34
• Background Density Adjust...............................................................4-35
• Continuous Scan...............................................................................4-36
• Auto Image Rotation .........................................................................4-37
• Negative Image.................................................................................4-37
• Mirror Image......................................................................................4-38
• Job Finish Notice ..............................................................................4-39
• File Name..........................................................................................4-41
• Priority Override ................................................................................4-41
• Repeat Copy .....................................................................................4-42
• OHP Backing Sheet Mode ................................................................4-44
4-1
Copying Functions
Original Size
Specify the size of originals being scanned. Be sure to specify the original size when copying non-standard
sizes.
The following options are available.
Item How to Select Sizes
Standard Have the size of original Inch models: Auto, Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R,
Sizes 1 detected automatically, or Statement, Statement-R, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II and
select from the standard 11×15"
sizes.
Metric models: Auto, A3, B4, A4,
A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5, A5-R, B6, B6-R, A6-R and Folio
Standard Select from the standard Inch models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5, A5-R,
Sizes 2 sizes not included in the B6, B6-R, A6-R, Folio, 8K, 16K and 16K-R
Standard Sizes 1.
Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R,
Statement, Statement-R, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II, 11×15",
8K, 16K and 16K-R
Others Select from envelope, Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Custom 1 to 4

postcard or the custom sized
originals*.
Size Entry Enter the size not included in Inch models

the standard sizes 1 and 2**. Horizontal: 2 to 17" (in 0.01" increments), Vertical: 2 to
11.69" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric models
Horizontal: 50 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments),
Vertical: 50 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)
* For instructions on how to specify the custom original sizes (Custom 1 to 4), refer to
Custom Original Size Setup on page 8-4.
** The input units can be changed in the System menu.
Refer to Switching Unit of Measurement on page 8-11.
Use the procedure below to select the original size.
3 Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Original

Size].
4-2
Copying Functions
Ready to copy. Copies 4 Press [Standard Sizes 1 ], [Standard Sizes 2 ],

1 [Others] or [Size Entry] to select the original size.
Original Size
Standard Auto A3 A4
Sizes 1
A4 A5 A5
Place original. Standard
Sizes 2
A6 B4 B5
Others
B5 B6 B6
Size Entry
Original : ---
Folio
Zoom : 100%
Paper : ---
Preview
Status
10/10/2008 10:10 4
Ready to copy. Copies If [Size Entry] is selected, press [+] or [-] to specify
the horizontal size (X) and the vertical size (Y).
Original Size
X (50 - 432)
Press [# Keys] to enter the size directly using the
Standard
Sizes 1 432 mm numeric keys.
5
Sizes 2
# Keys
Press [OK].
Others
(50 - 297)
6
Y
Original : --- Size Entry 297 mm Press the Start key to start copying.
Zoom : 100%
Paper : ---
Preview # Keys
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Paper Selection
Select the paper source that contains the required paper size.
NOTE: Specify in advance the size and type of the paper loaded in the cassette (refer to Original/Paper
Settings on page 8-4).
Selecting the Cassette

Use the procedure below to select the paper supply cassette.
3 Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Paper

Selection].
Ready to copy. Copies 4 Press the key of the paper source corresponding to
the required paper size. The cassette in which the
Place original.
paper is loaded is selected.
Place original.
Auto If [Auto] is selected, the paper matching the size of
A4 A4 the original is selected automatically.
Plain Plain
A3 MP Tray
Original : ---
Plain Setting
5 Press [OK].
A4
Zoom : 100%
Plain
6
Paper : ---
Preview
A4 Press the Start key to start copying.
Plain
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
4-3
Copying Functions
Selecting the Multi Purpose Tray

Change the paper size and media type.
The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below.
How to
Category Item Sizes
Select
Paper Standard Choose from Inch models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R,
Size Sizes 1 the standard Statement, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II and Executive
size.
Metric models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R,
A5-R, B6, B6-R, A6-R and Folio
Standard Choose from Inch models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R,
Sizes 2 the standard B6-R, A6-R, Folio, 8K, 16K and 16K-R
sizes not
included in Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R,
the Standard Statement, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II, Executive, 8K,
Sizes 1. 16K and 16K-R
Others Choose from ISO B5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10),

non-standard Envelope #9 (Commercial #9), Envelope #6
sizes and (Commercial #6 3/4), Envelope Monarch,
custom Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4,
sizes. Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2 and
Custom 1 to 4*
Size Enter the Inch models

Entry size not Horizontal: 5.83 to 17" (in 0.01" increments),
included in Vertical: 3.86 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)
the standard
sizes 1 and Metric models
2**. Vertical: 98 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments),
Horizontal: 148 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Media Plain (105 g/m2 or less), Transparency, Rough,

Type Vellum (64 g/m2 or less), Labels, Recycled, Preprinted***, Bond, Cardstock,
Color, Prepunched***, Letterhead***,
Thick (106 g/m2 or more), Envelope, Coated, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8***
* For instructions on how to specify the custom paper sizes (Custom 1 to 4), refer to Adding
a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print on page 8-4.
*** For instructions on how to specify the custom paper types 1 to 8, refer to Paper Weight on
page 8-7.
To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper
Action on page 8-10.
NOTE: You can conveniently select in advance the size and type of paper that will be used often and set them
as default (refer to Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray on page 8-6).
4-4
Copying Functions
Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type.
3 Press [Org./Paper/Finishing], [Paper Selection]

and then [MP Tray Setting].
Ready to copy. Copies 4 Press [Standard Sizes 1 ], [Standard Sizes 2 ],

[Others] or [Size Entry] to select the paper size.
Paper Selection - MP Tray Setting
Standard
Sizes 1
A3 A4 A4 4
A5 A6 B4
Standard
Sizes 2
B5 B5 B6
Others
Folio
Size Entry
Plain
Media Type
Cancel OK
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Ready to copy. Copies If you select [Size Entry], press [+] or [–] to specify
X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) sizes. You can enter
Original Size
X (148 - 432)
the size directly using the numeric keys after
Standard
Sizes 1 432 mm pressing [# Keys].
Standard
5
Sizes 2
# Keys Press [Media Type].
Others
Y (98 - 297)
Size Entry 297 mm

Plain
Media Type
# Keys
Cancel OK
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
6 Select paper type, and press [OK].
7 Press [OK].
8 Press [OK].
9 Press the Start key to start scanning the originals.
10 When the machine is ready, the confirmation

screen for the specified paper appears. Load the
required paper in the multi purpose tray and press
[Continue] to start copying.
4-5
Copying Functions
Mixed Size Originals

Using the optional document processor, the originals of different sizes can be loaded in a batch and copied. In
this operation, up to 30 originals of different sizes can be placed in the document processor at the same time.
Supported Combinations of Originals
Originals of the Same Width
The supported combinations of originals are as follows.
Ledger and Letter (A3 and A4)
Ledger Letter Letter Ledger
Ledger and Letter-R (Folio and A4-R)
Legal Letter-R Letter-R

Legal
B4 and B5
4-6
Copying Functions
Originals of Different Widths (Available for metric models only)
Place all originals of different widths. The supported combinations of originals are as follows.
NOTE: When mixing the original sizes as using the following combination: Folio, A4-R, and B5-R, make sure
to set the System Menu key -> Common Settings -> Original / Paper Settings -> Original Auto Detect to [On]
for [Folio].
For more information, refer to Automatic Detection of Originals (Available for metric models only) on page 8-9.
A3, B4, A4 and B5

4
B4, A4-R and B5
Folio, A4-R and B5-R
4-7
Copying Functions
Selecting How to Copy Originals

Select whether you wish to create individual copies on different size paper matching the original sizes or to
produce all copies on the same size paper.
NOTE: This function is available regardless of whether originals have the same width or not.
The table below shows the finished document sizes for the different original size options.
Option Description
Mixed Size Copies Originals are detected individually for size and
copied to the same size paper as originals.
Same Size Copies Originals are all copied to the same size paper.
Use the procedure below to copy mixed size originals.
2 Place originals on the document processor.
IMPORTANT: When placing originals of different

widths, be sure to flush them against the document
width guide toward the back of the machine.
3 Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Mixed Size

Originals].
Ready to copy. Copies 4 Select [Mixed Size Copies] or [Same Size Copies]
as finish size.
5
Original Width
Off
Select the combination of originals from [Same
Place original. Mixed Size
Same Width Different
Width] and [Different Width].
Copies
Width
When [Same Size Copies] is selected, select [Long
Same Size
Copies
Top Page Direction Edge Left] or [Short Edge Left] as the first original
Original : --- orientation.
Zoom : 100%
Paper : --- Long Edge Short Edge
Preview
Left Left
6 Press [OK].
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
4-8
Copying Functions
Original Orientation
Select the original orientation to use the following functions.
• Zoom (XY Zoom)

• Duplex
• Margin/Centering originals
• Border erase
• Combine mode
• Memo mode 4
• Page numbering
• Booklets
* /PunchIf [On] is selected as the Orientation Confirmation on page 8-15 setting in the System Menu, the
selection screen for original orientation appears when you select any of the above functions.
When placing originals on the platen
Original [Top Edge Top] [Top Edge Left]
When placing originals on the optional document processor
NOTE: To change the default setting for the original orientation, refer to Original Orientation on page 8-16.
4-9
Copying Functions
Use the procedure below to select the orientation when placing the originals on the platen.
3 Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Original

Orientation].
Ready to copy. Copies 4 Select [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge Left] as the way
the original is oriented.
Select the orientation of the

original document's top edge. 5 Press [OK].
Place original.
Original : ---
Top Edge Top Top Edge Left
Zoom : 100%
Paper : ---
Preview
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
4-10
Copying Functions
Output Destination
You can use the procedure below to select an output destination such as the optional document finisher for your
copies.
NOTE: Optional output destinations include the job separator, document finisher, 3,000 sheet document
finisher, and mailbox.
The table below shows the available output destinations.

4
Destination Description
Top tray Top tray of the machine (where copies are stored)
Finisher Tray* Tray of the optional document finisher
Tray A, Tray B*, Tray C* Trays A to C in the optional 3,000 sheet document finisher
Job Separator Tray Optional job separator
Tray 1 to 7* Trays 1 to 7 in the optional mailbox (tray 1 is the top tray)

* Copy output orientation can be selected either as face-up (print facing up) or face-
down (print facing down).
NOTE: To change default destination for copies, refer to Paper Output on page 8-14 for details.
Use the procedure below to select the output destination.
3 Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Paper

Output].
Ready to copy. Copies 4 Select the output destination for finished copies.
Paper Output When you select [Finisher Tray], [Tray B], [Tray C]
Face Up
or [Tray 1] to [Tray 7], select the orientation of
Place original.
output copy, Face Up (print facing up) or Face
Face Down
Down (print facing down).
Top Tray Tray A Tray B Tray C
Original : ---
Job Separator Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3
5 Press [OK].
Zoom : 100% Tray
6
Paper : ---
Preview
Tray 4 Tray 5 Tray 6 Tray 7
Press the Start key to start copying.
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
4-11
Copying Functions
Combine Mode
This mode allows you to copy 2 or 4 originals combined onto a single page. 2-in-1 mode or 4-in-1 mode. The
page boundary of each original can be indicated.
NOTE: Combine mode is available for the copy paper sizes of A3, B4, Folio, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R,
Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 8.5×13.5", Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 8K, 16K and 16K-R.
2-in-1 Mode
For copying two originals onto a single sheet. This mode can be used with Duplex mode to copy four originals
onto one sheet.
The following 2-in-1 options and output orientations are available.
Platen Document processor
NOTE: When placing the original on the platen, be sure to copy the originals in page order.
4-in-1 Mode
For copying four originals onto a single sheet. This mode can be used with Duplex mode to copy eight originals
onto one sheet.
The following 4-in-1 options and output orientations are available.

Platen Document processor
4-12
Copying Functions
NOTE: When placing the original on the platen, be sure to copy the originals in page order.
Types of Page Boundary Lines

The following types of the boundary lines are available.
None Solid Dotted Borders

(Cropmark)
The procedure for using Combine mode copying is explained below.
3 Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Combine].
Ready to copy. Copies 4 Press [2 in 1] or [4 in 1], and choose the page layout
of Layout.
Combine
5
Layout
Off
Press [Border Line] to choose the type of the lines
Place original. 2 in 1 to indicate page boundaries. Press [OK].
Right then Left then
Down Down None
4 in 1
Border Line
6 Press [Original Orientation] to choose orientation of
Original : ---
Zoom : 100% Top Edge Top
Down then Down then
Paper : --- Right Left
Original
Preview Orientation

7 Press [OK].
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
If the original is placed on the platen, replace the

original and press the Start key.

start copying.
4-13
Copying Functions
Margin/Centering Mode
Shift the original image to make space on the copy for binding on the left (right) or top (bottom) side.
When you copy onto paper different from the original size, you can center the original image on the paper.
The following margin widths are available.
Input units Margin Width
Inch Models -0.75 to 0.75" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric Models -18 mm to 18 mm (in 1-mm increments)
Margin on the Back Side

When duplex copying, you can also specify the margin on the back side.
Auto
When [Auto] is selected, an appropriate margin is applied automatically on the rear page depending on a margin
specified for the front page and a binding orientation.
Separate Front/Back Margins
Enables you to specify the front and back settings separately.
NOTE: You can set the default margin width. Refer to Margin Default on page 8-22 for details.
Use the procedure below to make copies with margins.
3 Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Margin/Centering].
Ready to copy.
Copies 4 Press [Margin] to select the copy with margin.
Margin/Centering
Left/Right (-18 - +18)
Use [+] or [–] to enter the margins for Left/Right and
Off
0 Top/Bottom. Press [# Keys] to use the numeric
mm
Place original. Margin keys for entry.

Auto
# Keys
Centering
Top/Bottom (-18 - +18) Back Page
For duplex copying, press [Back Page] and select
Original : --- 0
mm
[Auto] or [Manual].
Top Edge Top
Zoom : 100%
Paper : ---
Original
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
4-14
Copying Functions
Copies If you selected [Auto], press [OK]. If you pressed

Ready to copy.
[Manual], enter the margins in the displayed screen
Margin/Centering - Back Page
Left/Right (-18 - +18)
and then press [OK].
Auto
6 mm
Place original. Manual
# Keys
Top/Bottom (-18 - +18)
Original : ---
6 mm
Zoom : 100%
Paper : ---
Preview # Keys
4
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Ready to copy. Copies Press [Centering] to center the original image on

the paper.
Margin/Centering
Off
Place original. Margin the originals, either [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge
Centering
Original : ---
6 Press [OK].
Top Edge Top
Zoom : 100%
Paper : ---
Original
Preview Orientation
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
4-15
Copying Functions
Border Erase
Use Border Erase to remove black shadows that appear around the outside of the original when making copies.
The following options can be selected.
Border Erase Sheet

Erases black borders around the single sheet original.
Original Copy
Border Erase Book

Erases black borders around the edges and in the
middle of the original such as a thick book. You can
specify the widths individually to erase the borders
around the edges and in the center of the book.
Original Copy
Individual Border Erase

Specify border erase widths individually for all edges.
Original Copy
In each option, the available ranges are as below.
Input units Border Erase Range
Inch Models 0 to 2"(in 0.01" increments)
Metric Models 0 mm to 50 mm (in 1-mm increments)
NOTE: To specify the default width value of Border Erase, refer to Border Erase Default on page 8-21 for
details.
4-16
Copying Functions
Border Erase to Back Page

When scanning a 2-sided original, this allows you to erase the borders on the back of the original. The table
below shows the available settings.
Item Detail
Same as Front Border Erase performed using the same setting

Page as the front page
Do Not Erase No Border Erase performed on the back page

4
NOTE: You can change the default setting for Border Erase to Back Page. For details, refer to Paper
Selection on page 8-27.
Use the procedure below to erase borders when copying.
3 Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Border Erase].
Ready to copy. Copies 4 Select [Border Erase Sheet] to erase borders for an
individual sheet or [Border Erase Book] to erase
Border Erase
Border (0 - 50)
borders for a book.
Off
6 mm
Place original. Border Erase Use [+] or [–] to enter the width in Border or Gutter.
Sheet
# Keys
Same as Press [# Keys] to use the numeric keys for entry.
Border Erase Front Page
Book Back Page
Gutter (0 - 50)
Original : --- Individual 6 mm

Border Erase
Zoom : 100%
Paper : ---
Preview # Keys
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Ready to copy.
Copies Press [Individual Border Erase] to select the
individual border erase.
Border Erase
(0 - 50)
Off
Top 6
Use [+] or [–] to enter the width in Top, Bottom, Left
or Right. Press [# Keys] to use the numeric keys for
mm
Place original. Border Erase
Sheet Bottom 6 mm
Same as entry.
Book
Left 6 mm Back Page
Original : --- Individual Right 6

mm
Press [Original Orientation] to select the original
Border Erase
Zoom
Paper
: 100%
: ---
Top Edge Top
orientation from either [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge
Original
Status 10/10/2008 10:10

For 2-sided originals, press [Back Page] and then
press [Same as Front Page] or [Do Not Erase].
5 Press [OK].
4-17
Copying Functions
Booklet from Sheets

The Booklet copying option allows you to copy sheet originals and produce booklets such as small brochures
or pamphlets. A booklet, such as a magazine, is made by folding at the center.
You can copy the cover page onto colored paper or thick paper. Paper for the cover is supplied from the multi
purpose tray. To feed the cover paper from the cassette, refer to Paper Source for Cover Paper on page 8-10.
NOTE: Using the optional 3,000 sheet document finisher and the folding unit enables you to saddle stitch your
copies (fold them in two with staples in the center). This is limited to the A3, B4, A4-R, Ledger, Legal, Letter-R.
The supported original and paper sizes are as follows.
Type of Original Original Size Paper Size
One-sided original, All* A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5, A5-R,
Two-sided original Ledger, Legal, Letter and Letter-R
All* A3, B4, A4-R, Ledger, Legal and Letter-R
Book original A3, B4, A4-R, B5-R, A5-R, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, Letter and Letter-R
Ledger, Letter-R and 8K
A3, B4, A4-R, B5-R, A5-R, A4-R and Letter-R

Ledger and Letter-R
* Except for custom sized originals.
For binding on the left side

The folded copies can be read from left to right.
Original Copy
For binding on the right side

The folded copies can be read from right to left.
Original Copy
4-18
Copying Functions
For top binding

The folded copies can be read from top to bottom.
Original Copy
The procedure for using Booklet copying is explained below.

4
3 Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Booklet].
Ready to copy. Copies 4 Press [1-sided>>Booklet] to produce a booklet

from single-sided originals.
Booklet
Original
Off
Binding
Off
Press [2-sided>>Booklet] to produce a booklet
Left/Right
Place original. 1-sided Binding
Cover
from two-sided originals.
>>Booklet Top
Off
2-sided
>>Booklet
Finishing
Binding
Saddle Press [Book>>Booklet] to produce a booklet from
an open book original.
Stitch
Left
Original : --- Book
>>Booklet Binding Top Edge Top
Zoom : 100%
Right
Paper : ---
Original
Binding
Preview Orientation
Top

Status 10/10/2008 10:10
5 If you selected [2-sided>>Booklet] or

[Book>>Booklet], choose the binding orientation in
Finishing.
If you selected [1-sided>>Booklet], choose the

binding orientation in Finishing.
6 If you choose [1-sided>>Booklet],

[2-sided>>Booklet], or [Book>>Booklet] you can
add the cover. Press [Cover], select [Cover] and
press [OK].

8 If the optional 3,000 sheet document finisher and

folding unit are installed, the [Saddle Stitch] option
is displayed.
To use saddle stitching, press [Saddle Stitch] and
then press [Bind and Fold]. You can saddle stitch
up to 16 sheets (64 pages).
9 Press [OK].
10 Platen and press the Start key. Copying begins.
4-19
Copying Functions
NOTE: When using the platen, be sure to place the

originals in page order.
If the originals are placed on the platen,

consecutively replace each original after pressing
the Start key.

start copying.
4-20
Copying Functions
Cover Mode
Add a cover to the finished copies. You can copy the first page and/or the last page onto colored paper or thick
paper fed from the different paper source than the regular one. The following two options are available. Paper
for the cover is supplied from the multi purpose tray.
To feed the cover paper from the cassette, refer to Paper Source for Cover Paper on page 8-10.
Type of Cover Description
Front Cover First page of the originals is copied on a different

paper. 4
Front and Back First page and last page of the originals are
Covers copied on different paper.
The procedure for using Cover mode copying is explained below.
3 Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Cover].
Ready to copy. Copies 4 Press [Front Cover] or [Front and Back Covers].
1
Cover 5 Press [OK].
Print cover pages on the different type of
paper, using a different paper source.
Select either [Front Cover] or
Place original. [Front and Back Covers].
*Set paper source for cover in System Menu.
Original : ---
Off Front Cover Front and Back
Zoom : 100%
Covers
Paper : ---
Preview
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
If the originals are placed on the platen,

consecutively replace each original after pressing
the Start key.

start copying.
4-21
Copying Functions
Form Overlay
Copy the original images onto the form. Once you scan
and register the form, the form is overlaid onto the
original. You can also use a form that is already
Density
registered in the machine's memory.
:30%
Forms Original Copy
NOTE: To register a form in advance, refer to Form for
Form Overlay Box on page 6-17 for details.
Density
:100%
Follow the steps as below for form overlay.
2 Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Form Overlay].
Ready to copy. Copies 3 Press [Scan New Form] to use the first page of
1 originals as a form.
Form Overlay
Density (10 㵨 30, 100)
Off
10 %
Place original. Select

NOTE: You can select the form density setting through
Stored Form
4 levels from 10%, 20%, 30% or 100%. Press the [+] or
Scan
New Form [-] buttons in Density.
Original : ---
Zoom : 100% None
Paper : ---
Select
Preview Form
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Ready to copy. Copies To use the forms already registered, press [Select
1 Stored Form]. Press [Select Form] to display the
Form Overlay - Select Form
document boxes that store documents which can
Document Box
be used as a form. Select the desired form from the
Box Name
Up
list and press [OK].
Form for Form Overlay
Custom Box
Detail
1/1 NOTE: To return to a higher level folder, press [Up].
Preview
Open
Cancel OK
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
4 Press [OK].
5 Place the originals.
Place the original for the form on top of the other

originals. When using the optional document
processor, the first page of the originals should be
placed on the top.
4-22
Copying Functions
Page Numbering
Number multiple pages of originals in sequential order. The formats for numbering are [-1-], [P.1] or [1/n]. The
format [1/n] prints the total number of pages in the place of n.
Select Top Left, Top Middle, Top Right, Bottom Left, Bottom Middle or Bottom Right as the page numbering
position.
Original [ – 1 –] [P.1] [1/n]
Use the procedure below to insert page numbers on your copies.

the platen.
3 Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Page #].
Ready to copy. Copies 4 Select the numbering format from [-1-], [P.1] or
1 [1/n].
Page #
Off Position
Top Top Top
Auto
5 Select the page numbering position.
Middle Last Page
Left Right
-1-
Bottom
Left
Bottom
Middle
Bottom
Right Auto 6 To start page numbering from a page other than the
first page, press [+] or [–] of 1st Page and select the
P.1
1st Page (1 - 10) Start # (1 - 999) Denominator
#
1/n 1 1
Top Edge Top
starting page. You can also enter the number with
Original
the numeric keys after pressing [# Keys].
# Keys # Keys Orientation
Cancel OK
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
7 To start the numbering with a number other than 1,

press [+] or [–] of Start Number and enter the
starting number. You can also enter the number
with the numeric keys after pressing [# Keys].
8 If you do not want page numbering through to the

last page, press [Last Page]. Select Manual and
use [+] or [-] to enter the final page to be numbered
(a negative number of pages counting backwards
from the last page). Then press [OK]. You can set a
value up to -10. You can also enter the number with
the numeric keys after pressing [# Keys].
4-23
Copying Functions
9 The total number of pages n in the format [1/n] can

be changed manually. Press [Denominator #] and
select [Manual]. Press [+] or [–] to enter the total
number of pages and press [OK]. You can also
enter the number with the numeric keys after
pressing [# Keys].

Left]. Press [OK].
11 Press [OK].
Memo Mode
Delivers copies with a space for adding notes. You can also copy two originals onto the same sheet with a space
or add lines to indicate page boundaries.
NOTE: Memo mode is available for the copy paper sizes of Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 8.5×13.5", Letter, Letter-R,
Statement-R, A3, B4, Folio, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, 8K, 16K and 16K-R.
Layout A
Reduces images of each original page for printing onto
half of a page, leaving the other half blank for notes.
Original Copy
Layout B
Reduces images of two original pages for copying onto
half of a single page, leaving the other half blank for
notes.
Original Copy
4-24
Copying Functions
Types of Page Boundary Lines

The following boundary lines are available.
None Solid Dotted Borders

(Cropmark)
Use the procedure below to insert page boundary lines on your copies.
3 Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Memo Page].
Ready to copy. Copies 4 Press [Layout A] or [Layout B]. Select the page
layout from Layout.
Memo Page
5
Layout
Off
Press [Border Line] to select the page boundary
Place original. Layout A line. Press [OK].
Top Top
L to R R to L None
Layout B
Border Line
6 Press [Original Orientation] to select orientation of
Original : ---
Left]. Press [OK].
Top Edge Top
Zoom : 100% Top Top
Paper : --- L to B R to B Original
Preview Orientation

7 Press [OK].
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
4-25
Copying Functions
Poster
For using this device to make copies larger than the
maximum paper size, use Poster mode to separate and
copy an enlarged image onto multiple pages.
The completed copies have overlapping areas. A single

large page can be created by pasting those areas
together.
Original Copy Choose one of the following 3 enlargement settings:
• Copy size – The output paper size is chosen from

the following sizes. Copy is enlarged according to
the selected paper size.
Model Type Paper size
Inch models 34 × 44", 22 × 34", 17 × 22"
Metric models A0, A1, A2
• Zoom prioirty – Specify the output zoom size from

100 to 400%. Image will be output on the necessary
number of copies for the specified zoom size.
• Number of sheets – Select number of sheets to
split the image from 2, 4, or 8 sheets. Copy is
enlarged according to the selected number.
NOTE: The available original sizes are 11 × 17",

8 1/2 × 11", A3 and A4R. The available paper sizes
are 11 × 17" and A3 only.
Follow the steps as below to use poster enlargement.
1 Press Copy key.
3 Press [Layout/Edit] and then press [Poster].
Ready to copy. Copies 4 Select enlargement method.
Poster If [Copy Size] is selected, set the output paper size.

Off Separate and copy an image suitable for
the selected copy size.
Copy Size
If [Zoom Priority] is selected, set the output zoom
Place original.
size.
Zoom
Priority
Number of
If [Number of Sheets] is selected, set the number of
Original : ---
Zoom : 100%
Sheets
split pages.
Paper : --- A0 A1 A2
5
Preview
Press [OK].
Status 10/10/2008 10:10

4-26
Copying Functions
Image Repeat/Double Copy

Tiles the 1 copied sheet with an original image. You can
also specify the area of the original to repeat.
Image Repeat
Copies the original image multiple times onto 1 sheet at
a specified magnification.
You can also specify how much of the original is

4
repeatedly copied.
Original Copy
Double Copy
Makes 2 copies of the same original on a single sheet.
For example, you can double-copy an A4 original onto

an A3 sheet which you then cut in half to make 2 copies
that are identical to the original.
Original Copy
Follow the steps as below to use Image Repeat/Double Copy.
1 Press Copy key.
3 Press [Layout/Edit] and then press [Image Repeat].
Ready to copy. Copies 4 Press [Zoom Priority].

1
Image Repeat To make double copies, press [Double Copy] and
proceed to step 8.
Off (25 - 400)
100 %
Zoom
5
Place original.
Priority
Press [+] or [–] to set the zoom size.
# Keys
Double
Copy
Press [# Keys] to enter with numeric keys.
Original : ---
Off
Zoom : 100%
Paper : ---
Preview
Specify
Repeat Area
6 To set the area of the original to be repeated, press
[On] for Specify Repeat Area.
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
4-27
Copying Functions
7 Press [+] or [–] to input the area of the original to be

repeated.
With metric models, you can enter the border width

directly using the numeric keys after pressing [#-
Keys].
Y1: Length from top left of platen to top edge of

repeat area
X1: Length from Height from top left of platen to left

edge of repeat area
Y2: Height of repeat area
X2: Width of repeat area
8 Press [OK].
4-28
Copying Functions
EcoPrint
Use EcoPrint to save toner when printing. Use this function for test copies or any other occasion where high
quality print is unnecessary.
The procedure for making copies using EcoPrint is explained below.
3 Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [EcoPrint]. 4

Ready to copy. Copies 4 Press [On].
EcoPrint 5 Press [OK].

Conserve toner when printing.
Use EcoPrint for test copies
and other situations where high-quality
Place original. copies are not necessary.
Original : ---
Off On
Zoom : 100%
Paper : ---
Preview
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Single Color Copy

Specify one of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Red, Green, or Blue, and produce copies with that color regardless of
original type.
Follow the steps as below for Single Color Copy.
1 Press Copy key.
3 Press [Color/Image Quality], [Color Selection] and

then press [Single Color].
Ready to copy. Copies 4 Select color for copying from [Cyan], [Magenta],
1 [Yellow], [Red], [Green] or [Blue].
Color Selection
Auto Color Single Color

5 Press [OK].
Place original. Full Color
Cyan Magenta Yellow
Black &
White
Original : --- Single Color Red Green Blue

Zoom : 100%
Paper : ---
Preview
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
4-29
Copying Functions
Color Balance Adjust

Adjust the strength of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black to make fine hue adjustments.
NOTE: This feature is used with full color copying.

This feature can not be used together with Adjusting Density (see page 3-8).
This feature can not be used together with One touch Image Adjust (see page 4-33).
Refer to the sample image in Quick Guide to Adjusting Image Quality.
Follow the steps below to adjust color balance.
1 Press Copy key.
3 Press [Color/Image Quality] and then press [Color

Balance].
Color Balance 5 Press [ ] or [ ] on each side of the color to be

Off
Cyan -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5
adjusted (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black) to adjust
Place original. On
each color.
Magenta -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5
Yellow -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5
6 Press [OK].
Original : ---
Zoom : 100% Black -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5
Paper : ---
Preview
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
4-30
Copying Functions
Hue Adjustment
Adjust the color (hue) of images. Make adjustments such as adjusting red to a strong yellow-red or yellow to a
strong green-yellow to make more creative copies.
The items that may be configured are as follows.
• All: Adjust hue for all colors.

Yellow • Yellow - Green & Blue - Magenta: Adjust color
balance for yellow and green, and blue and magenta.
Red Green
• Green - Cyan & Magenta - Red: Adjust color balance
for green and cyan, and magenta and red.
4
Magenta Cyan • Cyan - Blue & Red - Yellow: Adjust color balance
for cyan and blue, and red and yellow.
Blue
This feature can not be used together with Adjusting
Density (see page 3-8).
This feature can not be used together with One touch
Image Adjust mode (see page 4-33).
These adjustments are especially useful on rich color
images.
Follow the steps below to use image hue adjustment.
1 Press Copy key.
3 Press [Color/Image Quality] and then press [Hue

Adjustment].
4 Select the item for which the hue is to be adjusted

and then press [ ] or [ ] to make the adjustment.
Ready to copy. Copies
Hue Adjustment
Off Adjust hue for all colors.
Place original. All Yellow
Red Green
Yellow - Green
& Blue - Magenta
Green - Cyan Magenta Cyan

Original : ---
& Magenta - Red
Zoom : 100%
Paper : --- Blue
Cyan - Blue
& Red - Yellow
Preview
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
4-31
Copying Functions
Example 1
Yellow
Select [Yellow - Green & Blue - Magenta], and
Red Green press [ ] to adjust yellow closer to green, and blue
closer to magenta.
Magenta Cyan
Blue
Example 2
Yellow
Select [Cyan - Blue & Red - Yellow], and press [ ]
Red Green to adjust yellow closer to red , and blue closer to
cyan.
Magenta Cyan
Blue
5 Press [OK].
4-32
Copying Functions
One-touch Image Adjust

Adjust images as desired to more vivid or more dull images.
The items that may be configured are as follows: Vivid, Dull, Sharp, Smooth, Light, Dark
Refer to the sample image in Quick Guide to Adjusting Image Quality for examples of the effect of each setting.

This feature can not be used together with Adjusting Density (see page 3-8).
This feature can not be used together with Color Balance Adjust (see page 4-30). 4
Select from one of the 6 available One Touch Image Adjust types. Multiple selections are not possible.
Follow the steps below to use One-touch Image Adjust.
1 Press Copy key.
3 Press [Color/Image Quality] and then press [One-

touch Image Adjust].
Ready to copy. Copies 4 Select the image.
One-touch Image Adjust 5 Press [OK].

Adjust images as desired.
Place original.
Off
Original : --- Vivid Dull Sharp

Zoom : 100%
Paper : ---
Smooth Light Dark
Preview
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
4-33
Copying Functions
Sharpness Adjust
Adjust the sharpness of image outlines. When copying penciled originals with rough or broken lines, clear copies
can be taken by adjusting sharpness toward [Sharpen]. When copying images made up of patterned dots such
as magazine photos, in which moire* patterns appear, edge softening and weakening of the moire effect can be
obtained by setting the sharpness toward [Unsharpen].
* Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots.
Refer to the sample image in Quick Guide to Adjusting Image Quality.
Follow the steps below to adjust sharpness.
1 Press Copy key.
3 Press [Color/Image Quality] and then Press

[Sharpness].
Ready to copy. Copies 4 Press [-3] to [3] (Unsharpen - Sharpen) to adjust

the sharpness.
Sharpness
5 Press [OK].
Place original.
Unsharpen Sharpen
-3 -2 -1 0 +1 +2 +3
Original : ---
Zoom : 100%
Paper : ---
Preview

Status 10/10/2008 10:10
4-34
Copying Functions
Background Density Adjust

Lightens the background of color originals with dark
backgrounds.
NOTE: This feature is used with full color and auto

color copying. Background Density Adjust is disabled
Original Copy during auto color copying when the a black & white
original has been detected.
Follow the steps below to use background density adjust.

4
1 Press Copy key.
3 Press [Color/Image Quality] and then press

[Background Density Adj.].
Background Density Adj.

Background
Off
Lighter Darker
Place original. On
1 2 3 4 5
Original : ---
Zoom : 100%
Paper : ---
Preview
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
5 Press [1] to [5] (Lighter - Darker) to adjust the

background color intensity.
6 Press [OK].
4-35
Copying Functions
Continuous Scan
When a large number of originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time, the originals can be
scanned in separate batches and then copied as one job. With this function, originals are scanned until you
press [Scan Finish].
Any of the following settings can be changed during scanning.
• Original size selection • Zoom

• Original orientation • Border erase
• Image quality selection • Density
• Type of original (2-sided/book original) • Color Selection
If you use Job Build, you can insert a blank paper during scanning or a blank page during duplex copying.
The procedure for making copies using Continuous Scan is explained below.
2 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Continuous

Scan].
Ready to copy. Copies 3 If Continuous Scan is selected, press [On].
Continuous Scan If Job Build is selected, press [Job Build] and select
Off Select desired binding orientation.
desired binding orientation.
On
4
Place original.
Press [OK].
Job Build
Original : ---
Zoom : 100%
Paper : --- Binding Binding Binding
Left Right Top
Preview
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Scan next original(s).

Place the originals and press Start key.
Copies 5 Place the originals in the document processor or on
Press [Finish Scan] to start copying. 1 the platen and press the Start key.
Job No.: 000021 Job Name: doc20080505113414 User Name: -----
If [Job Build] is selected, the next page can be

Scanner Setting Finishing
㪈㪉 pages
changed. Press [Sheet Insertion] to insert a blank
Original Original Original
Size Orientation Image Next Copy: On Front paper. Press [Next Copy: On Back] in duplex
copying to print the next page on back page.
2-sided/Book Zoom Border Erase
Original Next Copy:
On Back
Sheet
Density Insertion
1/2
Cancel Finish Scan
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
6 Place the next original and press the Start key.

Repeat these steps to scan the remaining originals.

start copying.
4-36
Copying Functions
Auto Image Rotation

Automatically rotates the image when the sizes of the original and the loaded paper matches but the orientations
are different. The images will be rotated 90° counter-clockwise prior to copying.
NOTE: To set Auto Image Rotation as the default mode, refer to Auto Image Rotation on page 8-22.
The procedure for making copies using Auto Image Rotation is explained below.
1 Press the Copy key. 4

3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Auto Image

Rotation].
4 Press [On] to select Auto Image Rotation.
5 Press [OK].
Negative Image
Inverts black and white portions of the image for printing.
NOTE: This function is only available for black and white copy mode.
Use the procedure below to make negative image copies.
3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Negative

Image].
4 Press [On] to select Negative Image.
5 Press [OK].
4-37
Copying Functions
Mirror Image
Copies the mirrored image of the original.
NOTE: This function is only available for black and white copy mode.
Use the procedure below to make mirror image copies.
3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Mirror Image].
4 Press [On] to select Mirror Image.
5 Press [OK].
4-38
Copying Functions
Job Finish Notice

Sends a notice by e-mail when a job is completed. User can be notified of the completion of a copy job while
working at a remote desk, saving the time spent waiting beside the machine for copying to finish.
NOTE: PC should be configured in advance so that E-mail can be used.
Example of Job Finish Notice
To: [email protected] 4
Subject: 1234 Job end report mail
Job No.: 000002
Result: OK
End Time: Wed 27 Apr 2005 14:56:08
File Name: doc27042005145608
Job Type: Copy
------------------------------------------------
1234
Use the procedure below to enable job finish notification when making copies.
3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Job Finish Notice].
Ready to copy. Copies 4 To select the destination from the address book,
press [Address Book] on the left of the screen and
Job Finish Notice
then press [Address Book] in the next screen. Select
Off
the destination to be notified, then press [OK].
Address Book Destination Detail You can view information on the notification
Address
User A [email protected]
destination by pressing [Detail].
Entry
Detail Address Book
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
4-39
Copying Functions
Ready to copy. Copies To directly enter the E-mail address, press

[Address Entry]. Press [E-mail Address], enter the
Job Finish Notice
address and press [OK].
Off
Address Book
E-mail
Address 5 Press [OK].
Address
Entry 6 Press the Start key to start copying. Upon
completion of the job, an E-mail notice is sent to the
selected destination.
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
4-40
Copying Functions
File Name
Names a copy job. Add other information such as date and time or job number as necessary. You can check a
job history or job status using the job name, date and time, or job number specified here.
Use the procedure below to assign a name to your copy job.
3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [File Name Entry]. 4

Ready to copy. Copies 4 Press [File Name], enter the name for a copy job,
and press [OK].
File Name Entry
Add a file name.

Additional information such as Job No.
To add date and time, press [Date and Time]. To
and Date and Time can also be set.
add job number, [Job No.]. Added information is
File Name
doc displayed in Additional Info.
Additional Info
Job No.
5 Press [OK].
Job No. Date and Time
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Priority Override
Suspends a current job and gives the selected job priority for copying. The suspended job resumes after Priority
Override copying is finished.
NOTE: The current job that is selected as Priority Override cannot be suspended.
The procedure for using Priority Override is explained below.
3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Priority

Override].
4 Press [On] to select Priority Override.
5 Press [OK].
6 Press the Start key. The current copy job is

suspended and the copy job selected in Priority
Override starts. The suspended job resumes after
Priority Override copying is finished.
4-41
Copying Functions
Repeat Copy
Enable additional copies in the desired quantity as necessary after a copy job is completed. For confidential
documents, you can set up a pass code for the use of Repeat Copy. In such a case, the correct pass code must
be entered when using Repeat Copy or copies will not be delivered.
IMPORTANT: A Repeat Copy job is cleared when the main power switch is turned off.
Repeat Copy is not available when the machine is equipped with the optional Data Security Kit.
Repeat Copy cannot be used when the maximum number of Repeat Copy jobs to retain in the document box is
set to zero (refer to Maximum Number of Repeat Copy Jobs Retained on page 4-43).
You can select Repeat Copy as default setting. Refer to Repeat Copying on page 8-24.
Giving a file name to a copy job will facilitate identification of the data when copying (refer to File Name on page
4-41).
Selecting Repeat Copy

Use the procedure below to select repeat copying.
3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Repeat Copy].
Repeat Copy To register a password, press [# Keys] and enter a

Off
Password(4digits)
4-digit password.
Place original. On
# Keys
IMPORTANT: If you forget the pass code, Repeat Copy
Original : ---
will be unavailable. Make a note of the pass code
Zoom
Paper
: 100%
: ---
beforehand if necessary.
Preview
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
5 Press [OK].
6 Press the Start key to start copying and register

this job as a Repeat Copy job.
Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs

The Repeat Copy jobs are stored in the Document Box. Refer to Job Box on page 3-33 to print out the Repeat
Copy jobs.
4-42
Copying Functions
Maximum Number of Repeat Copy Jobs Retained

You can use the procedure below to change the maximum number of copy jobs that can be retained in the
document box.
Use the procedure below to change the maximum number of copy jobs retained.
2 Press [Document Box/Removable Memory] and

then [Next] of Job Box.
3 Press [Change] of Repeat Copy Job Retention.

4
Document Box/Removable Memory - Repeat Copy Job Retention
4 Use the [+] or [-] key to enter the maximum
Set the maximum number of repeat copy jobs to retain. retention number.
Use [-]/[+] or the numeric keys to enter a number.
*Set this number to 0 to not retain any jobs.
You can also enter the number from the numeric

keys.
(0 - 50)
32 job(s)
A number between 0 and 50 can be entered as the
number of retained jobs.
NOTE: If you enter a value of 0 (zero), you cannot use

Cancel OK
Status 10/10/2008 10:10

the Repeat Copy function.
5 Press [OK].
4-43
Copying Functions
OHP Backing Sheet Mode

When two or three OHP transparencies are stacked on top of each other, static electricity may make them
difficult to handle. When using OHP Backing mode, a paper sheet is automatically inserted between each
transparency, making them easier to handle. Also, the same original page can be copied to the backing sheet
for multiple page copying.
NOTE: Never load OHP transparencies into trays or cassettes other than the multi purpose tray.
When OHP Backing mode is set, the multi purpose tray paper type is automatically set to Transparency.
If the optional document finisher or 3,000 sheet document finisher is installed, you may need to specify the
output destination for finished copies. For further details, refer to Output Destination on page 4-11.
Blank Sheet
Outputs a blank backing sheet after copying to a
transparency. (* denotes OHP film.)
1*
1
2
2 *
3
3*
Original Copy
Copied Sheet
After copying to a transparency, copies the same
original image to the backing sheet paper. (* denotes
1*
1
OHP film.)
1
2
2 *2
3
3
*3
Original Copy
Follow the steps below for OHP Backing Sheet mode.
1 Press Copy key.
2 Place the original.
3 Load the transparencies into the multi purpose tray.
IMPORTANT: Fan through the transparencies before

loading.
Up to 10 transparencies can be loaded at one time.
Be sure that paper of the same size and orientation as
the transparencies is loaded in the cassette.
4-44
Copying Functions
4 Press [Advanced Setup] and then Press [OHP

Backing Sheet].
Ready to copy. Copies 5 Press [Blank Sheet] or [Copied Sheet].
OHP Backing Sheet 6 Select the media to be fed. If you press [Auto], the
Off Select the paper source to feed paper. machine automatically selects media that matches
Place original. Blank Sheet the size of the original.
Auto A4
Copied Sheet Plain
A3
7 Press [OK].
Plain
4
Original : ---
A4
Zoom : 100%
Plain
Paper : ---
A4
Preview Plain
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
4-45
Copying Functions
4-46
5 Sending Functions
This chapter explains the functions available for sending originals.
• Original Size Selection........................................................................5-2

• Sending Size Selection .......................................................................5-3
• Zoom...................................................................................................5-5
• Centering ............................................................................................5-6
• Mixed Size Originals ...........................................................................5-7
• 1-sided/2-sided Selection..................................................................5-10
• Original Orientation ...........................................................................5-11
• File Format........................................................................................5-12
• File Separation..................................................................................5-13
• PDF Encryption Functions ................................................................5-14
• Image Quality....................................................................................5-16
• Adjusting Density ..............................................................................5-17
• Scan Resolution................................................................................5-18
• Sharpness.........................................................................................5-19
• Background Density Adjustment.......................................................5-20
• Color / Grayscale / Black and White Selection .................................5-21
• Continuous Scan...............................................................................5-22
• Border Erase.....................................................................................5-23
• Enter Document Name/File Name ....................................................5-25
• Enter E-mail Subject and Body .........................................................5-26
• WSD Scan ........................................................................................5-27
• Job Finish Notice ..............................................................................5-29
• Send and Print ..................................................................................5-30
• Send and Store .................................................................................5-30
• FTP Encrypted TX ............................................................................5-31
• Color Type.........................................................................................5-31
• About Color Profiles ..........................................................................5-32
5-1
Sending Functions
Original Size Selection

Select the size of originals that will serve as the basis for scanning. Be sure to select the original size when using
originals of nonstandard sizes.
Choose the original size from the following groups of original size.
Item Detail Size
Standard Select from automatic Inch models: Auto, Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-
Sizes 1 detection and standard R, Statement, Statement-R, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II-
sizes. R, 11×15"
Metric models: Auto, A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-
R, A5, A5-R, B6, B6-R, A6-R, Folio
Standard Select from standard Inch models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5,
Sizes 2 sizes except Standard A5-R, B6, B6-R, A6-R, Folio, 8K, 16 K, 16K-R
Sizes 1 .
Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R,
Statement, Statement-R, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II-R,
11×15", 8K, 16K, 16K-R
Others Select from Hagaki and Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Custom 1 to 4
Custom Original Size *.
Size Entry Enter the size that is not Inch models
indicated in Standard Horizontal: 2 to 17" (in 0.01" increments),
Sizes 1 and 2**. Vertical: 2 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric models
Horizontal: 50 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments),
Vertical: 50 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)
* Regarding the setting method of Custom Original Size (Custom 1 to 4), refer to Custom
Original Size Setup on page 8-4.
Use the procedure below to select the original size when sending scanned images.
3 Press [Original/Sending Data Format] and then

[Original Size].
5-2
Sending Functions
Ready to send. Destination 4 Press [Standard Sizes 1], [Standard Sizes 2],
Place original. 1 [Others], or [Size Entry] to select original size.
Original Size
Standard Auto A3 A4
Sizes 1
A4 A5 A5
Sizes 2
A6 B4 B5
Others
B5 B6 B6
Size Entry
Original : ---
Folio
Zoom : 100%
Paper : ---
Preview
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Ready to send. Destination When you have selected [Size Entry], press [+] or
Original Size
Place original. [-] to set the sizes of X (horizontal) and Y (vertical).
By pressing [# Keys], you can use the numeric
5
X (50 - 432)
Standard
Sizes 1 432 mm keys.
5
Sizes 2
# Keys
Press [OK].
Others
Y (50 - 297)
Original : ---
Size Entry 297 mm
Zoom : 100%
Paper : ---
Preview # Keys
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
6 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to

start sending.
Sending Size Selection

Select the sending size (the size of image to be sent).
The table below lists the sizes.
Item Detail Size
Standard Select from Same Inch models: Same as Original Size, Ledger,
Sizes 1 as Original Size or Legal, Letter, Statement, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II,
Standard Size. 11×15"
Metric models: Same as Original Size, A3, B4, A4,
B5, A5, B6, A6, Folio
Standard Select from Inch models: A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, B6, A6, Folio,
Sizes 2 standard size 8K, 16K
except Standard
Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Statement,
Sizes 1.
8.5×13.5",
Oficio II, 11×15", 8K, 16K
Others Select from Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki
Hagaki.
5-3
Sending Functions
Relationship between Original Size, Sending Size, and Zoom
Original Size (page 5-2), Sending Size, and Zoom (page 5-5) are related to each other. Refer to the following
table.
Original Size and the size you

the same different
wish to send as are
Original Size Specify as Specify as

necessary necessary
Sending Size Select [Same as Select the
Original] required size
Zoom Select [100%] Select [Auto]
(or [Auto])
NOTE: When you select Sending Size that is different from Original Size, and select the Zoom [100%], you
can send the image as the actual size (No Zoom).
Use the procedure below to select the size for transmission when sending scanned images.
1 Press the Send Key.

[Sending Size].
Ready to send. Destination 4 Press [Standard Sizes 1], [Standard Sizes 2], or
Place original. [Others] to select the sending size.
Sending Size
Standard
Sizes 1
Same as
Original Size
A3 A4
5 Press [OK].
A5 A6 B4
Sizes 2
B5 B6 Folio
Others
Original : ---
Zoom : 100%
Paper : ---
Preview
Status 10/10/2008 10:10

start sending.
5-4
Sending Functions
Zoom
Scans the original by automatically zooming it depending on the sending size.
The table below lists the available options.
Item Detail
100% No Zoom (to be scanned at actual size)
Auto Zoomed automatically according to the specified sending size.
NOTE: When zooming in or out, see Sending Size Selection on page 5-3 when selecting the sending size.
Depending on the combination of original size and sending size, the image is placed at the edge of the paper. 5
To center the image vertically and horizontally on the page, use the centering setting described in Centering on
page 5-6.
Use the procedure below to enlarge or reduce the original to match the transmission size.
3 Select the transmission size.
4 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Zoom].
Ready to send. Destination 5 Press [100%] or [Auto].

Place original.
Zoom 6 Press [OK].

Enlarge or reduce original when scanning.
[100%]: Scan at actual size.
[Auto]: Enlarge or reduce to match
Place original. sending size/storing size.
Original : ---
100% Auto
Zoom : 100%
Send : ---
Preview
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

start sending.
5-5
Sending Functions
Centering
When you have scanned the original after specifying the original size and sending size, depending on these
sizes, a margin is created at the bottom, left, or right side of paper. By using the centering, the image is placed
with a margin equally created at each of the page Top/Bottom and Left/Right.
Use the procedure below to center then image when sending a scanned image.
3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Centering].
4 Press [On]. Centering is performed.
5 Press [OK].

start sending.
5-6
Sending Functions

Using the optional document processor, the originals of different sizes can be placed in a batch and sent. In this
operation, up to 30 originals of different sizes can be placed in the document processor at the same time.
Originals of the Same Width
When the original widths are the same, the combinations of originals that can be placed are as follows.
• Ledger and Letter (A3 and A4)
5
Ledger Letter Letter Ledger
• Legal and Letter-R (Folio and A4-R)
Legal Letter-R Letter-R

Legal
• B4 and B5
5-7
Sending Functions
Originals of Different Widths (Available for metric models only)
The combinations of originals of different sizes that can be placed together are as follows.
NOTE: When mixing the original sizes as using the following combination: Folio, A4-R, and B5-R, make sure
to set the System Menu key -> Common Settings -> Original / Paper Settings -> Original Auto Detect to [On]
for [Folio]. For more information, refer to Automatic Detection of Originals (Available for metric models only) on
page 8-9.
• A3, B4, A4, B5
• B4, A4-R, B5
• Folio, A4-R, B5-R
5-8
Sending Functions
Use the procedure below to send mixed size originals as a batch.
2 Place the original into the document processor.
IMPORTANT: When you place originals of different

width, place the top edge of originals to align with the
width guide at the backside. If the originals are placed
unevenly, they may not be scanned correctly.

[Mixed Size Originals].
Ready to send.
Place original.
Destination 4 Select the combination of originals from
[Same Width] and [Different Width].
5
Scan all sheets in the document processor,

even if differently sized, then send. 5 Press [OK].
*Up to 30 sheets can be placed in
Place original. the document processor for mixed
size originals.
Original : ---
Off Same Width Different
Zoom : 100% Width
Send : ---
Preview
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

start sending.
5-9
Sending Functions
1-sided/2-sided Selection
Select the type and binding of original depending on the original.
The table below lists the binding directions for each original type.
Original Type Binding
1-sided Sheet Original 1-sided —
2-sided Sheet Original 2-sided* Binding Left/Right,

Binding Top
Open Book Original such Book Binding Left,

as magazine and book Binding Right
* Only when the optional document processor is used.
Use the procedure below to select the original type and binding direction when sending scanned originals.
3 Press [Original/Sending Data Format] and then [2-

sided/Book Original].
Ready to send. Destination 4 Press [1-sided], [2-sided], or [Book].

Place original.
2-sided/Book Original 5 When selecting [2-sided], select the binding

1-sided
direction and press [Original Orientation] to select
Place original.
2-sided
Left Right
the direction in which the original is set on the
Book platen.
When selecting [Book], select the binding direction.
Original : ---
Zoom
Send
: 100%
: ---
Top Edge Top
Original
6 Press [OK].
Preview Orientation
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

start sending.
5-10
Sending Functions
To send the document in the orientation that can be read properly, specify the upper orientation of original. To
use the functions below, select the orientation in which the original is set on the platen.
• 2-sided/Book Original
• Border Erase
* If [On] is selected as the Orientation Confirmation (page 8-15) setting in the System Menu, the selection
screen for original orientation appears when you select any of the above functions.
When placing the original on the platen
When placing the original on the optional document processor
Use the procedure below to select the orientation when placing the originals on the platen for sending.

[Original Orientation].
5-11
Sending Functions
Ready to send. Destination 4 Select original orientation from [Top Edge Top] and
Place original.
[Top Edge Left].
Select the orientation of the

original document's top edge.
5 Press [OK].
Place original.
Original : ---
Top Edge Top Top Edge Left
Zoom : 100%
Send : ---
Preview
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

start sending.
File Format
Select the file format of the image to send.
The table below lists the file formats and their details.
Adjustable range of image

File Format Color mode
quality
PDF 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto

5 High Quality (Low Comp.) Color (Color/Black and White), Full
Color, Grayscale, Black and White
TIFF 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto

5 High Quality (Low Comp.) Color (Color/Black and White), Full
Color, Grayscale, Black and White
JPEG 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Full

5 High Quality (Low Comp.) Color, Grayscale
XPS 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Full

5 High Quality (Low Comp.) Color, Grayscale
High Comp. 1 Compression Ratio Priority Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto

PDF to 3 Quality Priority Color (Color/Black and White), Full
Color, Grayscale
NOTE: In the color mode, when auto color (color/black and white) is selected, [JPEG] and [XPS] cannot be
specified, and when black and white is selected, [JPEG], [High Comp. PDF], and [XPS] cannot be specified.
When [High Comp. PDF] is specified, you cannot adjust the image quality. In addition, when previewing the color
of the image by selecting [High Comp. PDF], it may differ from the actual color.
You can use PDF encryption functions. For details, refer to the following PDF Encryption Functions.
5-12
Sending Functions
Use the procedure below to select the file format for transmission.

[File Format].
Ready to send. Destination 4 Select the file format from [PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG],
Place original.
[XPS], and [High Comp. PDF].
File Format
When the color mode in scanning has been

PDF Image Quality
Place original. TIFF

Compression Standard Quality
selected for Grayscale or Full Color, set the image
quality.
5
Ratio Priority Priority
JPEG
Original : --- XPS If you selected [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF], press
[Encryption] and specify the encryption settings.
Off
Zoom : 100%
Send : ---
High Comp. Encryption
Preview PDF

5 Press [OK].
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

start sending.
File Separation
Create several files by dividing scanned original data page by page, and send the files.
Use the procedure below to split scanned original data into separate files when sending scanned originals.

[File Separation].
Ready to send. Destination 4 Press [Each Page] to set File Separation.

Place original.
File Separation 5 Press [OK].

Create and send a file for each page
6
of the original that was read.
Place original.
Specify the destination, and press the Start key.
The scanned original is sent after being divided into
files of one page each.
Original : ---
Off Each Page
Zoom : 100%
Send : ---
Preview
NOTE: Three-digit serial number such as
abc_001.pdf, abc_002.pdf... is attached to the end of
the file name.
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
5-13
Sending Functions
PDF Encryption Functions

If you have selected PDF or High Comp. PDF for file format, you can restrict the access level for displaying,
printing, and editing PDF's by assigning a secure password.
The items you can restrict the access level with are as follows.
Item Value Detail
Compatibility Acrobat 4.0 or later, Select the version that is compatible with the PDF file.
Acrobat 5.0 or later
Password to Off, On Enter the password to open the PDF file

Open
Document
Password to Off, On Enter the password to edit the PDF file

Edit/Print When you have entered the password to edit/print
Document document, you can specifically limit the operation.
When you send a PDF file, use the procedure below to encrypt the PDF file for transmission.
3 Press [Original/Sending Data Format], [File

Format], [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF], and
[Encryption].
File Format - Encryption

4 Press [ ] of Compatibility, select Acrobat 4.0 and
Compatibility Acrobat 4.0 and later later or Acrobat 5.0 and later.
Encryption Level: Middle(40-bit)
Password to Open
Document
Off Password 5 When you enter the password to open the PDF file,
On Confirmation select [On] of Password to Open Document.
6 Press [Password], enter a password (up to 256

Password
to Edit/Print
Off Password
characters) and then press [OK].
Document
On Confirmation
Detail
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page
Cancel OK
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

7 Press [Confirmation] and enter the password again

for confirmation. Then press [OK].
8 When you enter the password to edit the PDF file,

select [On] of Password to Edit/Print Document.
9 In the same way as the entry of Password to Open

Document, enter the password to change the PDF
file.
10 Press [Detail].
5-14
Sending Functions
File Format - Detail

11 Restrict the access level of the PDF file. Press [ ]
of Printing Allowed to select the item (the scope of
Printing Allowed Not Allowed
limit). The item to be displayed differs according to
Changes Allowed Not Allowed the version of Acrobat selected in Compatibility in
step 4.
Copying of Text/Images/Others
Disable
Enable
Cancel OK
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
The table below shows the available settings.

5
Item Detail
Not Allowed Make the printing of PDF file impossible
Allowed (Low Resolution Can print the PDF file only in low resolution
only)*
Allowed Can print the PDF file in original resolution

* Only displayed when [Acrobat 5.0 and later] is selected in Compatibility.
12 Press [ ] of Changes Allowed, and select the

item (the scope of limit). The item to be displayed
differs according to the version of Acrobat selected
in Compatibility in step 4.
Item Detail
Not Allowed Cannot change the PDF file
Commenting Can only add commenting
Inserting/Deleting/ Can only insert, delete, and rotate the pages of the
Rotating Pages* PDF file
Page Layout except Can change the page layout except extracting the
extracting Pages** pages of the PDF file
Any except extracting Can conduct all operations except extracting the pages
Pages of the PDF file
* Only displayed when [Acrobat 5.0 and later] is selected in Compatibility.
** Only displayed when [Acrobat 4.0 and later] is selected in Compatibility.
13 From Copying of Text/Images/Others, select

[Disable] or [Enable].
5-15
Sending Functions
Item Detail
Disable Prohibit the copying of text and objects on the PDF file.
Enable Can copy text and objects on the PDF file.
14 Press [OK] three times to return to Original/

Sending Data Format.

start sending.
Image Quality
Select image quality suitable to the type of original.
The table below shows the quality options.
Item Detail
Text+Photo Text and photos together.
Text Only text, no photos.
for OCR For documents to be read by OCR.*
* This function is only available for black and white mode.
Use the procedure below to select the quality when sending scanned originals.
3 Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Original

Image].
Ready to send. Destination 4 Select the original image.

Place original.
Original Image 5 Press [OK].

Select original image
type for best results.
[for OCR]: For documents to be read by OCR.
Place original.
Text+Photo Photo Text
Original : ---
Zoom : 100%
Send : ---
for OCR
Preview
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

start sending.
5-16
Sending Functions
Adjusting Density
Use the procedure below to adjust the density when scanning the originals.
Item Detail
Manual Adjust density using 7 or 13 levels.
Auto Optimum density is selected according to the density of the original.
The procedure for adjusting the density is explained below.

5
3 Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Density].
Ready to send. Destination 4 When selecting manual density adjustment, press

Place original.
[-3] to [+3] (Lighter - Darker) to adjust density.
Density
Auto When selecting auto density adjustment, press

Place original. [Auto].
Lighter Normal Darker
5 Press [OK].
-3 -2 -1 0 +1 +2 +3
Original : ---
Zoom : 100% -2.5 -1.5 -0.5 +0.5 +1.5 +2.5
Send : ---
Preview
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

start sending.
5-17
Sending Functions
Scan Resolution
Select the fineness of scanning resolution. The finer the scanning becomes (the larger the number becomes),
the better the image quality becomes. However, better resolution also results in larger file size (file capacity) and
longer scanning and sending times. The selectable resolution is 200x100dpi Normal, 200x200dpi Fine,
200x400dpi Super Fine, 300x300dpi, 400x400dpi Ultra Fine, or 600x600dpi.
The procedure for adjusting the scanning resolution when sending a scanned image is explained below.
3 Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Scan

Resolution].
Ready to send. Destination 4 Select the resolution.

Place original. 1
Scan Resolution 5 Press [OK].
Select fineness of scanning resolution.
The larger the number, the better the
image resolution.
Place original.
600x600dpi 400x400dpi 300x300dpi

Ultra Fine
Original : ---
Zoom : 100%
Send : ---
200x400dpi 200x200dpi 200x100dpi
Preview Super Fine Fine Normal
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

start sending.
5-18
Sending Functions
Sharpness
Select the sharpness of the image outline.
Item Detail
Sharpen Emphasize the image outline. Make letters and

lines appear sharper.
Unsharpen Blur the image outline. Can weaken a Moire

effect (grids appearing as wavelike patterns
when scanning printed photos).
5
Use the procedure below to set the sharpness when sending scanned images.
3 Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Sharpness].
Ready to send. Destination 4 Press [-3] to [+3] (Unsharpen - Sharpen) to adjust

Place original.
the sharpness.
Sharpness
5 Press [OK].
Place original.
Unsharpen Sharpen
-3 -2 -1 0 +1 +2 +3
Original : ---
Zoom : 100%
Send : ---
Preview
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

start sending.
5-19
Sending Functions
Background Density Adjustment

Lightens the background of the colored original when it is too dark.
NOTE: You cannot adjust the background density if you selected [Black & White] in Color / Grayscale / Black
and White Selection (see page 5-21).
Use the procedure below to set the background density when sending scanned images.
3 Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Background

Density Adj.].
Ready to send. Destination 4 Press [On], and press [1] to [5] (Lighter - Darker) to
Place original.
adjust the background density.
Background Density Adj.
5
Background
Off
Press [OK].
Lighter Darker
Place original. On
1 2 3 4 5
Original : ---
Zoom : 100%
Send : ---
Preview
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

start sending.
5-20
Sending Functions
Color / Grayscale / Black and White Selection

This feature allows you to select the color mode used for scanning when sending images. You can select from
Auto (Color/Gray), Auto (Color/B & W), Full Color, Grayscale or Black & White.
Use the procedure below to select the color mode when sending scanned images.
3 Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Color

Selection].
Ready to send.
Place original.
Destination 4 Select the color mode to be used for scanning. 5
Color Selection 5 Press [OK].
Select scanning color.
Select [Auto Color] to automatically send color originals
in full color and black & white originals in black & white.
Place original.
Auto Color Auto Color

(Color/Gray) (Color/B & W)
Original : ---
Zoom : 100%
Send : ---
Full Color Grayscale Black & White
Preview
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

start sending.
5-21
Sending Functions
Continuous Scan
When the multi-page originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time, the originals can be
scanned in separate batches and then sent as one job. With this function, originals can be scanned one after
another until you press [Scan Finish].
Any of the following settings can be changed during scanning.
• Original Size selection

• 1-sided / 2-sided selection
• Scan density
• Image quality
• Scan resolution
• Color selection
• Sending Size selection
• Zoom
• Border Erase
The procedure for using continuous scanning when sending scanned images is explained below.
2 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Continuous

Scan].
Ready to send. Destination 3 Press [On]. Continuous Scan is selected.

Place original.
Continuous Scan 4 Press [OK].

Scan a large number of originals
in separate batches and then produce
as one job.
Place original. *Settings can be changed during scanning.
Original : ---
Off On
Zoom : 100%
Send : ---
Preview
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
5 Specify the destination.
6 Place the original, and press the Start key.
When the scanning is completed, change the

settings as necessary.
7 Place the next original, and press the Start key.

Scan the remaining originals by the same
procedure.
When you have scanned all the originals, press

[Finish Scan] to start sending.
5-22
Sending Functions
Border Erase
Use Border Erase to remove black shadows that appear around the outside of the original when scanning and
sending originals. The following options can be selected.
Border Erase Sheet

Erases black borders around the single sheet original.
Original Copy
5
Border Erase Book
Erases black borders around the edges and in the
middle of the original such as a thick book. You can
specify the widths individually to erase the borders
around the edges and in the center of the book.
Original Copy
Individual Border Erase

Specify border erase widths individually for all edges.
Original Copy
In each option, the available ranges are as below.
Input units Border Erase Range
Inch models 0 to 2" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric models 0 mm to 50 mm (in 1-mm increments)
5-23
Sending Functions
When scanning a 2-sided original, this allows you to erase the borders on the back of the original. The table
Item Detail
Same as Front Border Erase performed using the same setting as the
Page front page
Use the procedure below to erase borders when sending scanned originals.
3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Border Erase].
Ready to send. Destination 4 Press [Border Erase Sheet] to erase borders for an
Place original.
individual sheet or [Border Erase Book] to erase
Border Erase
Border (0 - 50)
borders for a book.
Off
6 mm
Place original. Border Erase Use [+] or [-] to enter the width in Border or Gutter.
Sheet
# Keys
Same as Press [# Keys] to use the number keys for entry.
Book (0 - 50) Back Page
Gutter
Original : --- Individual 6 mm

Border Erase
Zoom : 100%
Paper : ---
Preview # Keys
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Ready to send. Destination Press [Individual Border Erase] to select the

Place original.
individual border erase.
Border Erase
Use [+] or [-] to enter the border width or press [#

Off (0 - 50)
Top 6 mm
Place original. Border Erase Keys] and enter the width using the numeric keys.
Sheet Bottom 6 mm
Same as
Border Erase
Book
Left 6 mm
Front Page
Back Page
Press [Original Orientation] to select the original
Original : --- Individual Right 6 mm orientation from either [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge
Border Erase Top Edge Top
Zoom
Paper
: 100%
: ---
Left], and press [OK].
Original

For 2-sided originals, press [Back Page] and then
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
press [Same as Front Page] or [Do Not Erase].
5 Press [OK].

start sending.
5-24
Sending Functions
Enter Document Name/File Name

This setting allows you to assign a document name to scanned images. You can specify a default for the
document name.
Use the procedure below to assign names to scanned documents that you are sending.
3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [File Name

Entry].
Ready to send.
Place original.
Destination 4 Press [File Name]. 5
File Name Entry
Add a file name.

Additional information such as Job No.
and Date and Time can also be set.
File Name doc
Additional Info & [ Date and Time ]
Job No. Date and Time
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
5 Enter the document name, and press [OK].
NOTE: Up to 32 characters can be entered for the

document name.
6 Press [Job No.] to enter the job No., and [Date and
Time] to enter the date and time.
7 Press [OK].

start sending.
5-25
Sending Functions
Enter E-mail Subject and Body

When sending E-mail, enter the subject and body of the
E-mail.
Use the procedure below to enter the subject and body

for an E-mail message and then send the E-mail.
2 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [E-mail Subject/

Body].
Ready to send. Destination 3 Press [Subject].

Place original. 1
E-mail Subject/Body
Subject
Place original. Body
Original : ---
Zoom : 100%
Send : ---
Preview
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
4 Enter the subject, and press [OK].

subject.
5 Press [Body].
6 Enter the body and press [OK].

body.
7 Press [OK].

start sending.
5-26
Sending Functions
WSD Scan
WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer.
NOTE: To use WSD Scan, confirm that the computer used for WSD scanning and the machine is network-
connected, and WSD Scan Setup (page 8-76) is set to On in the network settings. For information on operating
the computer, refer to the computer’s help or the operation guide of your software.
Installing Driver Software (for Windows Vista)

1 Click Start and then Network in the computer.
2 Right-click the machine’s icon (Kyocera:Taskalfa

XXX:XXX) and then click Install. 5
NOTE: If the User Account Control window appears,
click Continue.
If the Found New Hardware window appears, click
Cancel.
3 During the installation, double-click the icon shown

on the task bar to display the Driver Software
Installation screen. When Your devices are
ready to use is displayed on the Driver Software
Installation screen, the installation is completed.
Procedure Using this machine



the platen.
3 Press [WSD Scan].
4 Press [From Operation Panel] and press [Next].
5-27
Sending Functions
WSD Scan - Selecting Computer

5 Select the destination computer and press [OK].
Select the destination computer and press [OK].
Press [Reload] to reload the computer list.

Computer Name Reload
pc00010 You can view information on the selected computer
pc000102 by pressing [Detail].
pc000103 1/1
Detail
pc000104
pc000105
Cancel Back OK
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
6 Select the type of originals, file format, etc., as

necessary.
7 Press the Start key. Sending begins and the

software installed on the computer is activated.
Procedure Using WSD Scan from Your Computer

The send screen appears.


the platen.
3 Press [WSD Scan].
4 Press [From Computer] and press [Execute].
5 Use the software installed on the computer to send

the images.
5-28
Sending Functions
Job Finish Notice

Sends a notice by e-mail when a job is completed.
Use the procedure below to specify the Job Finish Notice settings.
3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Job Finish

Notice].
Ready to send. Destination 4 To select the destination from the address book,
Place original.
Job Finish Notice

press [Address Book] on the left of the screen and
then press [Address Book] in the next screen.
5
Off
Address Book Destination Detail Select the destination to be notified, then press
[OK].
Address
Entry
You can view information on the notification

Detail Address Book
destination by pressing [Detail].
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
5 Specify the destination to send the finish notice,

and press [OK].
NOTE: For the procedure to select the destination

from the Address Book, refer Specifying Destination on
page 3-30.
Ready to send. Destination 6 To directly enter the address, press [Address Entry]
Place original.
and then [E-mail Address].
Job Finish Notice
Off
E-mail
Address Book Address
Address
Entry
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
7 Enter the E-mail address, and press [OK].
8 Press [OK].

start sending.
When the sending is completed, the finish notice is

sent to the specified E-mail address.
5-29
Sending Functions
Send and Print

When you send originals, this feature allows you to print a copy of the document being sent.
The procedure for using Send and Print is explained below.
3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Send and Print].
4 Press [On].
5 Press [OK].
6 Specify the destination and press the Start key.

Transmission begins and a copy of the transmitted
document is printed.
Send and Store

When you send originals, this feature allows you to store a copy of the document being sent in a Custom Box.
The procedure for using Send and Store is explained below.
3 Press [Advanced Setup], [ ], and then [Send and

Store].
Ready to send. Destination 4 Press [On].

Place original.
Send and Store 5 Select the Custom Box in which the copy is to be
stored.
Off Custom Box
No. Name Used Area

On
0006 06 BOX001 6%
If a password entry screen for the Custom Box
0007 07 BOX002 4%
appears, enter the password.
0008 08 BOX003 8% 2/2
0009 09 BOX004 4%
You can view information on the selected Custom
0010 10 BOX005 2% Detail
Box by pressing [Detail].
Status
08/08/2009 10:10
6 Press [OK].
7 Specify the destination and press the Start key.

Transmission begins and a copy of the transmitted
document is stored in the specified Custom Box.
5-30
Sending Functions
FTP Encrypted TX
This allows you to encrypt documents when you send them. If you select [On] in this option, you can then select
the encryption method in the basic send screen.
Use the procedure below to scan and send originals as encrypted files.

the platen.
3 Press [Advanced Setup], [ ], and then [FTP

Encrypted TX].
4 Press [On].
5
5 Press [OK].
NOTE: Click Advanced -> Secure Protocols in the

COMMAND CENTER. Be sure that SSL of Secure
Protocol Settings is On and one or more effective
encryption are selected in Clientside Settings. For
details, refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER
Operation Guide.
Color Type
This sets the color type when you send color documents. The table below shows the available settings.
Item Detail
RGB –
sRGB Match the color reproduction space between sRGB compatible systems.
Selecting RGB displays the color profile values set on the machine.
1 Press System Menu key.
2 Press [Send] and [Change] of Color Type.
Send - Color Type

3 Select [RGB] or [sRGB].
Specify the color type to send color images.
4 Press [OK].
RGB
Profile:
RGB FINE 1
sRGB
Cancel OK
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
5-31
Sending Functions
About Color Profiles

The color scanner provides color profiles to adjust color.
NOTE: The color profile data import method varies for every TWAIN/WIA-compliant software. Use the color
profile after carefully reading the manual included with your TWAIN/WIA-complaint software.
Selecting a color profile compatible with this device

1 Select the color profile found in the CD included
with this scanner CD (Product Library) under the
Color Profile folder.
NOTE: Use the indicated color profiles when you

chose RGB in color type.
5-32
6 Document Box
This chapter explains the typical procedure for utilizing Document Box.
• Using a Custom Box ...........................................................................6-2

• Using a Job Box................................................................................6-12
• Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory..................6-20
• Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) .........................6-22
6-1
Document Box
Using a Custom Box
NOTE: In the following explanation, it is assumed that user login administration is enabled. For details on User
Logon privileges, refer to User Privileges on page 3-40.
Creating a New Custom Box

Use the procedure below to create a new box in the user box.
Custom Box. 2 Press [Custom Box] and then [Register/Edit Box].
Search(No.)
1/1 Register/Edit
Box
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
3 Press [Add].
4 Press [Change] for each item, enter the information

and then press [OK].
The table below lists the items to be set.
Item Detail
Box No Enter the box number by pressing [-, +] or number keys.

The box number can be from 0001 to 1000. A Custom Box should
have a unique number.
If you enter 0000, the smallest number available will be
automatically assigned.
Box Name Enter a box name consisting of up to 32 characters.

Refer to the Character Entry Method on Appendix-7 for details on
entering characters.
Box Password User access to the box can be restricted by specifying a password
to protect the box. Entering a password is not mandatory.
Enter the same password of up to 16 characters in both [Password]
and [Confirm Password].
6-2
Document Box
Item Detail
Usage Restriction To preserve the hard disk capacity, the storage capacity for a box
can be restricted.
To enable a capacity restriction enter a value for the storage
capacity of the Custom Box in megabytes by pressing [-, +] or
number keys.
You can enter a limit between 1 and 30,000. (Changes according to
the number of created custom boxes.)
Auto File Deletion Automatically deletes stored documents after a set period of time.
Press [On] to enable automatic deletion and then use [+] and [-] or
the numeric keys to enter the number of days for which documents
are stored.
You can enter any number between 1 and 31 day(s). To disable
automatic file deletion, press [Off].
Overwrite Setting Specifies whether or not old stored documents are overwritten when 6
new documents are stored.
To overwrite old documents, press [Permit].
To retain old documents, press [Prohibit].
Delete after Printed Automatically delete document from the box once printing is
complete. To delete the document, press [On]. To retain the
document, press [Off].
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, "Owner"

and "Permission" are also displayed. Refer to Creating
new Custom Boxes when user login administration is
enabled on page 3-41.
5 Check the details you have entered and then press

[Register]. The Custom Box is created.
Setting the document deletion time
Sets the time when documents stored in a custom box are deleted.
The procedure for using Auto File Deletion Time is explained below.
2 Press [Document Box/Removable Memory], [Next]

of Custom Box, [Next] of Default Setting and then
[Change] of Auto File Deletion Time.
6-3
Document Box
Document Box/Removable Memory - Auto File Deletion Time

3 Set the time at which the document is deleted by
Set the time to automatically delete stored documents. pressing [+], [-]. Press [# Keys] to enter the time
directly using the numeric keys.
Hour Minute
4 Press [OK]. The time for document deletion is set.
21 30
# Keys # Keys
Cancel OK
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Storing Documents
The procedure for storing documents in a custom box is explained below.

the platen.
Custom Box. 3 Press [Custom Box], select the box where the
document will be stored and then press [Store File].
Search(No.)
1/1 Register/Edit
Box
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
4 Select the type of originals, scanning density, etc.,

as necessary.
5 Press the Start key. The original is scanned and the

data is stored in the specified Custom Box.
NOTE: Enter up to 64 characters as the file name.
6-4
Document Box
Printing Documents
The procedure for printing documents in a custom box is explained below.
2 Press [Custom Box], select the box containing the

document you want to print and press [Open].

Box:
3 Select the document you wish to print by checking
the checkbox.
0001 0404200710574501 10/10/2008 09:40 21 MB Search(Name) The document is marked with a checkmark.
0002
0003
0404200710574511
0404200710574521
10/10/2008 09:50
10/10/2008 10:00
21 MB
21 MB
6
1/1
NOTE: To deselect, press the checkbox again and
Detail
remove the checkmark.
Preview
Print Send Join Move/Copy Delete Store File

4 Press [Print].
Close
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
5 Set the paper selection, duplex printing, etc., as

desired.
6 Press the Start key. Printing of the selected

document begins.
6-5
Document Box
Sending Documents
The procedure for sending documents in a custom box is explained below.

document you want to send and press [Open].

Box:
3 Select the document you wish to send by checking
the checkbox.
0002 0404200710574511 10/10/2008 09:50 21 MB
0003 0404200710574521 10/10/2008 10:00 21 MB

1/1
NOTE: You cannot select and send multiple documents.
Detail
To deselect, press the checkbox again and remove the
Preview checkmark.
Close 4 Press [Send].

Status 08/08/2009 10:10
The screen for sending appears.

screen may appear.
5 Set the destination.
NOTE: For more information on selecting destinations,

refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-30.
6 Press the Start key. Sending of the selected

document begins.
6-6
Document Box
Form Overlay from Custom Boxes

This function allows you to retrieve images (image files), overlay them into documents stored in custom boxes
and then print the results.

document you want to overlay the image into and
print, and then press [Open].

Box:
3 Select the document you wish to print by checking 6
the checkbox.
0002 0404200710574511 10/10/2008 09:50 21 MB
0003 0404200710574521 10/10/2008 10:00 21 MB

1/1
Detail
Preview

4 Press [Print].
Close
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
Ready to store in Box. Copies 5 Press [Functions], [Form Overlay], [Select Stored
File Name: 1 Form], and then [Select Form].
Form Overlay
Density (10 㵨 30, 100)
Off
100 %
Place original. Select

NOTE: You can select the form density setting through
Stored Form
4 levels from 10%, 20%, 30% or 100%. Press the [+] or
[-] buttons in Density.
Original : ---
Off
Zoom : 100%
Paper : ---
Select
Preview Form
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
6 In Form Overlay - Select Form, select the image file

to be overlaid onto the document from the
displayed document boxes.
You can only select one image file.
7 Press [OK].
8 Press [OK] again to return to the Functions screen.
9 Press the Start key. Printing begins.
6-7
Document Box
Editing Documents
This function allows you to move or copy documents stored in custom boxes into other boxes or to join multiple
documents together. You can also copy documents to USB memory connected to this machine.
Moving a Document / Copying a Document
The procedure for moving or copying documents is explained below.

document you want to move or copy and press
[Open].

Box:
3 Select the document in the list that you want to
move or copy by pressing the checkbox.
0002 0404200710574511 10/10/2008 09:50 21 MB
0003 0404200710574521 10/10/2008 10:00 21 MB

1/1
Detail
Preview

4 Press [Move/Copy].
Close
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
Custom Box. 5 To move the document, press [Move to Custom

Box].
Move/Copy
Select the required operation and press [Next]. To copy the document, press [Copy to Custom Box]
or [Copy to Removable Mem.].
6 Press [Next].
Copy to Move to Copy to
Custom Box Custom Box Removable Mem.
Cancel Back Next
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
6-8
Document Box
Job Box. 7 To copy or move the document to a custom box,

select the destination box.
Move to Custom Box
Select the destination box and press [Move]. To copy the document to USB memory, select the
Document destination folder and press [Next]. If necessary,
set the saved file size and the file format, etc.
Up
0001 Document1 Administrator 2 MB
0002 Document2 Administrator 3 MB 8 Press [Move] or [Copy] and then press [Yes] in the
0003 Document3 Administrator 3 MB confirmation screen. The selected document is
0004 Document4 Administrator 5 MB Open
moved or copied.
Cancel Back Move
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
NOTE: If the box to which the document is to be

moved or copied is protected by a password, enter the
correct password.
Joining Documents
6
The procedure for joining documents in a custom box is explained below.
NOTE: You can only join a document to other documents in the same custom box. If necessary, move the
documents to be joined beforehand.

documents you want to join and press [Open].

Box:
3 Select the documents in the list that you wish to join
by pressing the checkbox.
0002 0404200710574511 10/10/2008 09:50 21 MB
0003 0404200710574521 10/10/2008 10:00 21 MB You can join up to 10 documents.

1/1
Detail
Preview NOTE: To deselect, press the checkbox again and

Close
Status 08/08/2009 10:10 4 Press [Join].
6-9
Document Box
Join
5 Arrange the documents into the order in which they
Confirm the order of documents to combine.
are to be joined.
File Name Date and Time Size Highlight the document you want to rearrange and
2008101010574501 10/10/2008 09:40 21 MB press [Up] or [Down] to move it to the correct place
2008101010574511 10/10/2008 09:50 21 MB
in the sequence.
2008101010574521 10/10/2008 10:10 21 MB 1/1
Up
6 Press [Next].
Down
Cancel Next
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
7 Press [File Name], enter the file name for the joined
document and press [OK].
NOTE: Enter up to 32 characters as the file name.
8 Press [Join] and then press [Yes] in the

confirmation screen. The documents are joined.
NOTE: After joining, the original documents are left

unchanged. Delete the documents if they are no longer
needed.
6-10
Document Box
Deleting Documents
The procedure for deleting documents in a custom box is explained below.

document you want to delete and press [Open].

Box:
3 Select the document you wish to delete by
checking the checkbox.
0002
0003
0404200710574511
0404200710574521
10/10/2008 09:50
10/10/2008 10:00
21 MB
21 MB
6
1/1
NOTE: [Delete] is disabled until a document is
Detail
selected.
Preview To deselect, press the checkbox again and remove the
Print Send Join Move/Copy Delete Store File checkmark.
Close
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

4 Press [Delete]. The delete confirmation screen
appears.
5 Press [Yes]. The document is deleted.
6-11
Document Box
Using a Job Box
Private Print/Stored Job Box

Private Print/Stored Job Box stores the print data which is printed by using the printer driver as a Private Print/
Stored Job.
Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on how to print a job as Private Print or Stored Job using the printer driver.
Printing a Document in Private Print/Stored Job Box
You can print documents stored in a Private Print/Stored Job box.
Use the procedure below to print a document.
2 Press [Job Box].
3 Select [Private Print/Stored Job] and press [Open].
Job Box. 4 Select the creator of the document to print and

press [Open].
Private Print/Stored Job
User Name Files
1 User 5
2 User 2
3 User 1 1/2
4 User 1
5 User 1
Open
Close
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
Job Box. 5 Select the document and press [Print].
User:
1File 10/10/2008 09:40 21 MB
2File 10/10/2008 09:45 30 MB
3File 10/10/2008 09:50 36 MB 1/1
Detail
4File 10/10/2008 09:55 21 MB
5File 10/10/2008 10:00 30 MB
Print Delete
Close
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
6 If the document is protected by a password, enter

the password using the numeric keys.
7 Specify the number of copies to print as desired.
8 Press [Start Print] to start printing.
Upon completion of printing, the Private Print job is

automatically deleted.
6-12
Document Box
Deleting a Document
You can delete documents stored in a Private Print/Stored Job box.
Use the procedure below to delete a document.
2 Press [Job Box].
3 Select [Private Print/Stored Job] and press [Open].
Job Box. 4 Select the creator of the document and press

[Open].
Private Print/Stored Job
User Name Files
1 User 5
2 User 2
3 User
4 User
1
1
1/2
6
5 User 1
Open
Close
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
Job Box. 5 To delete the document, select the document and

press [Delete].
User:

When the delete confirmation screen appears,
1File 10/10/2008 09:40 21 MB
press [Yes].
2File 10/10/2008 09:45 30 MB
3File 10/10/2008 09:50 36 MB 1/1

If the document is protected by a password, enter
Detail
4File 10/10/2008 09:55 21 MB
the password using the numeric keys and the
5File 10/10/2008 10:00 30 MB
document is deleted.
Print Delete
Close
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Print Box

Quick Copy/Proof and Hold box stores the print data which is printed by using the printer driver as a Quick Copy
or Proof and Hold Print job.
Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on how to print a job as Quick Copy or Proof and Hold Print job using the
printer driver.
Setting the Number of Stored Jobs
To maintain free space on the hard disk, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs.
Use the procedure below to set the number of stored jobs.

of Job Box, then [Change] of Quick Copy Job
Retention.
6-13
Document Box
Document Box/Removable Memory - Quick Copy Job Retention 3 Press [+] or [–] to enter the maximum number of
Set the maximum number of quick copy/proof print jobs to retain. stored jobs. You can enter any number between 0
*Set this number to 0 to not retain any jobs. and 50.
You can also enter the number using the numeric

(0 - 50)
keys.
32 job(s)
NOTE: If you enter a value of 0 (zero), you cannot use

the Repeat Copy function.
Cancel OK
Status 10/10/2008 10:10

4 Press [OK]. The maximum number of stored jobs is
set.
Printing a Document
You can print documents stored in the Quick Copy/Proof and Hold box.
2 Press [Job Box].
3 Select [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold] and press

[Open].

[Open].
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold
User Name Files
1 User 5
2 User 2
3 User 1 1/2
4 User 1
5 User 1
Open
Close
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
Job Box. 5 Select the document to print, and press [Print].
User:
1File 10/10/2008 09:40 21 MB
2File 10/10/2008 09:45 30 MB
3File 10/10/2008 09:50 36 MB 1/1
Detail
4File 10/10/2008 09:55 21 MB
5File 10/10/2008 10:00 30 MB
Print Delete
Close
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
6 Specify the number of prints as desired.
6-14
Document Box
Deleting a Document
You can delete documents stored in the Quick Copy/Proof and Hold box.
Use the procedure below to delete a document.
2 Press [Job Box], [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold], then

[Open].

[Open].
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold
User Name Files
1 User 5
2 User 2
3 User 1 1/2
4 User
5 User
1
1
6
Open
Close
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
Job Box. 4 Select the document to delete and press [Delete].
User: The delete confirmation screen appears.

1File 10/10/2008 09:40 21 MB
2File 10/10/2008 09:45 30 MB
3File 10/10/2008 09:50 36 MB 1/1
Detail
4File 10/10/2008 09:55 21 MB
5File 10/10/2008 10:00 30 MB
Print Delete
Close
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
5 Press [Yes]. The document is deleted.
Repeat Copy Box
Setting the Number of Stored Jobs
To maintain free space on the hard disk, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs.
Use the procedure below to specify the maximum number of stored jobs.

of Job Box, [Change] of Repeat Copy Job
Retention.
6-15
Document Box
Document Box/Removable Memory - Repeat Copy Job Retention

3 Use the [+] and [–] keys or the numeric keys to
Set the maximum number of repeat copy jobs to retain. enter the maximum number of stored jobs.
*Set this number to 0 to not retain any jobs.
You can enter any number between 0 and 50.
(0 - 50)
32 job(s)
NOTE: If you enter a value of 0 (zero), no jobs are
stored.
4 Press [OK]. The maximum number of stored jobs is

Cancel OK
set.
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Printing a Document
You can print the documents stored in the Repeat Copy box.
2 Press [Job Box].
3 Select [Repeat Copy] box, and press [Open].
Job Box.
4 Select the document to print and press [Print].
Repeat Copy
Name Date and Time Size
1010200800101002 10/10/2008 10:00 21 MB
1/1
Detail
Print Delete
Close
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
5 If the document is protected by a password, enter

the password using the numeric keys.
The Repeat Copy box job will be deleted when the

main power switch is turned off.
6-16
Document Box
Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents
This setting specifies that documents, such as Private Printing, Quick Copying, or Proof and Hold Printing, saved
temporarily in the job box are automatically deleted after they have been saved for a set time.
Item Detail
Off Temporary documents are not automatically

deleted. However, the temporary documents will
be deleted when the power is turned off.
1 hour Documents are deleted after 1 hour.
4 hours Documents are deleted after 4 hours.
1 day Documents are deleted after 1 day.

6
1 week Documents are deleted after 1 week.
Use the procedure below to set automatic deletion for temporary documents.
2 Press [Document Box/Removable Memory], [Next] of Job Box, then [Change] of Deletion of Job Retention.
3 Select the time for automatic deletion.
To deactivate automatic deletion, press [Off].
4 Press [OK].
NOTE: This function is valid for documents saved after the function is set. Regardless of this function setting,
temporary documents are deleted when the main power switch is turned off.
Form for Form Overlay Box
Storing a Form
You can store forms to be used for the form overlay in the Form for Form Overlay box. You can store a 1-page
form.
Use the procedure below to store a form.
2 Place the original in the document processor or on

the platen.
3 Press [Job Box].
6-17
Document Box
Job Box. 4 Select [Form for Form Overlay] and press [Open].
Name Files
Private Print/Stored Job 21
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold 21
Repeat Copy 21
Form for Form Overlay 21
Open
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

5 Press [Store File].
1010200809530900 10/10/2008 09:00 21 MB
1010200800530910 10/10/2008 09:10 30 MB
1010200800530920 10/10/2008 09:20 30 MB

1/1
Detail
Print Delete Store File
Close
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
6 If necessary, select the image quality of original,

scanning density, etc. before the original is
scanned.
7 Press the Start key. The original is scanned and

stored in the Form for Form Overlay box.
NOTE: For information on using image overlays with a

stored form, see Form Overlay on page 4-22 and Form
Overlay from Custom Boxes on page 6-7.
Deleting a Form Stored
You can delete the form stored in the Form for Form Overlay box.
Use the procedure below to delete a form.
2 Press [Job Box].
3 Select [Form for Form Overlay] and press [Open].
6-18
Document Box

4 Select the form to delete and press [Delete].
Name Date and Time Size The delete confirmation screen appears.
1010200809530900 10/10/2008 09:00 21 MB
1010200800530910 10/10/2008 09:10 30 MB
1010200800530920 10/10/2008 09:20 30 MB

1/1
Detail
Print Delete Store File
Close
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
5 Press [Yes]. The form is deleted.
6-19
Document Box
Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory

Plugging USB memory directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the
USB memory without having to use a computer.
Limitations
• The following file types can be printed:
• PDF file (Version 1.5)
• TIFF file (TIFF V6/TTN2 format)
• JPEG file
• XPS file
• Encrypted PDF file
• PDF files you wish to print should have an extension (.pdf).
• Files to be printed should be saved no further down than the top 3 folder levels.
• Use USB memory properly formatted by this machine.
• Plug the USB memory directly into the USB memory slot (A1). We do not guarantee that USB memory
printing is error free if a USB hub is used.
Printing
Print documents stored in the removable USB memory.
1 Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot

(A1).
IMPORTANT: Use USB memory formatted by this

machine. If a USB memory formatted by any other
device is used, The removable memory is not
formatted. may appear. To format a USB memory,
press [Format] and follow the instructions on the screen.
2 When the machine reads the USB memory,

Removable Memory is recognized. Displaying files.
may appear. Press [Yes] to display the removable
memory screen.
NOTE: If the message does not appear, press the

Document Box key and then [Removable Memory].
3 Select the folder containing the file to be printed

and press [Open].
The machine will display documents in the top 3

folder levels, including the root folder.
NOTE: To return to a higher level folder, press [Up].
6-20
Document Box
Removable Memory. 4 Select the file to be printed and press [Print].
Removable Memory

Up
1 Document 10/10/2008 09:30 1 MB
2 Document 10/10/2008 09:40 3 MB
3 Document 10/10/2008 09:50 4 MB 001/999
Memory
4 Document 10/10/2008 10:00 1 MB Information
5 Document 10/10/2008 10:05 2 MB Remove

Memory
Print Delete Detail Open Store File
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
5 Change the number of copies, duplex printing, etc.

as desired.
6 Press the Start key. Printing of the selected file

begins.
6
Removing USB Memory
Remove the USB memory.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to follow the proper procedure to avoid damaging the data or USB memory.
2 Press [Removable Memory].
Removable Memory. 3 Press [Remove Memory].
Removable Memory

Up
1 Document 10/10/2008 09:30 1 MB
2 Document 10/10/2008 09:40 3 MB
3 Document 10/10/2008 09:50 4 MB 001/999
Memory

Memory
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
4 Remove the USB memory after Removable

Memory can be safely removed. is displayed.
6-21
Document Box
Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB)

This function allows you to store scanned image files in USB memory connected to the machine. You can store
files in PDF, TIFF, JPEG, XPS or high-compression PDF format.
NOTE: The maximum number of the storable files is 100.
Storing Documents
The procedure for storing documents in removable USB memory is explained below.
1 Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot

(A1).
IMPORTANT: Use only USB memory that has been

formatted on this machine. If USB memory formatted on
another device is used, The removable memory is not
formatted message may appear. To format the USB
memory, press [Format].
2 When the machine reads the USB memory,

Removable Memory is recognized. Displaying files.
may appear. Press [Yes] to display the removable
memory screen.
NOTE: If the message does not appear, press the

Document Box key and then [Removable Memory].
3 Select the folder where the file will be stored and

press [Open].
The machine will display the top 3 folder levels,

including the root folder.
Removable Memory. 4 Press [Store File].
Removable Memory

Up
1 Document 10/10/2008 09:30 1 MB
2 Document 10/10/2008 09:40 3 MB
3 Document 10/10/2008 09:50 4 MB 001/999
Memory

Memory
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
5 Set the type of original, file format, etc., as desired.
6 Press the Start key. The original is scanned and the

data is stored in the USB memory.
6-22
7 Status / Job Cancel
This chapter explains how to check the status and history of jobs and cancel the jobs being
processed or waiting to be printed.
This chapter also explains how to check the remaining amount of toner and paper and the
status of devices, and how to cancel the fax communication.
• Checking Job Status ...........................................................................7-2

• Checking Job History ..........................................................................7-9
• Sending the Log History....................................................................7-11
• Pause and Resumption of Jobs ........................................................7-13
• Canceling of Jobs .............................................................................7-13
• Priority Override for Waiting Jobs .....................................................7-14
• Reordering Print Jobs .......................................................................7-14
• Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper......................7-15
• Device/Communication .....................................................................7-16
7-1
Status / Job Cancel
Checking Job Status

Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed.
Available Status Screens

The processing and waiting statuses of jobs are displayed as a list on the touch panel in four different screens
- Printing Jobs, Sending Jobs, Sending Jobs - Timer waiting, and Storing Jobs. The following job statuses are
available.
Screen Job statuses to be displayed
Printing Jobs • Copy

• Printer
• FAX reception
• i-FAX reception
• E-mail reception
• Printing from Document Box
• Job Report /List
• Printing data from removable memory
Sending Jobs • FAX transmission
• i-FAX transmission
• PC (SMB/FTP) transmission
• E-mail
• Application
• Multiple destination
• Sending Job FAX using Delayed transmission
Storing Jobs • Scan
• FAX
• i-FAX
• Printer
• Join Box Document
• Copy Box Document
Displaying Status Screens

Use the procedure below to display the Status screen.
1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key.
Status 2 The Status screen appears. Press either of

Status Scheduled Job Log
[Printing Jobs], [Sending Jobs], or [Storing Jobs] to
Job Type All
check the status.
Job No. Accepted Time Type Job Name User Name Status
438 14:47 [email protected] InProcess

To check the scheduled transmission job, press
1/1
[Sending Jobs] and then [Scheduled Job].
For an explanation of the screen, refer to Details of

the Status Screens on page 7-3.
Cancel Detail
Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/ Paper/Supplies

Communication
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
7-2
Status / Job Cancel
Details of the Status Screens
The items and keys displayed on the status screens are as follows.
For information on how to display the Status screen, see Displaying Status Screens on page 7-2.
Printing Jobs Status Screen

Status
Status Log
Job Type All 7

Job No. End Date Type Job Name User Name Result
000001 10/10 09:50 doc10102008095050 AAAAA InProcess
000002 10/10 09:55 doc10102008095510 AAAAA Waiting
000003 10/10 10:00 doc10102008091000 AAAAA Waiting 1/1
1 2 3 4 5 6
8 9 10 11 12
Pause All Cancel Priority Move Up Detail
Print Jobs Override

Communication
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
The table below lists the items displayed in the Printing Jobs Status screen.
7
No. Item / Key Detail
1 Job No. Acceptance No. of job
2 Accepted Time Accepted Time of job
3 Type Icons that indicate the job type
Copy job
Printer job
FAX reception
i-FAX reception
E-mail reception
Job from Document Box
Report / List
Data from Removable Memory
4 Job Name Job Name or file name
5 User Name User Name for the executed job
6 Status Status of job

InProcess: The status before starting to print.
Printing: Printing
Waiting: Print Waiting
Pause: Pausing print job or error
Canceling: Canceling the job
7-3
Status / Job Cancel
7 [ ] of Job Type Sorts by specific type of job
8 [Pause All Print Jobs] Pauses all the printing jobs. By pressing this key again, the printing
jobs will be resumed.
9 [Cancel] Select the job to be canceled from the list, and press this key.
10 [Priority Override] Select the job to be overridden, and press this key.
(Refer to Priority Override for Waiting Jobs on page 7-14)
11 [Move Up] In the list, select the job that you want to move up the job queue and
press this key.
(Refer to Reordering Print Jobs on page 7-14)
12 [Detail] Select the job for displaying detailed information from the list, and
press this key. (Refer to Checking the Detailed Information of
Histories on page 7-10)
7-4
Status / Job Cancel
Sending Jobs Status screen

Status
Job Type All 7

438 14:47 [email protected] InProcess
1 2 3 4 5 6
1/1
8 9
Cancel Detail

Communication
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
The table below lists the items displayed in the Sending Jobs Status screen.
2 Accepted Time Accepted Time of job 7

Sending Job FAX
Sending Job i-FAX
Sending Job PC (SMB/FTP)
Sending Job E-mail
Sending Job Application
Sending Job Multiple
4 Destination Destination (Either destination name, FAX number, E-mail address,

or server name)

InProcess: The status before starting sending such as during
scanning originals
Sending: Sending
Waiting: Sending Waiting
Pause: Pausing the job
7 [ ] of Job Type Only selected type of jobs is displayed.
8 [Cancel] Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this key.
9 [Detail] Select the job whose detailed information you want to display from
the list, and press this key. (Refer to Checking the Detailed
Information of Histories on page 7-10)
7-5
Status / Job Cancel
Storing Jobs Status screen

Status
Status Log
Job Type All 7

438 14:47 doc20070225144758 InProcess
1 2 3 4 5 6
1/1
8 9
Cancel Detail

Communication
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
The table below lists the items displayed in the Storing Jobs Status screen.
No. Display / Key Details
2 Accepted Time Accepted Time of job
Storing Job Scan
Storing Job Printer
Storing Job FAX
Storing Job i-FAX
Join Box Document
Copy Box Document
4 Job Name Job name or file name is displayed.

InProcess: The status before starting to save such as during
scanning originals
Storing: Storing Data
Pause: Pausing the job
7 [ ] of Job Type Only selected type of jobs is displayed.
8 [Cancel] Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this key.
9 [Detail] Select the job whose detailed information you want to display from
the list, and press this key. (Refer to Checking the Detailed
Information of Histories on page 7-10)
7-6
Status / Job Cancel
Checking the Detailed Information of Jobs

Check the detailed information of each job.
Use the procedure below to check a job's information.
2 Press [Printing Jobs], [Sending Jobs], or [Storing

Jobs].
To check the scheduled transmission, press

[Sending Jobs] and then [Scheduled Job].
Status 3 Select the job whose details you wish to check from
the list, and press [Detail].
Job Type All
Job No.
438
Accepted Time Type
14:47
Job Name
[email protected]
User Name Status
InProcess
Detailed information of the selected job is
displayed.
1/1
7
Cancel Detail

Communication
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Detail Job No.: 000080

Use [ ] or [ ] to see the next or previous page of
Job No.: Status/Destination:
Detail
information.
000080 Processing
Job Type: Destination:
Sending Job - E-mail ABCDE
User Name:
User1
Job Name:
doc20070404115151
Accepted Time:
10:10:10 1/2
Close
Status 10/10/2008 10:10

In Sending Jobs, you can check the destination by
Job No.: Status/Destination:
Detail
pressing [Detail] in Status/Destination.
000080 Processing
Job Type: Destination:
Sending Job - E-mail ABCDE
User Name:
User1
Job Name:
doc20070404115151
Accepted Time:
10:10:10 1/2
Close
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
7-7
Status / Job Cancel

Status/Destination is displayed when address is
selected. Press [Detail] to display the list.
Job Type All
Type Destination Status

Press [ ] or [ ], select a destination and press
doc20070404131415 Sending [Detail]. Information on the selected job is displayed for
User01 Waiting checking.
1/2
4 To exit from the detailed information, press [Close].
Detail
Close
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
7-8
Status / Job Cancel
Checking Job History

Check the history of completed jobs.
NOTE: Job history is also available by COMMAND CENTER or KMnet Viewer from the computer.
Available Job History Screens

The job histories are displayed separately in three screens - Printing Jobs, Sending Jobs, and Storing Jobs. The
following job histories are available.
Screen Job histories to be displayed
Printing Jobs • Copy

• Printer
• FAX reception
• i-FAX reception
• E-mail reception
• Printing from Document Box 7
• Job Report / List
• Printing data from removable memory
Sending Jobs • FAX

• i-FAX
• PC (SMB/FTP)
• E-mail
• Application
• Multiple destination
Storing Jobs • Scan

• FAX
• i-FAX
• Printer
• Join Box Document
• Copy Box Document
Displaying Job History Screen

The procedure for displaying Job History Screen is explained below.
Status 2 Press either of [Printing Jobs], [Sending Jobs], or

Status Log
[Storing Jobs] to check the log, and press [Log].
Job Type All
000080 01/25 14:14 doc20070225141427 Completed
000081 01/25 14:22 doc20070225142253 Completed
000082 01/25 14:23 doc20070225142310 Completed 001/001
000083 01/25 14:24 doc20070225142458 Error
000084 01/25 14:30 doc20070225143034 Completed
Detail

Communication
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
7-9
Status / Job Cancel
Checking the Detailed Information of Histories

Check the detailed information of each history.
Display of the detailed information of Job Finish history
Use the procedure below to check the job finish history.
2 Press [Printing Jobs], [Sending Jobs] or [Storing

Jobs] and then [Log].
Status 3 Select the job to check details from the list, and
Status Log
press [Detail].
Job Type All
Job No. End Date
000080 01/25 14:14

Type Job Name
doc20070225141427
User Name Result
Completed
Detailed information of the selected job is
000081 01/25 14:22 doc20070225142253 Completed
displayed.
000082 01/25 14:23 doc20070225142310 Completed 001/001
NOTE: To check the information of the next/previous

000083 01/25 14:24 doc20070225142458 Error
000084 01/25 14:30 doc20070225143034 Completed

page, press [ ] or [ ].
Detail

Communication
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
4 To exit from the detailed information, press [Close].
7-10
Status / Job Cancel
Sending the Log History

You can send the log history by e-mail. You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically
whenever a set number of jobs is reached.
Setting the Destination

Set the destination to which log histories are sent.
Use the procedure below to set the destination.
2 Press [Report], [Next] of Sending Log History and

then [Change] of Destination.
3 To enter a new e-mail address, press [E-mail

Address Entry].
Press [E-mail Address], enter the destination e-

mail address and then press [OK]. 7
4 To set an address from the address book, press [E-
mail Address Book].
Press [Address Book]. Select the destination from

the address book and press [OK].
NOTE: For information on specifying destinations,

refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-30.
The selected e-mail addresses is displayed.
NOTE: You can view information on the selected

destinations by pressing [Detail].
5 Press [OK].
Automatic Log History Transmission

This function automatically sends the log history to the specified destinations whenever a set number of jobs
has been logged.
Use the procedure below to set automatic log history transmission.

then [Change] of Auto Sending.
7-11
Status / Job Cancel
Report - Auto Sending

3 Press [On] and enter the number of jobs in the log
Send job log history to the specified destination after a set number of jobs history print by using [+]/[-] or the numeric keys.
have been logged.
You can enter any number between 1 and 1500.
Off
Jobs
4 Press [OK].
(1 - 1500)
On
100
Cancel OK
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Manual Log History Transmission

You can also send the log history to the specified destinations manually.
Use the procedure below to send the log history manually.

then [Execute] of Send Log History.
When the confirmation screen appears, press

[Yes]. The log history is sent.
Setting E-mail Subject

Set the subject automatically entered when sending log histories by e-mail.
Use the procedure below to set the subject.

then [Change] of Job Log Subject.
3 Enter an e-mail subject not more than 60

characters.

4 Check that the entry is correct and press [OK].
7-12
Status / Job Cancel
Pause and Resumption of Jobs

Pause /resume all printing jobs in printing/waiting.
The procedure for pausing and resuming jobs is explained below.
Status 2 Press [Pause All Print Jobs] on the Printing Jobs

Status Log
Status screen. Printing is paused.
Job Type All

Print Jobs Override

Communication
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
3 When resuming the printing of jobs that have been 7

paused, press [Resume All Print Jobs].
Canceling of Jobs
For more information on canceling jobs, refer to the Canceling Jobs on page 3-42.
7-13
Status / Job Cancel
Priority Override for Waiting Jobs

Priority Override function suspends the current job and prints the job in waiting first.
The procedure for using Priority Override is explained below.
2 Press [Printing Jobs].
Status 3 Select the job to be given priority, and press

Status Log
[Priority Override].
Job Type All

Print Jobs Override

Communication
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
4 Press [Yes] in the confirmation screen. The current

job in printing is suspended, and the job for
override printing starts.
5 When the Priority Override is completed, the

printing job that has been suspended will be
resumed.
Reordering Print Jobs

This function allows you to select a queued print job and raise its output priority.
The procedure for reordering print jobs is explained below.
1 Press the Status/Cancel key.
2 Press the [Printing Jobs].
Status 3 Select the job to be assigned a higher priority and

Status Log
press [Move Up].
Job Type All
The priority of the selected job is increased by 1 .

To further raise the job's priority, press [Move Up]
again. Each time you press [Move Up], the priority
increases by 1.

Print Jobs Override

Communication
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
7-14
Status / Job Cancel
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper

Check the remaining amount of toner, paper, and staples on the touch panel.
Use the procedure below to check the remaining amounts.
Status 2 Press [Paper/Supplies].Check the remaining

amount of toner and the status of a waste toner box
in Toner Information, and the remaining amount of
paper in each paper source in Paper.
Toner Information Paper Others

Toner Status Size Type Status Type Status
Black (K) 100% A3 Plain 30% Staple A OK
Cyan (C) 100% A3 Plain 30%
Magenta (M) 100% A4 Plain 30%
Yellow (Y) 100% A4 Plain 30%
Waste Toner OK A4 Plain 0%

Communication
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
The items you can check are described below. 7

Remaining amount of toner
You can check the remaining amount of each color toner as one of 11 levels from 100 to 0%.
Status of waste toner box
You can check the status of waste toner box.
Paper
You can check the size, orientation, type, and remaining amount of paper in each paper source.The remaining
amount of paper is shown by 11 levels from 100 to 0%, however, the paper in the multi purpose tray is shown
by 2 levels as 100% and 0%.
Others
You can check the status of staples and punch waste box.
NOTE: If the optional document finisher or 3,000 sheet document finisher and punch unit are installed, the
Others section provides the status of the punch waste box and whether or not staples are available.
7-15
Status / Job Cancel
Device/Communication
Configure the devices/lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status. You can also control
devices depending on their status.
Displaying Device/Communication Screen

The procedure for using the Device/Communication screen is explained below.
2 Press [Device/Communication].
The screen to check the status or configure the

devices is displayed.
Check of Device Status

Status
Scanner Hard Disk

Ready. Overwriting...
Printer
Ready.
Removable Memory 䊜䊝䊥䉦䊷䊄

Not connected.
Format Remove
FAX Port 1 FAX Port 2

Dialing... Receiving...
Line Off Manual RX Line Off
FAX Log i-FAX Check New FAX

Communication
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
The items you can check are described below.
Scanner
The status of an original scanning in the document processor (optional) or the error information (paper jam,
opened cover, etc.) is displayed.
Printer
Error information such as paper jam, out of toner, or out of paper, and status such as waiting or printing are
displayed.
Hard Disk
The information such as formatting, overwriting for erasure, and error occurrence is displayed.
7-16
Status / Job Cancel
Configuring the Devices

Status
Scanner Hard Disk

Ready. Overwriting...
Printer
Ready.

Not connected.
Format Remove


Communication
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Detailed information on controlling devices is given below.
Removable Memory (USB Memory)

• The usage and capacity of the external media connected to this machine are displayed.
• Press [Format] to format external media. 7
• Press [Remove] to safely remove the external media. For details, refer to Removing the USB Memory in the
next section.
FAX Port 1, FAX Port 2

• The information such as sending/receiving and dialing is displayed.
• Press [Line Off] to cancel a fax in sending/receiving. For details, refer to Canceling FAX Communication on
page 7-18 in the section afterwards.
• Press [Manual RX] to start a fax. Use this function when you want to talk to the sender before receiving the
fax originals. For details, refer to the Operation Guide of FAX kit.
• Press [Log] to display the fax transmission history. For details, refer to the Operation Guide of FAX kit.
Removing the USB Memory

There is a way to remove the USB memory safely.
Use the procedure below to remove the USB memory.
Status 2 Press [Device/Communication] > [Remove] in

Scanner
Ready.
Hard Disk
Overwriting...
Removable Memory.
Printer
Ready.

Not connected.
Format Remove


Communication
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
3 When Removable memory can be safely removed.

is displayed, remove the USB memory.
7-17
Status / Job Cancel
Canceling FAX Communication

Cancel fax communication.
Use the procedure below to cancel the fax communication.
Status 2 Press [Device/Communication] > [Line Off] in FAX

Scanner
Ready.
Hard Disk
Overwriting...
Port 1 or FAX Port 2.
Printer
Ready.

Not connected.
Format Remove


Communication
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
3 Press [Yes] in the confirmation screen. The line is

disconnected, and the fax communication is
canceled.
7-18
8 Default Setting (System Menu)
This chapter explains how to configure various settings of the machine using the menus on
the operation panel.
• Common Settings ...............................................................................8-2

• Copy Settings....................................................................................8-27
• Sending Settings...............................................................................8-30
• Document Box Settings ....................................................................8-33
• Printer Settings .................................................................................8-35
• Printing Reports/Sending Notice.......................................................8-41
• Adjustment/Maintenance ..................................................................8-44
• Date/Timer ........................................................................................8-55
• Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One Touch Keys)...........8-60
• Internet Browser Setup .....................................................................8-67
• Applications.......................................................................................8-69
• System Initialization ..........................................................................8-72
• Restarting the System.......................................................................8-72
• Network Setup ..................................................................................8-73
• Network Setup ..................................................................................8-77
• Interface Block Setting ......................................................................8-80
• Security Level (Security Level setting)..............................................8-81
• Document Guard Setting ..................................................................8-81
• Optional Functions ............................................................................8-83
• Accessibility Display (Enlarged Touch Panel Display) ......................8-84
8-1
Default Setting (System Menu)
Common Settings
Common settings include;
• Switching the Language for Display [Language] …8-2

• Default Screen …8-2
• Sound …8-3
• Original/Paper Settings …8-4
• Switching Unit of Measurement …8-11
• Error Handling …8-12
• Paper Output …8-14
• Orientation Confirmation …8-15
• Settings for Color Toner Empty Action …8-15
• Function Defaults …8-15
administrator privileges.
Switching the Language for Display [Language]

Select the language displayed on the touch panel.
Use the procedure below to select the language.
2 Press [Common Settings] and then [Change] of Language.
3 Press the key for the language you want to use.
4 Press [OK].
The touch panel language will be changed.
Default Screen
Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen). The options are as follows.
The table below lists the available screens.
Item Description
Copy The Copy screen (the screen shown when the Copy key is pressed)
appears.
Send The Send screen (the screen shown when the Send key is pressed)
appears.
Status The Status/Job Cancel screen (the screen shown when the Status/
Job Cancel key is pressed) appears.
8-2
Item Description
Document Box The Document Box screen (the screen shown when the Document
Box key is pressed) appears.
Program The Program screen (the screen shown when the Program key is
pressed) appears.
Application The Application selecting screen (the screen shown when the
Application key is pressed) appears.
Accessibility Copy The Accessibility Copy screen (the screen shown when the
Accessibility Display key is pressed in the Copy screen) appears.
Accessibility Send The Accessibility Send screen (the screen shown when the
Accessibility Display key is pressed in the Send screen) appears.
Application name Each application is activated and the initial screen appears.
(Maximum 6 applications)
For example, Internet Browser
Use the procedure below to select the default startup screen.
2 Press [Common Settings] and then [Change] of Default Screen.

8
3 Select the screen to be displayed as the default screen.
NOTE: The application names appear if the applications are installed and officially licensed on.
4 Press [OK].
Sound
Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations.
The table below lists the buzzer types and their settings and details.
Item Value Description
Volume 0 (Mute), 1 (Minimum) to Set the buzzer volume level.

5 (Maximum)
Key Confirmation Off, On Emit a sound when the control panel

and touch panel keys are pressed.
Job Finish Off, On Emit a sound when a print job is

normally completed.
Ready Off, On Emit a sound when the warm-up is

completed.
Warning Off, On Emit a sound when errors occur.
8-3
Use the procedure below to set the sound options.
2 Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Sound and then [Next] of Buzzer.
3 Press [Change] of Volume, Key Confirmation, Job Finish, Ready, or Warning.
4 Select the buzzer volume level, or other sound options.
Original/Paper Settings
Register additional types and sizes of originals and paper.
Custom Original Size Setup
Set up frequently-used custom original sizes. The custom size options are displayed on the screen to select
original size. The dimensions available are as follows.
The table below lists the sizes that can be registered.
Input units Dimensions
Inch models X: 2 to 17" (in 0.01" increments)

Y: 2 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric models X: 50 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Y: 50 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Up to four custom original sizes can be added. Use the procedure below to set a custom original size.
2 Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Next] of Custom Original Size.
3 Press [Change] of any one of Custom 1 to Custom 4, on which you wish to register the size.
4 Press [On], and then press [+],[–] or numeric keys to enter X(horizontal) and Y (vertical) dimensions.
5 Press [OK].
6 Move to the copy, send, or document box screen and press the Reset key.
Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print
Set up a maximum of four frequently-used custom paper sizes. The custom size options are displayed on the
screen to select paper set in the multi purpose tray.
The table below lists the sizes that can be registered.
Input units Dimensions
Inch models H: 5.83 to 17" (in 0.01" increments)

V: 3.86 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric models H: 148 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments)

V: 98 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)
8-4
Up to four custom paper sizes can be added.
Select media type for each paper size.
Media type: Plain, Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color,
Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, Envelope, Coated, High Quality, Custom 1-8
NOTE: Refer to Paper Weight on page 8-7 for Custom 1-8 for media type.
Use the procedure below to select a custom paper size and media type.
2 Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Next] of Custom Paper Size.
3 Press [Change] of any one of Custom 1 to Custom 4, on which you want to register the size.
4 Press [On], and then press [+],[–] or numeric keys to enter X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) dimensions.
5 Press [Media Type] to select the type of paper and press [OK] if necessary.
6 Press [OK].
7 Move to the copy or document box screen and press the Reset key.
Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Cassettes

8
Select paper size and media type for Cassette 1, 2 and optional paper feeders (Cassette 3 and 4).
Item Description
Paper Auto Automatically detect paper size. Select Metric or Inch for paper size.
Size
Standard Available options are as follows:
Sizes 1 Inch models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II
Metric models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Folio
Standard Select a standard size except that selected in Standard Sizes 1.

Sizes 2 Inch models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B5, B5-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R
Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 8.5×13.5", Oficio
II, 8K, 16K, 16K-R
Media Type Plain (105 g/m2 or less), Rough*, Vellum (64 g/m2 or less), Recycled,
Preprint**, Bond*, Color, Prepunched**, Letterhead**,
Thick (106 g/m2 and more)*, High Quality, Custom 1-8*
* To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Paper Weight on page 8-7. When the paper weight
settings shown below are selected, the media indicated for each setting cannot be selected.
• Rough: Heavy 3
• Bond: Heavy 3
• Thick: Heavy 3 or Extra Heavy
• Custom 1 to 8: Heavy3 or Extra Heavy
** To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper Action on page 8-10.
8-5
Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type for each cassette.
2 Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings, [Next] of Cassette Setting, [Next] of Cassette
1 to Cassette 4, on which you want to register the size, and then [Change] of Paper Size.
3 To detect paper size automatically, press [Auto] and select Metric or Inch for Paper Size.
To select paper size, press [Standard Sizes 1] or [Standard Sizes 2] for Paper Size.
5 Press [Change] of Media Type to select media type and press [OK].
Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray
Select size and media type for multi purpose tray. Set up frequently-used size and media type before use.
Item Description
Paper Auto Automatically detect paper size. Select Metric or Inch for paper size.
Size
Standard Available options are as follows:
Sizes 1 Inch models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II,
Executive
Metric models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, B6-R, A6-R, Folio
Standard Select a standard size except that selected in Standard Sizes 1.
Sizes 2 Inch models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, B6-R, A6-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R
Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II,
Executive, 8K, 16K, 16K-R
Others Select special standard sizes or custom sizes*.
ISO B5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10), Envelope #9 (Commercial #9), Envelope
#6 (Commercial #6 3/4), Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope
C4, Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2
Size Enter a size not displayed in the standard sizes.
Entry Inch models:
H: 5.83 to 17" (in 0.01" increments)
V: 3.86 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric models:
V: 98 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)
H: 148 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Media Type Plain (105 g/m2 or less), Transparency, Rough, Vellum (64 g/m2 or less), Labels,
Recycled, Preprint**, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched**, Letterhead**,
Envelope, Thick (106 g/m2 and more), Coated, High Quality, Custom 1-8**
* Refer to Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print on page 8-4 for selecting Custom 1- 4 for
Custom Paper Size.
** Refer to Paper Weight on page 8-7 for selecting Custom 1- 8 from Media Type.
To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper Action on page 8-10.
NOTE: To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Paper Weight on page 8-7
8-6
Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type for manual paper feed.
2 Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings, [Next] of MP Tray Setting and then [Change]
of Paper Size.
3 To detect paper size automatically, press [Auto] and select Metric or Inch for Paper Size.
To select paper size, press [Standard Sizes 1], [Standard Sizes 2], [Others] or [Size Entry] for Paper Size.
If you select [Size Entry], press [+], [–] to enter X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) dimensions.
Press [# Keys] to enter the paper size using the numeric keys.
5 Press [Change] of Media Type to select the media type and press [OK].
Paper Weight
Select weight for each media type. The options for media type and weight of paper are as follows.
Paper types and weights
Y: Available N: Not available

8
Extra
Paper Weight Light Normal 1 Normal 2 Normal 3 Heavy 1 Heavy 2 Heavy 3
Heavy
Weight (g/m2), 64 g/m2 60 g/m2 76 g/m2 91 g/m2 106 g/m2 129g/m2 164g/m2 Transpar-
Media type or less to to to to to and more encies
75 g/m2 90 g/m2 105 g/m2 128 g/m2 g/m2
Plain Y Y Y (default) Y* N N N N
Transparency N N N N Y** Y** Y** Y**
(default)
Rough Y Y Y Y (default) Y** Y** Y** N

Vellum Y (default) Y Y Y N N N N
Labels Y** Y** Y** Y** Y** Y** Y** Y**
(default)
Recycled Y Y Y (default) Y N N N N
Preprinted Y Y Y (default) Y N N N N
Bond Y Y Y Y (default) Y Y Y** N
Cardstock N N N N Y** Y** Y** Y**
(default)
Color Y Y Y (default) Y N N N N
Prepunched Y Y Y (default) Y N N N N
Letterhead Y Y Y (default) Y N N N N
8-7
Extra
Paper Weight Light Normal 1 Normal 2 Normal 3 Heavy 1 Heavy 2 Heavy 3
Heavy
Thick N N N N Y Y (default) Y** Y**

Envelope N N N N Y** Y** Y** Y**
(default)
Coated Y** Y** Y** Y** Y** Y** Y** Y**

(defaut)
High Quality Y Y Y (default) Y N N N N

Custom 1-8 Y Y Y (default) Y Y Y Y** Y**
* When Normal 3 is selected with the machine that installs the optional document finisher or 3,000 sheet
document finisher, the maximum sheets for stapling becomes 40 sheets for A4 or less sized paper.
** The media type cannot be selected for the cassettes.
For Custom 1-8, settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed.
Item Description
Duplex Prohibit Duplex printing not allowed.
Permit Duplex printing allowed.
Name Change names for Custom 1-8. Names should be not more
than 15 characters. Selecting media type at multi purpose
tray, the name after change will be displayed.
Use the procedure below to set the paper weight.
2 Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Next] of Media Type Setting.
3 Press [Next] for the media type whose weight you want to change.
4 Press [Change] of Paper Weight.
5 Select the weight and press [OK].
6 Press [Close].
The previous screen reappears.
7 To change the duplex printing settings for Custom 1 (-8), press [Next] of Custom 1(-8) and then [Change]
of Duplex. Select [Prohibit] or [Permit] and press [OK].
The previous screen reappears.
8 Press [Close].
9 To change the name for Custom 1(-8), press [Next] of Custom 1(-8) and then [Change] of Name. Enter the
name and press [OK].
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-7 for details on entering characters.
8-8
Default Paper Source
Select the default paper source from Cassette 1-4 and Multi Purpose Tray.
NOTE: [Cassette 3] is displayed when either of the optional paper feeder or 3,000 sheet paper feeder is
installed, and [Cassette 4] is displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed.
Use the procedure below to select the default paper source.
2 Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Change] of Default Paper Source.
3 Select a paper cassette for the default setting.
4 Press [OK].
5 Move to the copy or document box screen and press the Reset key.
Automatic Detection of Originals (Available for metric models only)
Automatically detect originals of special or non-standard size.
The table below lists the special or non-standard original sizes.

8
Item Description
A6/Hagaki As A6 and Hagaki are similar in size, select either one of them for
automatic detection.
Folio Select Folio for automatic detection.
11x15" Select the 11×15" size for automatic detection.
Use the procedure below to set automatic detection of originals.
2 Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Change] of Original Auto Detect.
3 Select [A6] or [Hagaki] of A6/Hagaki.
Select [Off] to disable automatic detection or [On] to enable automatic detection of Folio and 11x15"
respectively.
4 Press [OK].
Media for Auto Selection (Color/B&W)
Select a default media type for auto paper selection when [Auto] is selected of Paper Selection. If Plain is
selected, the paper source with plain paper loaded in the specific size is selected. Select [All Media Types] for
the paper source with any kind of paper loaded in the specific size.
NOTE: Default media types can be set for both Color and Black and White.
8-9
Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type used by Auto Selection.
2 Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Change] of Media for Auto (Color)
or Media for Auto (B & W).
3 Select [All Media Types] or any media type for paper selection.
4 Press [OK].
Paper Source for Cover Paper
Select paper source for cover paper from Cassette 1-4 or Multi Purpose Tray. Cover is used for Booklet (see
page 4-18) and Cover (see page 4-21) modes.
NOTE: [Cassette 3] is displayed when either of the optional paper feeder or 3,000 sheet paper feeder is
installed, and [Cassette 4] is displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed.
Use the procedure below to select the paper source for the cover.
2 Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings, [ ] and then [Change] of Paper Source for
Cover.
3 Select the paper source to load cover paper.
4 Press [OK].
Special Paper Action
When printing on Prepunched, Preprint, and Letterhead, punch-holes might not be aligned or the print direction
might be upside-down depending on how originals are set and the combination of copying functions. In such a
case, select [Adjust Print Direction] to adjust the print direction. When paper orientation is not important, select
[Speed Priority].
The table below lists the available settings and their details.
Item Description
Adjust Print Direction Adjust print direction. Print speed is a little slower. Select this item to
print on Prepunched, Preprint and Letterhead.
Speed Priority Give the job speed top priority and disregard the paper orientation.
Select this item when paper orientation is not important.
8-10
If you select [Adjust Print Direction], load paper according to the steps below.
Example: copying on Letterhead
Original Paper Finished Cassette Multi Purpose Tray
Original Paper Finished Cassette Multi Purpose Tray
NOTE: When loading cover paper in a cassette or multi purpose tray, load the face, on which printing is
supposed to be done, upward.
Use the procedure below to specify the actions performed for special paper types.

8
2 Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings, [ ] and then [Change] of Special Paper
Action.
3 Select [Adjust Print Direction] or [Speed Priority].
4 Press [OK].
Switching Unit of Measurement

Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions.
Use the procedure below to change the input units.
2 Press [Common Settings] and then [Change] of Measurement.
3 Select [mm] for metric or [inch] for inch.
4 Press [OK].
8-11
Error Handling
Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred. The possible errors and what to do for
the errors are as follows.
Duplexing Error
Select what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected paper size and media type.
Item Description
1-sided Printed in 1-sided
Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed.
Finishing Error
Select alternative actions when finishing (stapling or offsetting) is not available for the selected paper size or
media type.
Processing Description
Ignore The setting is ignored and the job is printed.
No Staple Error
Select what to do when staples run out during printing.
Item Description
Ignore Printing continues without stapling.
NOTE: The messages are displayed when the optionaldocument finisher or 3,000 sheet document finisher is
installed.
Stapling Limit Error
Select what to do when stapling capacity is exceeded during printing.
Item Description
Ignore Printing continues without stapling.
Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed
NOTE: The messages are displayed when the optionaldocument finisher or 3,000 sheet document finisher is
installed.
8-12
Punch Waste Full Error
Select what to do when the punch waste box becomes full during printing.
Item Description
Ignore Printing continues without punching.
NOTE: The messages are displayed when the optional 3,000 sheet document finisher and punch unit are
installed.
Paper Mismatch Error
Select what to do when the selected paper size or type does not match paper size or type loaded in the specified
paper source while printing from the computer by specifying the cassette or multi-purpose tray.
Processing Description
Ignore The setting is ignored and the job is printed.
Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed. 8

Use the procedure below to specify the settings for error handling.
2 Press [Common Settings] and then [Next] of Error Handling.
3 Press [Change] at the error you wish to change the handling.
4 Select the error handling method in the selection screen for each of the errors and then press [OK].
5 The previous screen appears. To set the handling for a different error, repeat steps 3 and 4.
8-13
Paper Output
Select output tray respectively for copy jobs, print jobs from Custom Box, computers, and FAX RX data. The
options are as follows.
Output Tray Descriptions
Top Tray Delivery on Top Tray of the machine.
Tray A, Tray B*, Tray C* Delivery to trays A to C in the optional 3,000 sheet document finisher.
Finisher Tray* Delivery on Tray set to the optional document finisher.
Job Separator Delivery on the optional job separator.
Tray 1 to 7* Delivery to trays 1 to 7 in the optional mailbox (tray 1 is the top tray).
* Select [Face Up] (print surface up) or [Face Down] (print surface down) for paper orientation at output.
NOTE: The optional job separator, document finisher, or 3,000 sheet document finisher are required.
FAX RX data output can be specified when the optional fax kit is installed.
Use the procedure below to select the output tray.
2 Press [Common Settings] and then [Next] of Paper Output.
3 Press [Change] of Copy/Custom Box, Printer, or FAX Port 1 or FAX Port 2.
NOTE: FAX Port 1 appears when the optional fax kit is installed. If you have 2 optional fax kits installed, Fax
Port 2 appears. You can specify the output tray for the second kit (Dual FAX).
4 Select Output Tray.
For [Finisher Tray], [Tray B], [Tray C] or [Tray 1] to [Tray 7], select [Face Up] (print surface up) or [Face
Down] (print surface down) as the paper orientation at output.
5 Press [OK].
6 When selecting [Face Up] (print surface up) as the paper orientation at output, press [Page Order with Face
Up] and then select the order of the output pages from [Ascending] or [Descending].
NOTE: Selecting [Descending] accelerates the starting time of copying.
7 When changing the output tray of Copy/Custom Box, move to the copy or document box screen and press
the Reset key.
8-14
Orientation Confirmation
Select whether to display a screen for selecting the orientation of the originals to be placed on the platen when
using the following functions. (For more information, refer to page 4-9 for Original Orientation.)
• Duplex • Memo mode
• Margin/Centering originals • Page numbering
• Border erase • Booklets
• Combine mode • Staple/Punch (optional feature)
Orientation Confirmation Setting

Use the procedure below to select the default Orientation Confirmation setting.
2 Press [Common Settings] and [Change] of Orientation Confirmation.
3 Select the default for [Off] or [On].
4 Press [OK].
Settings for Color Toner Empty Action

Select whether printing is prohibited or the Print in Black and White setting is used for printing once the color
toner runs out. 8
Use the procedure below to specify the action performed when there is no color toner.
2 Press [Common Settings], [ ] and then [Change] of Color Toner Empty Action.
3 Select [Stop Printing] or [Print in Black & White].
4 Press [OK].
IMPORTANT: You cannot change the setting to black and white printing by selecting [Print in Black & White]
once the color toner runs out. If you want to use [Print in Black & White], specify the action before the color toner
runs out. Once the color toner runs out, the machine continues printing in black and white up to 500 pages in
A4/Letter size.
Function Defaults
Defaults are the values automatically set after the warm-up is completed or the Reset key is pressed.
Set the defaults for available settings such as copying and sending. Setting the frequently-used values as
defaults makes subsequent jobs easier.
IMPORTANT: When you have changed the defaults, to enable the change immediately, move to the copy, send,
or document box screen and press the Reset key.
8-15
Set the original orientation defaults. The available default settings are shown below.
Item Description
Top Edge Top Select the original's top edge at the top.
Top Edge Left Select the original's top edge at the left.
Refer to page 4-9 for Original Orientation.
Use the procedure below to select the default orientation when originals are placed on the platen.
2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of Original Orientation.
3 Select [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge Left] for the default.
4 Press [OK].
Continuous Scan
Set the continuous scan defaults. The available default settings are shown below.
Item Description
Off Continuous scan not performed
On Continuous scan performed
Refer to page 4-9 for Original Orientation.
Use the procedure below to select the default settings for continuous scanning.
2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of Continuous Scan.
3 Select [Off] or [On] for the default.
Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for originals.
4 Press [OK].
8-16
Original Image
Set the default original document type. The available default settings are shown below.
Item Description
Text+Photo Text and photos together.
Printed Photo For photos printed in magazines, etc.
Text Only text, no photos.
Map For maps, etc.
for OCR Image quality suitable for OCR software.*
Printed Document For documents printed from this machine.
* This function is only available for black and white mode.
Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for originals.
2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of Original Image.
8
3 Select the default original image.
4 Press [OK].
Scan Resolution
Select the default scanning resolution. The options are 600x600dpi, 400x400dpi Ultra Fine, 300x300dpi,
200x400dpi Super Fine, 200x200dpi Fine, 200x100dpi Normal.
Use the procedure below to select the default resolution setting.
2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of Scan Resolution.
3 Select the default resolution.
4 Press [OK].
Color Selection (Copy)
Select the default copying color mode setting. The available default settings are shown below.
Color mode Description
Auto Color Automatically recognize whether documents are color or black

and white.
Full Color Scan document in full color.
Black & White Scan document in black and white.
8-17
Use the procedure below to select the default color mode setting.
2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of mode Color
Selection(Copy).
3 Select the default color setting.
4 Press [OK].
Color Selection (Send/Store)
Select the default color mode for scanning documents. The available default settings are shown below.
Color mode Description
Auto Color (Color/Gray) Automatically recognize whether the document is color or black
and white, and scan color documents in Full Color and black and
white documents in Grayscale.
Auto Color (Color/B & W) Automatically recognize whether the document is color or black
and white, and scan color documents in Full Color and black and
white documents in Black and White.
Full Color Scan document in full color.
Grayscale Scan document in grayscale for smoother and finer finish.
Black & White Scan document in black and white. File size is smaller than Full
Color or Grayscale.
Use the procedure below to select the default color mode.
2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of Color Select.(Send/Store).
3 Select the default color mode.
4 Press [OK].
File Format
Select the default file type to send the scanned originals. The available default settings are shown below.
Item Description
PDF Send files in PDF format.
TIFF Send files in TIFF format.
JPEG Send files in JPEG format.
XPS Send files in XPS format.
High Comp. PDF Send files in High Comp. PDF format (refer to page 5-14).
NOTE: Refer to page 5-12 for file formats.
8-18
Use the procedure below to select the default file format.
2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of File Format.
3 Select the default file format.
4 Press [OK].
File Separation
Select the default file separation setting. The available default settings are shown below.
Item Description
Off No file separation performed (all the pages are compiled in one file).
Each Page Each scanned page is created into a separate file.
NOTE: Refer to page 5-13 for file separation.
Use the procedure below to select the default file separation.

8
2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of File Separation.
3 Select the default for [Off] or [Each Page].
Press [OK].
Density
Set the default density. The available default settings are shown below.
Item Description
Manual (Normal 0) Set to (Normal 0) in the Manual density.
Auto Set to Auto density.
NOTE: You cannot specify the density if you have selected [Full Color], [Auto Color (Color/Gray)], or
[Grayscale] in Color Select.(Send/Store).
Use the procedure below to select the default density.
2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ] and then [Change] of Density.
3 Select the default density.
4 Press [OK].
8-19
Zoom
Select the enlarged/reduced default when paper size/sending size changed after the originals set. The available
default settings are shown below.
Item Description
100% Copy (send/save) at actual size (100%).
Auto Automatically reduce or enlarge the originals to match paper size/

sending size.
Use the procedure below to select the default zoom setting.
2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ] and then [Change] of Zoom.
3 Select the default zoom setting.
4 Press [OK].
File Name Entry
Set an automatically entered name (default) for jobs. Additional information such as Date and Time and Job No.
can also be set.
NOTE: Refer to page 4-41 and page 5-25 for name entry.
Use the procedure below to set the default file name.
2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ] and then [Change] of File Name Entry.
3 Press [File Name] to enter the file name in not more than 32 characters.
4 Press [OK].
5 Press [Date and Time] to add the date/time to the job, or press [Job No.] to add the job number to the job.
The added information will be displayed in Additional Info.
6 Press [OK].
E-mail Subject/Body
Set the subject and body automatically entered (default subject and body) when sending the scanned originals
by E-mail.
NOTE: Refer to Send as E-mail on page 3-25.
Use the procedure below to set the default e-mail subject and message body.
8-20
2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ], and then [Change] of E-mail Subject/Body.
3 Press [Subject] to enter an E-mail subject not more than 60 characters.
4 Press [OK].
5 Press [Body] to enter an E-mail Body not more than 500 characters.
6 Press [OK].
7 Check that the entries are correct and press [OK].
Border Erase Default
Set the default width to be erased as a border. The table below shows the measurement ranges that can be set.
Input units Range
Inch 0 to 2" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric 0 mm to 50 mm (in 1 mm increments) 8
NOTE: Refer to page 4-16 and page 5-23 for Border Erase.
Use the procedure below to set the default border erase width.
2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ] and then [Change] of Border Erase Default.
3 Press [+] or [–] for the Border and Gutter width to erase.
You can use the numeric keys to enter the number directly.
4 Press [OK].
Select the Border Erase Method for Back Page of a sheet. The table below shows the available settings.
Item Description
Same as Front Page Border Erase performed in the same setting as the front page
NOTE: Refer to page 4-16 and page 5-23 for Border Erase.
Use the procedure below to specify the border erase setting for the back of the page.
8-21
2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ] and then [Change] of Border Erase to Back
Page.
3 Press [Same as Front Page] or [Do Not Erase].
4 Press [OK].
Margin Default
Set the default margin. The table below shows the measurement ranges that can be set.
Input units Range
Inch -0.75 to 0.75" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric -18 mm to 18 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Use the procedure below to set the default margin width.
2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ] and then [Change] of Margin Default.
3 Use the [+] or [-] to enter the margin widths for Left/Right and Top/Bottom.
You can use the numeric keys to enter the number directly.
4 Press [OK].
Auto Image Rotation
Select the default Auto Image Rotation setting. The table below shows the available settings.
Item Description
Off No Auto Image Rotation performed.
On Auto Image Rotation performed.
NOTE: Refer to page 4-37 for Auto Image Rotation.
Use the procedure below to set the default Auto Image Rotation settings.
2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ] and then [Change] of Auto Image Rotation.
4 Press [OK].
8-22
EcoPrint
Select the EcoPrint default. The table below shows the available settings.
Item Description
Off No EcoPrint performed.
On EcoPrint performed.
NOTE: Refer to page 4-12 for EcoPrint.
Use the procedure below to set the default EcoPrint setting.
2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ] twice, and then [Change] of EcoPrint.
4 Press [OK].
PDF/TIFF/JPEG Image
8
Select the default PDF/TIFF/JPEG file quality. Five options are available from 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to 5
High Quality (Low Comp.).
NOTE: Higher quality will make the stored files larger.

Refer to page 5-12 for file formats.
Use the procedure below to select the default file quality setting.
2 Press [Common Settings], [ ] and [Next] of Function Defaults. Press [ ] twice and then [Change] of PDF/
TIFF/JPEG Image.
3 Select the default image quality from [1] (Low Quality) to [5] (High Quality).
4 Press [OK].
8-23
High Comp. PDF Image
Select the default quality setting for high compressed PDF files.
Item Description
Compression Ratio Priority Compression Ratio is given priority with smaller file size.
Standard Standard quality
Quality Priority Image quality is given priority with larger file size.
Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for highly compressed PDF files.
2 Press [Common Settings], [ ] and [Next] of Function Defaults. Press [ ] twice and [Change] of High
Comp. PDF Image.
3 Select the default for [Compression Ratio Priority], [Standard], or [Quality Priority].
4 Press [OK].
Color TIFF Compression Settings
Select the compression method for TIFF images handled on this machine. Use the procedure below to set the
default Color TIFF Compression setting.
2 Press [Common Settings], [ ] and [Next] of Function Defaults. Press [ ] twice and then [Change] of Color
TIFF Compression.
3 Select [TIFF V6] or [TTN2].
4 Press [OK].
Repeat Copying
Select the Repeat Copy default. The options are as follows. The table below shows the available settings.
Item Description
Off No Repeat Copy is performed.
On Repeat Copy is performed.
NOTE: This setting is not displayed when the optional Data Security Kit is installed or the Repeat Copy job is
set to 0.
Refer to page 4-42 for Repeat Copy.
Use the procedure below to set the default Repeat Copy setting.
8-24
2 Press [Common Settings], [ ] and [Next] of Function Defaults. Press [ ] twice and [Change] of Repeat
Copy.
4 Press [OK].
Collate/Offset
Set the defaults for Collate/Offset. The table below shows the available settings.
Item Description
Collate Off Collate not performed.

On Collate performed.
Offset Off Offset not performed.
Each Set Offset performed. (If [Off] is selected of Collate, it is
(Each Page) performed [Each Page].)
NOTE: Refer to page 3-14 for Collate/Offset. 8

Use the procedure below to set the default Collate/Offset settings.
2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults. Press [ ] twice and [Change] of Collate/Offset.
3 Select the defaults for Collate and Offset respectively.
4 Press [OK].
JPEG/TIFF Print
Select the image size (resolution) when printing JPEG or TIFF file. The table below shows the available settings.
Item Description
Fit to Paper Size Fit the image size to the selected paper size.
Image Resolution Print at resolution of the actual image.
Fit to Print Resolution Fit the image size to the print resolution.
Use the procedure below to set the default JPEG/TIFF Print settings.
2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults. Press [ ] twice and [Change] of JPEG/TIFF
Print.
3 Select the default for [Fit to Paper Size], [Image Resolution], or [Fit to Print Resolution].
4 Press [OK].
8-25
XPS Fit to Page
Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing XPS file.
Use the procedure below to set the default XPS Fit to Page settings.
2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults. Press [ ] twice and [Change] of XPS Fit to
Page.
4 Press [OK].
8-26
Copy Settings
The following settings are available for copying functions.
• Paper Selection …8-27

• Auto Paper Selection …8-27
• Auto % Priority …8-28
• Reserve Next Priority …8-28
• Preset Limit …8-29
• Quick Setup Registration …8-29
Paper Selection
Set the default paper selection. The table below shows the available settings.
Item Description
Auto Automatically select the cassette containing paper in the same size as
8
originals.
Default Paper Source Select paper source set by Default Paper Source (refer to page 8-9).
Use the procedure below to set the default paper selection.
2 Press [Copy] and [Change] of Paper Selection.
3 Press [Auto] or [Default Paper Source].
4 Press [OK].
5 Move to the copy screen and press the Reset key.
Auto Paper Selection

If [Auto] is selected for Paper Selection, set the paper size selection method when the zoom changes. The table
Item Description
Most Suitable Size Select paper based on the current zoom and the size of the original.
Same as Original Size Select paper that matches the size of the original, regardless the zoom.
8-27
Use the procedure below to specify the action performed for Auto Paper Selection.
2 Press [Copy] and [Change] of Auto Paper Selection.
3 Press [Most Suitable Size] or [Same as Original Size].
4 Press [OK].
Auto % Priority
When a paper source of different size from the original is selected, select whether automatic zoom (reduce/
zoom) is performed. The table below shows the available settings.
Item Description
Off No zoom performed (copied in original size).
On Automatic zoom performed as appropriate.
Use the procedure below to specify the automatic zoom priority.
2 Press [Copy] and [Change] of Auto % Priority.
4 Press [OK].
Reserve Next Priority

Select the operation of the reserve copy and interrupt copy functions and for canceling jobs.
Use the procedure below to select the default Reserve Next Priority setting.
2 Press [Copy] and [Change] of Reserve Next Priority.
4 Press [OK].
8-28
Preset Limit
Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time. Options are 1-999 copies.
Use the procedure below to set the limit on the number of copies.
2 Press [Copy] and [Change] of Preset Limit.
3 Press [+] or [–] or use the numeric keys to enter the limit for the number of copies.
4 Press [OK].
Quick Setup Registration

Select the copying functions to be registered for Quick Setup. Six keys of the Quick Setup screen are allocated
to typical functions but can be changed as necessary. Six items from the following options are available.
Paper Selection, Zoom, Staple/Punch, Density, Duplex, Combine, Collate/Offset, Original Image,
Original Size, Original Orientation, Color Selection, Continuous Scan
NOTE: Refer to Quick Setup Screen on page 3-43 for the Quick Setup steps.
8
Use the procedure below to register the Quick Setup functions.
2 Press [Copy] and [Next] of Quick Setup Registration.
3 Press [Change] of the function to be registered in Quick Setup.
4 Select a key (1-6) allocated on the Quick Setup Registration screen. Press [Off] to delete a key from the
Quick Setup.
5 Press [OK]. If you overwrite the setting, a confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes].
8-29
Sending Settings
The sending settings allow you to specify the following sending function options.

• Destination Check before Send …8-30
• Color Type …8-31
• Entry Check for New Destination …8-31
• Setting the Default Send Screen …8-32

Select the sending functions to be registered for Quick Setup. Six keys of the Quick Setup screen are allocated
to typical functions but can be changed as necessary.
Six items in the following options are available.
Original Size, 2-sided/Book Original, Sending Size, Original Orientation, File Format, Density,
Original Image, Scan Resolution, FAX TX Resolution, Color Selection, Zoom, Continuous Scan
2 Press [Send] and [Next] of Quick Setup Registration.
4 Select a key (1-6) allocated on the Quick Setup Registration screen. Press [Off] to delete a key from the
Quick Setup.
Destination Check before Send

When performing sending jobs, display the confirmation screen of destinations after pressing the Start key.
Item Description
Off Do not display the confirmation screen of destinations.
On Display the confirmation screen of destinations.
NOTE: Refer to Confirmation Screen of Destinations on page 3-29 for the Quick Setup steps.
This setting is available with 55/50 ppm model.
8-30
Use the procedure below to set the destination check before send.
2 Press [Send] and then [Change] of Dest. Check before Send.
3 Select [Off] or [On].
4 Press [OK].
Color Type
Set the color type when you send color documents. The table below shows the available settings.
Item Description
RGB Send color documents in RGB.
sRGB Allows you to match the color space for machines that support sRGB.
Selecting RGB displays the color profile values set on the machine.
Use the procedure below to set the color type.

8
2 Press [Send] and then [Change] of Color Type.
3 Select [RGB] or [sRGB].
4 Press [OK].
Entry Check for New Destination

When adding new destination, display the entry check screen to check the entered destination. The table below
shows the available settings.
Item Description
Off Do not display the entry check screen.
On Display the entry check screen.
NOTE: This setting is available with 55/50 ppm model.
Use the procedure below to set the destination check before send.
2 Press [Send] and then [Change] of Entry Check for New Dest.
3 Select [Off] or [On].
4 Press [OK].
8-31
Setting the Default Send Screen

Use this procedure to set the default screen displayed when you press the Send key.
Item Detail
Destination Displays the destination screen when the Send key is pressed
(screen for sending).
Address Book Displays the address book when the Send key is pressed
Use the procedure below to set the default send screen.
2 Press [Send] and then [Change] of Default Screen.
3 Press [Destination] or [Address Book].
4 Press [OK].
8-32
Document Box Settings

The following settings are available for Document Box.
• Registering / Editing Box …8-33

• Default Setting …8-33
• Job Box …8-33
Registering / Editing Box

Creates a new box, edits a box, or checks details of a box in the custom box, or deletes a box from the custom
box. For details, refer to Using a Custom Box on page 6-2.
Default Setting
Sets the time at which documents in the custom box are automatically deleted.
For details, refer to Setting the document deletion time on page 6-3.
Job Box
The following three operations can be done. For details, refer to each page shown below. 8
• Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Print Box (page 6-13)
• Repeat Copy Box (page 6-15)
• Deleting a Form Stored (page 6-18)

Select the Storing in Box, Sending from Box, Printing from Box functions to be registered for Quick Setup. Six
keys of the Quick Setup screen are allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary.
The options are as follows.
Store File Quick Setup
Color Selection, Storing Size, Density, 2-sided/Book Original, Resolution, Zoom,
Original Orientation, Original Size, Original Image, Continuous Scan
Print Quick Setup
Paper Selection, Collate/Offset, Staple/Punch, Duplex, Combine, Delete after Printed
Send Quick Setup
Sending Size, FAX TX Resolution, File Format, Delete after Transmitted
8-33
2 Press [Document Box/Removable Memory] and [Next] of Quick Setup Registration.
3 Press [Next] of Store File, Print, or Send.
5 Select a key (1-6) allocated on the Quick Setup screen. Press [Off] to delete a key from the Quick Setup.
8-34
Printer Settings
Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the application software screen. However, the following
settings are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine.
• Emulation …8-35
• Color Setting …8-36
• EcoPrint …8-36
• Override A4/Letter …8-37
• Duplex …8-37
• Copies …8-37
• Orientation …8-38
• Form Feed Timeout …8-38
• LF Action …8-39
• CR Action …8-39
• Paper Feed Mode …8-40
8
Emulation
Select the emulation for operating this machine by commands oriented to other types of printers.
Selection of emulation
The printer can emulate PCL 6, KPDL and KPDL(Auto).
Use the procedure below to select the emulation.
1 Press the System Menu Key.
2 Press [Printer] > [Change] of Emulation.
3 Select the desired emulation.
NOTE: If you selected [KPDL(Auto)], set Alternative Emulation, too. (Refer to page 8-35)
When you have selected [KPDL] or [KPDL(Auto)], set KPDL Error Report, too. (Refer to page 8-36)
4 Press [OK].
Setting of Alternative Emulation
When you have selected [KPDL(Auto)] as emulation mode, you can switch between KPDL and another
emulation mode (alternative emulation) automatically according to the data to print. The alternative emulation
you can set is [PCL6].
Use the procedure below to select the alternative emulation.
8-35
2 Press [Printer] > [Change] of Emulation > [KPDL(Auto)] > [Alt Emulation].
3 Select the desired alternative emulation and then press [OK].
4 Press [OK].
Setting of KPDL error report
When an error has occurred during printing in KPDL emulation mode, set whether or not the error report is
output. The default setting is Off (not output).
Use the procedure below to specify the KPDL error report setting.
2 Press [Printer] > [Change] of Emulation > [KPDL] or [KPDL(Auto)] > [KPDL Error Report].
3 Press [On] or [Off] and then press [OK].
4 Press [OK].
Color Setting
You can choose whether status reports are printed in color or black and white.
Use the procedure below to select the color setting.
2 Press [Printer] and then [Change] of Color Setting.
3 Select [Color] or [Black & White].
4 Press [OK].
EcoPrint
EcoPrint conserves toner when printing. This is recommended for test copies where faded printing is not a
problem.
Use the procedure below to specify the EcoPrint setting.
2 Press [Printer] and [Change] of EcoPrint.
3 Press [Off] or [On].
4 Press [OK].
8-36
Override A4/Letter
Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter, which are similar in size, as the same size when printing. The table
Item Description
On A4 and Letter are regarded as the same in size. The machine will
use whichever size is in the paper source.
Off A4 and Letter are not regarded as the same in size.
Use the procedure below to specify the override A4/Letter setting.
2 Press [Printer] and [Change] of Override A4/Letter.
4 Press [OK].
Duplex
Select binding orientation for duplex mode. The table below shows the available settings. 8
Item Description Finish
1-sided No duplex mode
2-sided Bind Shorter edge bound

ShortEdge
2-sided Bind Longer edge bound

LongEdge
Use the procedure below to select a duplex setting.
2 Press [Printer] and [Change] of Duplex.
3 Press [1-sided], [2-sided Bind LongEdge], or [2-sided Bind ShortEdge].
4 Press [OK].
Copies
Set the default number of copies, from 1 to 999.
Use the procedure below to specify the default number of copies.
8-37
2 Press [Printer] and [Change] of Copies.
3 Press [+],[–] or the numeric keys to set the default number of copies.
4 Press [OK].
Orientation
Set the default orientation, Portrait or Landscape.
Portrait Landscape
Printer Printer
Use the procedure below to set the default orientation for printing.
2 Press [Printer] and [Change] of Orientation.
3 Press [Portrait] or [Landscape].
4 Press [OK].
Form Feed Timeout

Receiving print data from the computer, the machine may sometimes wait if there is no information signaling
that the last page does not have any more data to be printed. When the preset timeout passes, the machine
automatically prints paper. The options are between 5 and 495 seconds.
Use the procedure below to set the form feed timeout.
2 Press [Printer], [ ] and [Change] of Form Feed Timeout.
3 Press [+] or [–] to set the Form Feed Timeout.
You can set the timeout delay in seconds.
You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value.
4 Press [OK].
8-38
LF Action
Set the line feed action when the machine receives the line feed code (character code 0AH). The table below
shows the available settings.
Item Description
LF Only Only line feed performed.
LF and CR Line feed and character return performed.
Ignore LF No line feed performed.
Use the procedure below to specify an LF action.
2 Press [Printer], [ ] and [Change] of LF Action.
3 Press [LF Only], [LF and CR] or [Ignore LF].
4 Press [OK].
CR Action
8
Set the character return action when the machine receives the character return code (character code 0DH). The
table below shows the available settings.
Item Description
CR Only Only character return performed.
LF and CR Character return and line feed performed.
Ignore CR No character return performed.
Use the procedure below to specify a CR action.
2 Press [Printer], [ ] and [Change] of CR Action.
3 Press [CR Only], [LF and CR] or [Ignore CR].
4 Press [OK].
8-39
Paper Feed Mode

While printing from the computer, select how to feed paper when the paper source and type are specified. The
table below shows the available settings.
Item Description
Auto Search the paper source that matches the selected paper size and type.
Fixed Print on paper loaded in the specified paper source.
Use the procedure below to select the paper feed mode.
2 Press [Printer], [ ] and [Change] of Paper Feed Mode.
3 Press [Auto] or [Fixed].
4 Press [OK].
8-40
Printing Reports/Sending Notice

Print reports to check the machine settings and status. Default settings for printing the result reports can also
be configured.
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only print by logging in with administrator privileges.
Printing Reports
Printable reports are as follows.
Status Page
Check the information including current settings, available memory space, and optional equipment installed.
Status Page
TASKalfa xxxxx
Firmware Version
Font List
Check the font samples installed in the machine.
8-41
Network Status Page
Check the information including network interface firmware version, network address and protocol.
Network Status Page

TASKalfa xxxxx
Firmware Version
Service Status Page
More detailed information is available than on the Status Page. Service personnel usually print the service status
pages for maintenance purpose.
Use the procedure below to print a report.
2 Press [Report] and [Next] of Print Report.
3 Press [Print] for the report you want to print. Printing starts.
A confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes].
Send Result Report

Automatically print a report of transmission result when a transmission is complete. The table below shows the
available settings.
Item Description
Off No result report printed.
On Result report automatically printed.

Transmitted images can also be attached to the FAX result report.
Error Only Result report printed only when a transmission ends in an error. If two or more
destinations are registered, the reports are printed only for the destinations with
the errors. Transmitted images can also be attached to the FAX result report.
2 Press [Report], [Next] of Result Report Setting, [Next] of Send Result Report and then [Change] of E-mail/
Folder.
3 Press [Off], [On], or [Error Only].
4 Press [OK].
8-42
Report for Job Canceled before Sending
Print a send result report when the job is canceled before being sent.
2 Press [Report], [Next] of Result Report Setting, [Next] of Send Result Report and then [Change] of
Canceled before Sending.
3 Press [Off], [On].
4 Press [OK].
8-43
Adjustment/Maintenance
Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance.
• Copy Density Adjustment …8-44

• Send/Box Density Adjust …8-45
• Drum Refresh …8-45
• Correcting Fine Black Lines …8-46
• System Initialization …8-46
• Display Brightness …8-46
• Silent Mode …8-47
• Auto Color Correction...8-47
• Color Registration...8-47
• Color Calibration Cycle...8-50
• Gray Adjustment...8-51
• Color Calibration...8-52
• Developer Refresh...8-53
• Laser Scanner Cleaning...8-53
• MP Tray Cleaning...8-53
• First Print Position...8-54
Copy Density Adjustment

Adjust copy density. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels both in auto and manual density modes.
Use the procedure below to adjust the copy density.
2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Next] of Copy Density Adjustment.
3 Press [Change] of Auto or of Manual.
4 Press [-3] - [+3] (Lighter-Darker) to adjust density.
5 Press [OK].
8-44
Send/Box Density Adjust

Adjust scan density when sending or storing the data in Document Box. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels
both in auto and manual density modes.
Use the procedure below to adjust the density.
2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Next] of Send/Box Density Adjust..
3 Press [Change] of Auto or of Manual.
4 Press [-3] - [+3] (Lighter-Darker) to adjust density.
5 Press [OK].
Drum Refresh
Refresh the drum when image blur or white spots appear on images in copies.
NOTE: Drum Refresh cannot be performed while printing. Execute Drum Refresh after the printing is done.
To use [Drum Refresh], load Ledger or A3 size paper into the Multi Purpose tray.
8
Use the procedure below to refresh the drum.
2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance].
3 Press [Next] of Drum Refresh.
4 Press [Execute] to perform Drum Refresh.
5 After Drum Refresh is completed, press [OK] to return to the Adjustment/Maintenance screen.
8-45
Correcting Fine Black Lines

Correct fine black lines (black streaks caused by contamination), which may appear on the copies, when the
optional document processor used.
Paper feed
direction
Item Description
Off No correction performed.
On(Low) Correction performed. The reproduction of the image becomes lower when
using Off.
On(High) Correction performed. Select this item if black streak remains after using On
(Low). The reproduction of the image becomes lower when using On (Low).
NOTE: Using Correcting Fine Black Line can impair reproduction of fine characters. It is recommended to
keep the default ([Off]).
Use the procedure below to specify the setting for correcting fine black lines.
2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Change] of Correcting Black Line.
3 Press [Off], [On(Low)] or [On(High)].
4 Press [OK].
System Initialization
Initialize the hard disk mounted on the machine to return to the default mode.
Refer to System Initialization on page 8-72 about the initialization procedures.
Display Brightness
Set the brightness of the touch panel.
Use the procedure below to adjust the display brightness.
8-46
2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Change] of Display Brightness.

3 Press [1] - [4] (Darker- Lighter) to adjust brightness.
4 Press [OK].
Silent Mode
Make the machine run more quietly. Select this mode when the running noise is uncomfortable.
Use the procedure below to set Silent mode.

2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Change] of Silent Mode.
4 Press [OK].
Auto Color Correction

This setting allows you to adjust the detection level used by the machine to determine whether the original is
color or black and white during Auto Color Mode. Setting a lower value will result in more originals being
identified as color, while a larger value will tend to increase the number of originals being identified as black and
white.
8
Use the procedure below to set the Auto Color Detection Level.

2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [ ] and then [Change] of Auto Color Correction.
3 Press one of keys [1] to [5] (Color - B & W) to set the detection level.
4 Press [OK].
Color Registration
When first installing the machine or moving it to a new location, color drift during printing may occur. Use this
function to correct the color position of each of cyan, magenta and yellow to resolve color drift.
Normal registration and detailed settings are available for Color Registration. Color drift can be largely corrected
through normal registration. However, if it is not resolved or to perform more detailed settings, use the detailed
settings.
NOTE: To perform color registration, verify that either 11 × 8 1/2" or A4 paper is loaded into a cassette.
IMPORTANT: Before performing color registration, be sure to perform color calibration (see page 8-52). If color
drift remains, perform color registration.By performing color registration without performing color calibration, the
color drift will be resolved once, however, it may cause the serious color drift later.
Normal Registration
Follow the steps below to correct normal color drift.
8-47
2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [ ] and

then [Next] of Color Registration.
3 Press [Print] of Chart. A chart is printed.
On the chart, for each of M (magenta), C (cyan) and

Y (yellow), 3 chart types are printed on one sheet:
H-F (left), V (right), H-R (horizontal).
Chart Example
4 Find the location on each chart where 2 lines most

closely overlap each other. If this is the 0 position,
registration for that color is not required. For the
illustration, B is the appropriate value.
5 Press [Next] of Registration.
6 Press [Change] for the chart to be corrected.
7 Press [+] or [-] to enter the values read from the

chart and press [OK].
Press [+] to increase the value from 0 to 9. To

decrease, press [-].
By pressing [-], the value changes from 0 to

alphabetic letters, going from A to I. To move in the
reverse direction, press [+].
8-48
You cannot use the numeric keys to enter these

values.
8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 to enter the registration

values for each chart.
9 Press [Execute] after all values have been entered.

Color registration begins.
10 Press [OK] after color registration is complete.

Detailed Settings
Follow the steps below to perform more detailed correction.
1 Refer to Steps 1-2 of Normal Registration to display

the Color Registration screen.
2 Press [Detail].
3 Press [Print] of Chart (Details). A chart is printed.
On the chart, for each of M (magenta), C (cyan) and

Y (yellow), charts for H-1 to 7 and V-3 are printed.
Chart Example
8
8-49
4 Find the location on each chart where 2 lines most

closely match. If this is the 0 position, registration
for that color is not required. For the illustration, B
is the appropriate value.
From charts V-1 to V-5, read only the values from

V-3 (center).
5 Press [Next] of Registration (Details).
6 Press [Change] for the chart to be corrected.
7 Press [+] or [-] to enter the values read from the

chart and press [OK].
Press [+] to increase the value from 0 to 9. To

decrease, press [-].
By pressing [-], the value changes from 0 to

alphabetic letters, going from A to I. To move in the
reverse direction, press [+].
You cannot use the numeric keys to enter these

values.
8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 to enter the registration

values for each chart.
9 Press [Execute] after all values have been entered.

Color registration begins.
10 Press [OK] after color registration is complete.
Color Calibration Cycle

After Auto Clear has been activated, or during printing or while processing Color Registration, Performing Color
Calibration... Remaining: 50 seconds may be displayed. While this message is displayed, the machine makes
adjustments to maintain image quality. Wait until the message disappears.
Set the color calibration cycle here. The setting items are as follows.
Item Description
Auto Automatically sets the cycle for color calibration.
Short Sets a short color calibration cycle and increases the number of
times performed, with priority to image quality.
Standard Sets a standard color calibration cycle, compromising between

image quality and downtime for processing.
Long Sets a long color calibration cycle and decreases the number of
times performed, to ensure minimal downtime.
8-50
Use the procedure below to set the color calibration.
2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [ ] and then [Change] of Color Calibration Cycle.
3 Select [Auto], [Short], [Standard] or [Long].
4 Press [OK].
Gray Adjustment
After prolonged use, or from the effects of surrounding temperature or humidity, the hue of printed color output
may shift or color drift may occur. Use this function to correct color settings when the color of a finished copy
does not match the original. Perform color calibration before using gray adjustment (see page 8-51). Use gray
adjustment when the color is not enhanced even after performing color calibration.
Normal and detailed gray adjustment is available. While normal adjustment will almost completely eliminate
errors in color tones, you can also use detailed adjustment for stubborn color tone problems or where more
precise adjustment is needed.
NOTE: To perform gray adjustment, verify that either 11 × 8 1/2" or A4 paper is loaded into a cassette.
Normal adjustment 8
A total of 3 color pattern pages (No. 1 to 3) are is printed during normal adjustment. The printed color patterns
are read sequentially during the adjustment.
Use the procedure below for normal adjustment.

then [Next] of Gray Adjustment.
3 Press [Execute]. A color pattern is printed.
Check that the number "1" is printed at the bottom

of the color pattern.
4 As shown in the illustration, place the printed side

down on the platen with the three black boxes
aligned to the top.
5 Press [Execute]. The color pattern is read and

adjustment begins.
The second color pattern is output.
6 Check that the number "2" (to "3") is printed at the

bottom of the color pattern and repeat steps 4 to 6
twice to read color patterns 2 and 3 in sequence.
7 Press [OK] in the adjustment end confirmation

screen.
8-51
Detailed Adjustment
A total of 5 color pattern pages (No. 1 to 5) are printed during detailed adjustment. As with normal adjustment
(page 8-51), the printed color patterns are read sequentially during detailed adjustment.
Use the procedure below to carry out detailed adjustment.

then [Next] of Gray Adjustment.
3 Press [Detail].
4 Press [Execute]. A color pattern is printed.
Check that the number "1" is printed at the bottom

of the color pattern.
5 As shown in the illustration, place the printed side

down on the platen with the three black boxes
aligned to the top.
6 Press [Execute]. The color pattern is read and

adjustment begins.
The second color pattern is printed.
7 Check that the number "2" (to "5") is printed at the

bottom of the color pattern and repeat steps 5 to 7
four times to read color patterns 2, 3, 4 and 5 in
sequence.
8 Press [OK] in the adjustment end confirmation

screen.
Color Calibration
After prolonged use, or from the effects of surrounding temperature or humidity, the hue of printed color output
may shift or color drift may occur. Using this function enables printing in the most appropriate color by adjusting
hue and color drift in detail. Use gray adjustment when the color is not enhanced even after performing color
calibration (see page 8-51). If the hue and color are not enhanced, use color registration (see page 8-47).
2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [ ] and then [Next] of Color Calibration.
3 Press [Execute]. Color Calibration begins.
4 Press [OK] after Color Calibration is complete.
8-52
Developer Refresh
When the printing is too light or incomplete, even though there is enough toner, refresh the developer.
2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [ ] and then [Next] of Developer Refresh.
3 Press [Execute]. Developer Refresh begins.
NOTE: Waiting time may be longer when the toner is refilled during developer refresh.
4 Press [OK] after Developer Refresh is complete.
Laser Scanner Cleaning

If white or color streaks appear on images, perform Laser Scanner Cleaning.
2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [ ] and then [Next] of Laser Scanner Cleaning.
3 Press [Execute]. Laser Scanner Cleaning begins.
4 Press [OK] after Laser Scanner Cleaning is complete. 8

MP Tray Cleaning
If dirt appears on images when using the multi purpose tray, perform MP Tray Cleaning.
2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [ ] and then [Next] of MP Tray Cleaning.
3 Load two sheets of A4 or Letter paper in the multi purpose tray.
4 Press [Execute]. MP Tray Cleaning begins.
Press [OK] after MP Tray Cleaning is complete.
8-53
First Print Position

Using this function speeds up either of the first print time of black and white printing or color printing by changing
the default start position of the first print. In addition, the machine can automatically detect the appropriate
position depending on your usage.
Item Description
Standard Default of the first print time.
Black & White Priority Speed up the first print time of black and white printing.
Color Priority Speed up the first print time of color printing.
Auto Automatically detects the appropriate position depending on your usage.
2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [ ] and then [Next] of First Print Position.
3 Select [Standard], [Black & White Priority], [Color Priority] or [Auto].
4 Press [OK].
8-54
Date/Timer
Date/Timer settings include:
• Date/Time …8-55
• Date Format …8-55
• Time Zone …8-56
• Auto Panel Reset …8-56
• Low Power Timer …8-57
• Auto Sleep …8-57
• Error Clear Timer …8-59
• Interrupt Clear Timer …8-59
Date/Time
Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. If you perform Send as E-mail, the date and
time set here will be displayed on the header. 8
CAUTION: Be sure to set Time Zone before the Date/Time setup.
Use the procedure below to set the date and time.
2 Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Date/Time.
3 Press [+] or [–] to enter the date and time respectively.
4 Press [OK].
NOTE: If you try to change the date/time when a trial application (page 8-83) is running, the If you change
Date/Time setting, trial functions will be unavailable. Are you sure? message is displayed. To change the date/
time, press [Yes].
Date Format
Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in Western notation.
Use the procedure below to select the date format.
2 Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Date Format.
3 Select [MM/DD/YYYY], [DD/MM/YYYY], or [YYYY/MM/DD] and press [OK].
8-55
Time Zone
Set the time difference in the location you are from GMT.
Use the procedure below to set the time difference.
2 Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Time Zone.
3 Select the location.
NOTE: Press [ ] or [ ] to select the location.
4 Press [Off] or [On] of Summer Time and press [OK].
NOTE: If you select a region that does not utilize summer time, the summer time setting screen will not appear.
Auto Panel Reset

If no jobs are run for a certain period of time, automatically reset settings and return to the default setting.
NOTE: Refer to page 8-15 for the default settings.
Auto Panel Reset ON/OFF
Select to use Auto Panel Reset or not.
Use the procedure below to specify the auto panel reset setting.
2 Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Auto Panel Reset.
4 Press [OK].
8-56
Panel Reset Timer
If you select [On] for Auto Panel Reset, set the amount of time to wait before Auto Panel Reset. Options are
between 5 and 495 seconds (every five seconds).
NOTE: If you select [Off] for Auto Panel Reset, the time display does not appear.
Use the procedure below to set the reset time.
2 Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Panel Reset Timer.
3 Press [+] or [–] to enter the time until Auto Panel Reset is turned on.
4 Press [OK].
Low Power Timer

You can specify the amount of time to wait before Low Power Mode.
Specify a value from 1 - 240 minutes (1 minute increments).
For more information on Low Power Mode, refer to the Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode on page 2-9. 8
Use the procedure below to set the Low Power Mode.
2 Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Low Power Timer].
3 Press [+],[–] or the numeric keys to enter the time until Low Power Mode is turned on.
4 Press [OK].
Auto Sleep
If no job runs for a certain period of time, automatically enter Sleep Mode. Refer to Sleep and Auto Sleep on
page 2-10 for Sleep.
Auto Sleep ON/OFF
Select whether to use Auto Sleep or not.
NOTE: Time remaining before Auto Sleep can be modified as necessary.
Use the procedure below to specify the auto sleep setting.
2 Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Auto Sleep.
4 Press [OK].
8-57
Sleep Timer
Set the amount of time to wait before Auto Sleep. Options are between 1 and 240 minutes (every one minute).
NOTE: If you select [Off] for Auto Sleep, the time display does not appear.
Use the procedure below to set the Auto Sleep time.
2 Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Sleep Timer.
3 Press [+] and [–] or the numeric keys to enter the time until Auto Sleep is turned on.
4 Press [OK].
Auto Error Clear

If an error occurs during printing, the print job stops to wait for the next step to be taken by the user. In the Auto
Error Clear mode, automatically clear the error after a set amount of time elapses.
The following errors are automatically cleared.
Print overrun
Memory is full
Auto Error Clear ON/OFF
Select whether to use Auto Error Clear or not.
Use the procedure below to specify the auto error clear setting.
2 Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Auto Error Clear.
4 Press [OK].
8-58
Error Clear Timer
If you select [On] for Auto Error Clear, set the amount of time to wait before automatically clearing errors. Options
are between 5 and 495 seconds (every five seconds).
NOTE: If you select [Off] for Auto Error Clear, the time display does not appear.
Use the procedure below to set the automatic error clear delay.
2 Press [ ], [Date/Timer], [ ] and then [Change] of Error Clear Timer.
3 Press [+] or [–] to enter the time until printing restarts.
4 Press [OK].
Interrupt Clear Timer

Set the period after which the machine reverts to Normal mode when it has been set to Interrupt Copy mode
and then left unused. Any period between 5 and 495 seconds (in five-second increments) can be set.
8
The procedure for setting the interrupt clear timer is explained below.
2 Press [ ], [Date/Timer], [ ] and then [Change] of Interrupt Clear Timer.
3 Press [+] or [-] to enter the time for the interrupt clear timer.
4 Press [OK].
8-59
Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One Touch Keys)

Save frequently used destinations to Address Book or One Touch Keys. The saved destinations can be
changed. The destinations are available for Send as E-mail, Send to Folder, and Fax Transmission (optional).
Adding a Destination
Add a new destination to the Address Book. There are two registering methods, contacts and groups. When
adding a group, enter the group name and select group members from the Address Book.
NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in
with administrator privileges.
Adding a contact
A maximum of 2,000 contact addresses can be registered. Each address can include the information such as
destination name, E-mail address, FTP server folder path, computer folder path, and FAX No. (optional).
Use the procedure below to register a new individual contact.
2 Press [Edit Destination], [Register/Edit] of Address Book, [Add], [Contact] and then [Next].
3 To specify the address number, press [Change] in Address Number.
4 Press [+],[–] or numeric keys to enter a particular Address Number (1-2500).
To have the number assigned automatically, enter “0000”.
NOTE: Address Number is an ID for a destination. You can select any available number out of 2,500 numbers
for contacts and 500 numbers for groups.
If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears when you press [Register]
and the number cannot be registered. If you set “0000” as the address number, the address is registered under
the lowest available number.
5 Press [OK]. The screen shown in step 3 reappears.
6 Press [Change] of Name.
7 Enter the destination name (up to 32 characters) to be displayed on the Address Book and press [OK]. The
screen shown in step 3 reappears.
8 Press [E-mail] to add an e-mail address, [SMB] to add a folder on the computer, or [FTP] to add an FTP
folder.
The procedure differs depending on the transmission method selected.
8-60
E-mail Address
Press [Change] of E-mail Address, enter the E-mail address and press [OK].The table below explains the
items to be entered.
The Folder (FTP) Address
Press [Change] of Host Name, Path, Login User Name and Login Password, enter the information for each
item and press [OK].
The table below explains the items to be entered.
Max. No. of
Item Description
Characters
Host Name* FTP server host name or IP address 70
Path Path for the file to be stored (e.g., "\User\ScanData") 128

If no path is entered, the file is stored in the home directory.
Login User Name User name FTP server login 64

8
Login Password Password for FTP server login 64
* If you specify a port number other than the default (21), use the "Host name: port number" format.
(e.g., FTPhostname:140)
Press [Connection Test] to check the connection to the FTP server you chose. If the connection fails, check the
entries you made.
8-61
The Folder (SMB) Address
Press [Change] of Host Name, Path, Login User Name and Login Password, enter the information for each
item and press [OK].
The table below explains the items to be entered.
Max. No. of
Item Description
Characters
Host Name* Host name or IP address of the sending computer 70
Path Path to the folder used to save files (e.g., “\User\ScanData”) 128
Login User Name User name for folder access 64

For example, abcdnet\james.smith
Login Password Password for folder access 64
* If you specify a port number other than the default (139), use the “Host name: port number” format.
(e.g., SMBhostname:140)
Press [Connection Test] to check the connection to the computer you chose. If the connection fails, check the
entries you made.
9 Check if the destination entry is correct and press [Register]. The destination is added to the Address Book.
Adding a Group
Compile two or more contacts into a group. Designations in the group can be added at the same time. When
adding a group, a maximum of 500 groups can be added in the Address Book.
NOTE: Before adding a group in the Address Book, the contacts to be included in the group must be added
first. Up to 100 destinations for the e-mail, 500 destinations for the FAX, and the total of 10 destinations for the
FTP and SMB can be registered per a group.
Use the procedure below to register a group.
2 Press [Edit Destination], [Register/Edit] of Address Book, [Add], [Group] and then [Next].
3 To specify the address number, press [Change] in Address Number.
8-62
4 Use [+]/[-] or the numeric keys to enter an address number (1 to 2500).
To have the number assigned automatically, set "0000".
NOTE: Address Number is an ID for a group. You can select any available number out of 2,000 numbers for
contacts and 500 numbers for groups.
If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears when you press [Register]
and the number cannot be registered. If you set "0000" as the address number, the address is registered under
the lowest available number.
5 Press [OK]. The Add Group screen reappears.
6 Press [Change] of Name.
7 Enter the group name displayed on the Address Book not more than 32 characters.
8 Press [Member].
9 Press [Add].
10 Select destinations (contacts) to add to the group. 8

NOTE: Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number. Refer to
Specifying Destination on page 3-30 for Address List.
11 Press [OK].
If you have more destinations to add, repeat Steps 9 to 11.
12 Check if the selected destination was added to the group and press [Register]. Now the group is added to
the Address Book.
Editing a Destination
Edit/delete the destinations (Contacts) you added to the Address Book.
Use the procedure below to edit a destination.
2 Press [Edit Destination] and then [Register/Edit] of Address Book.
3 Select a destination or group to edit.
NOTE: Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number. Refer to Specifying
Destination on page 3-30 for Address List.
4 Press [Detail].
The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited.
8-63
Editing a Contact
1 Change Address Number, Name and destination type and address. Refer to Adding a contact on page
8-60 for the details.
2 After you have completed the changes, press [Register].
3 Press [Yes] in the change confirmation screen to register the changed destination.
Editing a Group
1 Change Address Number and Name. Refer to Adding a Group on page 8-62 for the details.
2 Press [Member].
3 To delete any destination from the group, select the destination and press [Delete]. Press [Yes] on the
screen to confirm the deletion.
4 After you have completed the changes, press [Register].
5 Press [Yes] in the change confirmation screen to register the changed group.
Deleting a Contact or Group
Repeat Steps 1 to 3, press [Delete]. Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the deletion. Deletion is performed.
Adding a Destination on One Touch Key

Add a new destination (contact or group). A maximum of 1000 destinations can be registered.
NOTE: Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-30 for use of One Touch Key.
Use the procedure below to register a new destination under a One Touch key.
2 Press [Edit Destination] and [Register/Edit] of One Touch Key.
3 Select a One Touch Key number (0001 to 1000) for the destination. Pressing Quick No. Search key or [No.]
enables direct entry of a One Touch Key number.
Select a One Touch Key with no registered destination.
4 Press [Register/Edit]. The address book appears.
5 Select a destination (contact or group) to add to the One Touch Key number.
Pressing [Detail] shows the detailed information of the selected destination.
NOTE: Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number. Refer to Specifying
Destination on page 3-30 for Address List.
6 Press [OK]. The destination will be added to the One Touch Key.
8-64
Editing One Touch Key
Edit/delete the destinations you added to One Touch Key.
Use the procedure below to edit the One Touch key.
2 Press [Edit Destination] and then [Register/Edit] of One Touch Key.
3 Select a One Touch Key number (0001 to 1000) for the destination. Pressing Quick No. Search key or [No.]
enables direct entry of a One Touch Key number.
The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited.
Changing the Registered Information

1 Press [Register/Edit].
2 Select a new destination (Contact or group). Pressing [Detail] shows the detailed information of the
selected destination.
NOTE: Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number. Refer to
Specifying Destination on page 3-30 for Address List.
8
3 Press [OK].
4 Press [Yes] on the screen to add the destination to the One Touch Key.
Deleting the Registered Information

1 Press [Delete].
2 Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the deletion of the data registered in the One Touch Key.
8-65
Sort Settings
Select the default sort setting of the address for the address book.
Item Detail
No. Displays the destination list in order of the registered number.
Name Displays the destination list in order of the registered name.
Use the procedure below to specify the Sort settings.
2 Press [Edit Destination], [Next] of Address Book Defaults and then [Change] of Sort.
3 Select [No.] or [Name].
4 Press [OK].
Narrow Down Settings

This procedure can be used to filter (narrow down) the types of destination listed when the address book is
displayed.
Item Detail
Off Displays all destination types in the destination list.
E-mail Displays only e-mail destinations.
Folder Displays only folder (SMB or FTP) destinations.
FAX Displays only FAX destinations.
i-FAX Displays only i-FAX destinations.
Group Displays only groups.
Use the procedure below to specify the Narrow Down settings.
2 Press [Edit Destination], [Next] of Address Book Defaults and then [Change] of Narrow Down.
3 Select the type of destination filter.
4 Press [OK].
8-66
Internet Browser Setup

This procedure sets up the Internet browser application. You can specify the following Internet browser settings.
• Internet Browser Setting

• Browser Preferences
• Proxy Settings
Internet Browser Setting

This selects whether or not the Internet browser is used.
Use the procedure below to specify the Internet browser setting.
2 Press [ ] and then [Internet].
NOTE: If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user
name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to
Adding a User on page 11-5 for the default login user name and password.
3 Press [Change] of Internet Browser. 8

5 Press [OK].
Browser Preferences
This specifies Internet browser preferences such as your home page setting and how pages are displayed.
NOTE: This is not displayed if you selected Off in Internet Browser Setting (page 8-67).
Use the procedure below to set your Internet browser preferences.
3 Press [Next] of Browser Environment.
4 To set your home page, press [Change] of Home Page, press [URL], enter the URL and then press [OK].
Press [OK] again.
8-67
5 To set the text size, press [Change] of Text Size, select [Large], [Medium] or [Small] as the text size and
then press [OK].
6 To set the display mode, press [Change] of Display Mode, select [Normal], [Just-Fit Rendering] or [Smart-
Fit Rendering] as the display mode and then press [OK].
7 To specify the settings for accepting cookies, press [Change] of Cookie, select [Accept All], [Reject All] or
[Prompt before Accepting] as your cookie acceptance policy and then press [OK].
Proxy Settings
Use the procedure below to specify the proxy settings.
3 Press [Change] of Proxy and then press [On].
 To set a proxy server (HTTP)

1 Press [Keyboard] of Proxy Server (HTTP), enter the proxy address and press [OK].
2 Press [# Keys] and enter the port number.
 To set a proxy server (HTTPS)

1 Press [Keyboard] of Proxy Server (HTTPS), enter the proxy address and press [OK].
2 Press [# Keys] and enter the port number.
 To set domains for which no proxy is used

1 Press [Keyboard] of Do Not Use Proxy for Following Domains, enter the domain name and press [OK].
4 Press [OK].
8-68
Applications
You can install and use applications that will make your day-to-day use of this machine more efficient.
Installing Applications
You can install new applications.
Use the procedure below to install an application.
1 Insert the USB memory containing the application to be installed into the USB memory slot (A1).
NOTE: If Removable Memory is recognized. Displaying files. appears, press [No].
3 Press [ ] and then [Application].
8
4 Press [Add].
5 Select the application to be installed and press [Install].
You can view detailed information on the selected application by pressing [Detail].
6 When the confirmation screen appears, press [Yes].
Installation of the application begins. Depending on the application being installed, the installation may take
some time.
Once the installation ends, the original screen reappears.
7 To install another application, repeat steps 5 to 6.
8 To remove the USB memory, press [Remove Memory] and wait until the Removable Memory can be safely
removed message appears. Then remove the USB memory.
8-69
Activating/Deactivating Application
To use an application, set the application to Activate.
Use the procedure below to start using an application.
3 Select the desired application and press [Activate].
NOTE: To exit an application, press [Deactivate].
4 Enter the license key and press [Official].
Some applications do not require you to enter a license key. If the license key entry screen does not appear,
go to Step 5.
To use the application as a trial, press [Trial] without entering the license key.
IMPORTANT: If you change the date/time while using an application, you will no longer be able to use the
application.
Launching Applications
You can launch any application for which Activate is set.
Use the procedure below to launch an application.
1 Press the Application key.
A list of available applications appears on the touch panel.
2 Press the key for the application to be launched.
The application starts up.
3 To exit the application, press [✕].
4 When the application exit confirmation screen appears, press [Yes].
NOTE: The procedure for exiting some applications may differ.
8-70
Deleting Applications
Use the procedure below to delete an installed application.
IMPORTANT: Always exit the application to be deleted before deleting the application. (Refer to Activating/
Deactivating Application on page 8-70.)
NOTE: If login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name
and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding
a User on page 11-5 for the default login user name and password.
3 Select the application to be deleted and press [Delete].
4 When the deletion confirmation screen appears, press [Yes]. The application is deleted.
8-71
System Initialization
Initialize the hard disk mounted on the machine to return to the default mode.
CAUTION: System initialization will erase Custom Document Boxes, data stored in Document Box, addresses
in the Address Book, user property, account information, and settings.
NOTE: This item will not be displayed if the optional Data Security Kit is installed. Refer to the Data Security
Kit (E) Operation Guide on the bundled CD-ROM about the functions added when the Data Security Kit is
installed and related procedures.
Using KMnet Viewer allows you to back up addresses in the Address Book.
2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Execute] of System Initialization.
3 If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name
and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to
Initialization starts.
IMPORTANT: The Formatting... Do not turn off the main power switch. message appears during initialization.
Wait until initialization ends.
5 Once the initialization ends, the message Task is completed. Turn the main power switch off and on.
appears. Turn the main power switch off.
Restarting the System

Restart the CPU without turning the main power switch off. Use this to deal with any unstable operation by the
machine. (Same as the computer restart.)
Use the procedure below to restart the system.
2 Press [System] and [Execute] of Restart.
NOTE: If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter a login user
name and password, and press [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to
3 When the confirmation screen appears, press [Yes]. The system is restarted.
8-72
Network Setup
The following network settings are available.
• Checking Host Name …8-73

• TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup …8-73
• TCP/IP (IPv6) Setup …8-73
• Protocol Detail …8-75
• NetWare Setup …8-76
• AppleTalk Setup …8-76
• WSD Scan Setup …8-76
• WSD Print Setup …8-77
• Secure Protocol …8-77
• IPSec Setting …8-79
• LAN Interface Setup …8-79
Checking Host Name

Check the host name of the machine. Use the procedure below.

8
2 Press [System], [Next] of Network. Check the host name displayed under Host Name.
TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup

Set up TCP/IP to connect to the Windows network.
Refer to TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup (by Entering IP Addresses) on page 2-13 about the procedures.
TCP/IP (IPv6) Setup

Set up TCP/IP (IPv6) to connect to the network. The default settings are "TCP/IP Protocol: On, TCP/IP (IPv6):
Off. Use the procedure below.
2 Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Next] of TCP/IP Setting.
5 Press [Next] of IPv6.
7 Press [On]. IP Address (Link Local) appears.
8 Press [OK].
9 After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again.
For detailed information on restarting the system, refer to Restarting the System on page 8-72.
8-73
Manual Setting (IPv6)
Manually specify the IP address, prefix length, and gateway address of TCP/IP (IPv6). The manual setting is
available when selecting [On] for TCP/IP (IPv6). Use the procedure below.
4 Press [Next] of Manual Setting.
5 Press [IP Address (Manual)] to enter IP address. The format of the IPv6 address is a sequence of numbers
(128 bit in total) separated by colons, e.g. 2001:db8:3c4d:15::1a2c:1a1f.
6 Press [OK].
Press [# Keys] of Prefix Length (0 - 128) to enter the prefix length using the numeric keys.
7 Press [Default Gateway] to enter the default gateway.
8 Check that all the entries are correct and Press [OK].
RA (Stateless) Settings
Select whether or not to use RA (Stateless). The RA (Stateless) settings are available when selecting [On] for
TCP/IP (IPv6). The default setting is On. Use the procedure below.
4 Press [Change] of RA(Stateless).
5 Press [On] or [Off] of RA (Stateless). When selecting [On], IP Address 1 to 5 (Stateless) appears.
6 Press [OK].
DHCP (IPv6) Settings
Select whether or not to use the DHCP (IPv6) server. The DHCP (IPv6) Settings are available when selecting
[On] for TCP/IP (IPv6). The default setting is On. Use the procedure below.
4 Press [Change] of DHCP.
5 Press [On] or [Off] of DHCP. When selecting [On], IP Address (Stateful) appears.
8-74
6 Press [OK].
Protocol Detail
The table below lists the network related function settings. The network related functions are available when
TCP/IP is On.
Default Restarting
Item Description
Setting the System*
NetBEUI Selects whether or not to receive documents using On Y

NetBEUI.
LPD Select whether or not to receive documents using LPD as On Y

the network protocol.
SMTP Select whether or not to send e-mail using SMTP. Off N

(E-mail TX)
POP3 Select whether or not to receive e-mail using POP3. Off N

(E-mail RX)
8
FTP Client Select whether or not to send documents using FTP. On Y
(Transmission) When selecting [On], set the FTP Port Number. Use the
FTP default port 21. Port:21
FTP Server Select whether or not to receive documents using FTP. On Y

(Reception)
SMB Client Select whether or not to send documents using SMB. On N

(Transmission) When selecting [On], set the SMB default Port Number.
Use the SMB default port 139. For Windows Vista, use 445. Port:139
i-FAX Select whether or not to use i-FAX. On N
LDAP Select whether or not to use LDAP. Off N
SNMP Select whether or not to communicate using SNMP. On Y
SNMPv3 Select whether or not to communicate using SNMPv3. Off Y
HTTP Select whether or not to communicate using HTTP. On Y
HTTPS Select whether or not to communicate using HTTPS. On Y

SSL must be set to [On] in SSL Setup on page 8-77.
IPP Select whether or not to communicate using IPP. When Off Y

selecting [On], set the IPP default Port Number. Use the
IPP default port 631. Port:631
IPP over SSL Select whether or not to use IPP over SSL. Off Y
SSL must be set to [On] in SSL Setup on page 8-77.
Raw Port Select whether or not to receive documents using Raw Port. On Y
* Y: The machine must be restarted after the setting is changed.

N: The machine does not need to be restarted after the setting is changed.
8-75
The following procedure is an example for specifying the SMTP (E-mail TX) settings.
2 Press [System] and then [Next] of Network to display the network settings screen.
3 Display the item you want to set and press [Change] for that item.
In this example, press [Change] of SMTP (E-mail TX).
5 Press [OK].
NetWare Setup
Select the NetWare network connection. After that, select frame types for NetWare network from Auto,
Ethernet-II, 802.3, 802.2, or SNAP. The default settings are "On, Frame Type: Auto".
2 Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Change] of NetWare.
3 Press [On].
4 Press the key for the frame type you want to use.
5 Press [OK].
AppleTalk Setup
Select the Apple Talk network connection.
Refer to AppleTalk Setup on page 2-15 about the procedures.
WSD Scan Setup

Select whether or not to use WSD Scan. The default setting is On. Use the procedure below.
2 Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Change] of WSD Scan.
4 Press [OK].
8-76
WSD Print Setup

Select whether or not to use WSD Print. The default setting is On. Use the procedure below.
2 Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Change] of WSD Print.
4 Press [OK].
Secure Protocol
Encrypt the communication between your PC and the machine using the SSL encryption. After changing the
setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again. For detailed information on restarting
the system, refer to Restarting the System on page 8-72.
The following Secure Protocol settings are available.
• SSL Setup …8-77

• IPP Security Setup …8-77 8
• HTTP Security Setup …8-78
• LDAP Security Setup …8-78
SSL Setup
Select whether or not to use SSL. The default setting is On. Use the procedure below.
2 Press [System], [Next] of Network, [Next] of Secure Protocol, and then [Next] of SSL.
4 Press [OK].
IPP Security Setup
Select the IPP security level. This setup is available when SSL is On. The default setting is IPP over SSL Only.
NOTE: IPP must be set to [On] in Protocol Detail on page 8-75.
2 Press [System], [Next] of Network, [Next] of Secure Protocol, and then [Change] of IPP Security.
8-77
3 Press [IPP over SSL Only] or [IPP or IPP over SSL].
4 Press [OK].
HTTP Security Setup
Select the HTTP security level. This setup is available when SSL is On. The default setting is HTTPS Only.
NOTE: HTTP must be set to [On] in Protocol Detail on page 8-75.
2 Press [System], [Next] of Network, [Next] of Secure Protocol, and then [Change] of HTTPS Security.
3 Press [HTTP or HTTPS] or [HTTPS Only].
4 Press [OK].
LDAP Security Setup
Select the type of encryption according to the type of security employed by the LDAP server. This setup is
available when SSL is On. The default setting is Off.
NOTE: LDAP must be set to [On] in Protocol Detail on page 8-75.
Item Description
Off Do not use security employed by the LDAP server.
LDAP over SSL Use implicit mode for data communication. The server provides services
using the LDAP over SSL port (636). Encryption is applied to any data
communication using this port.
LDAPv3/TLS Use explicit mode for data communication. Select this if the server supports
the start TLS command. This uses the same port (389) as LDAP.
2 Press [System], [Next] of Network, [Next] of Secure Protocol, and then [Change] of LDAP Security.
3 Press [Off], [LDAP over SSL] or [LDAPv3/TLS].
8-78
4 Press [OK].
IPSec Setting
Sets up IPSec. The default setting is Off. Use the procedure below.
2 Press [System], [Next] of Network, and then [Change] of IPSec.
3 Press [On].
4 Press [OK].
8
LAN Interface Setup
Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used. The default setting is Auto. Use the procedure below.
2 Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Change] of LAN Interface.
3 Select [Auto], [10BASE-T Half], [10BASE-T Full], [100BASE-TX Half] or [100BASE-TX Full] as the LAN
interface.
4 Press [OK].
8-79
Interface Block Setting

This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB hosts or
optional interfaces.
The following interface block settings are available:
• USB Host (USB memory slot setting)

• USB Device (USB interface setting)
• Optional interface (Optional interface card setting)
USB Host (USB memory slot setting)

This locks and protects the USB memory slot (A1) or USB port (A2) (USB host). The default setting is Unblock.
Use the procedure below to specify the USB Host setting.
2 Press [System], [Next] of Interface Block Setting and then [Change] of USB Host.
3 Press [Block].
4 Press [OK].
USB Device (USB interface setting)

This locks and protects the USB interface connector (B1) (USB Device). The default setting is Unblock.
Use the procedure below to specify the USB Device setting.

2 Press [System], [Next] of Interface Block Setting and then [Change] of USB Device.
3 Press [Block].
4 Press [OK].
Optional interface (Optional interface card setting)

This locks and protects the optional interface slots (OPT1 or OPT2). The default setting is Unblock.
Use the procedure below to specify the optional interface setting.

2 Press [System], [Next] of Interface Block Setting and then [Change] of Optional Interface 1 or Optional
Interface 2.
3 Press [Block].
4 Press [OK].
8-80
Security Level (Security Level setting)

The Security Level setting is primarily a menu option used by service personnel for maintenance work. There is
no need for customers to use this menu.
Document Guard Setting

When the optional Printed Document Guard Kit is installed, the machine prevents the unauthorized copying and/
or transmission of documents that contain important confidential or personal information.
Use the Security Watermark of Advanced in KX DRIVER to embed the guard pattern in a document. (Refer to
the Printer Driver User Guide for details.)
We suggest you to confirm how the machine performs this function on your environment.
Canceled.
copy
Print the guard
pattern using KX
send
or fax
8
DRIVER.
Machine Operation after Detecting the Document Guard Pattern
Item Description
Common operation Displays the message that indicates the machine detected the document
guard pattern and stops scanning the remaining documents.
Copy functions Prints the documents in blank from the position that the machine detected
the document guard pattern.
Document Box functions Does not store the documents in the hard disk
Send functions Cancels the job.*
FAX functions Does not send the documents.

* Sends the documents that are scanned before the document guard pattern is detected if you have
selected File Separation. If not, every documents will not to be sent.
8-81
Limitations:
- Scanning speed will be limited to the speed of scanning 600 dpi image. (Printing speed will not
be limited.)
- FAX transmission will be limited to the memory transmission.
Note:
- The Printed Document Guard Kit should not fully prevents a leak of information. We do not
guarantee any loss incurred while using this feature or when malfunction occurred with this
feature.
- The guard pattern printed on the colored paper or paper that is decorated with special design
may not be detected.
- We do not guarantee the integrity of the detection. If the malfunction occurs, contact your service
representative.
Use the procedure below to specify the Document Guard setting.
2 Press [System] and then [Change] of Document Guard.
3 Press [On].
4 Press [OK].
8-82
Optional Functions
You can use the optional applications installed on this machine.
Overview of the Applications

The applications listed below are installed on this machine.
You can use these applications for a limited period on a trial basis.
• Printed Document Guard Kit
This prevents the unauthorized copying and/or transmission of documents that contain important confidential or
personal information. When a document is printed from a computer, this feature imprints a special pattern on
the document. When anyone attempts to copy or send that document on this machine, the machine detects the
pattern and protects the information by printing the document in blank, prohibiting transmission.
NOTE: Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ
depending on the application.
Starting Application Use

Use the procedure below to start using an application.
8
2 Press [System] and then [Next] of Optional Function.
3 Select the desired application and press [Activate].
4 In the license key entry screen, press [Official].
Some applications do not require you to enter a license key. If the license key entry screen does not appear,
go to Step 5.
To use the application as a trial, press [Trial] without entering the license key.
IMPORTANT: If you change the date/time while using an application, you will no longer be able to use the
application.
8-83
Checking Application Details

Use the procedure below to check the details of an application.
2 Press [System] and then [Next] of Optional Function.
3 Select the application you want to check the details of and press [Detail].
You can now view detailed information on the selected application.
Accessibility Display (Enlarged Touch Panel Display)

Touch panel characters and key displays can be enlarged. Use the numeric keys to select items and proceed
to the next screen.
NOTE: Accessibility can be used only with Copying and Sending registered on the Quick Setup screen.
To set functions other than those displayed in the accessibility screens, you must return to the original display.
Press the Accessibility Display key again.
Press the Accessibility Display key when in the Copy

or Send (i.e. the Copy or Send key indicator is On).
Ready to copy. Copies Enlarged keys or characters appear on the touch panel.
Quantity Operation can also be made by pressing any numeric

key corresponding to the number displayed. (e.g. Press
Auto 100% Normal 0 the 2 key to adjust zoom.)
Paper Zoom Density
Selection Follow the instructions on the screen for subsequent
operations.
2-sided 2 in 1 Off
>>2-sided
Duplex Combine Staple/Punch
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
8-84
9 Maintenance
This chapter describes cleaning and toner replacement.
• Cleaning..............................................................................................9-2
• Toner Container and Waste Toner Box Replacement .........................9-8
9-1
Maintenance
Cleaning
Clean the machine regularly to ensure optimum output quality.
CAUTION: For safety, always unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine.
Original Cover / Glass Platen

Wipe the backside of the original cover, the inside of the document processor and the glass platen with a soft
cloth dampened with alcohol or mild detergent.
IMPORTANT: Do not use thinner or other organic solvents.
Original Cover
Glass Platen
9-2
Maintenance
Slit Glass/Dual scanning area

If black streaks or dirt appears in copies when using the
Clean the slit glass. optional document processor, clean the slit glass with
1.Open the document processor. the supplied cleaning cloth. The message Clean the slit
glass. may be displayed if the slit glass requires
2.Clean the surface of the slit glass located
on the left side with the supplied dry cloth.
3.Close the document processor and press [End].
Note that dirty glass and sheet may cause
black streaks to appear in the output.
cleaning.
When using the document processor to allow dual

scanning, clean the dual scanning unit also.
02/03
Hold End
IMPORTANT: Wipe the slit glasses with the dry
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
accessory cloth. Do not use water,soap or solvents for
cleaning.
1 Remove the cloth from the cleaning cloth

compartment.
2 Open the document processor and wipe the slit 9

glass (a).
3 Wipe the white guide (b) on the document

processor.
b
4 When using the document processor to allow dual

scanning, open the top cover of the document
processor.
9-3
Maintenance
5 Wipe the slit glass.
6 Wipe the white roller.
7 Close the document processor top cover and return

the cleaning cloth to the cleaning cloth
compartment.
8 Press [End].
9-4
Maintenance
Separator
Clean the separator regularly (at least monthly) to ensure optimum output quality.
1 Open the front cover.
2 Remove cleaning brush (blue colored).
9
3 Pull up and open left cover 1.
4 As shown in the figure, clean dirt from the separator

by moving the brush from side to side along the
separator.
9-5
Maintenance
5 Put away the cleaning brush, press the specified

position of the front cover and left cover 1 to close.
Transfer Roller
2 Remove the cleaning brush (blue colored).
3 Pull up and open left cover 1.
9-6
Maintenance
4 As shown in the figure, clean dirt from the transfer

roller by moving the brush from side to side along
the roller while rotating the roller by turning the gear
at the left end of the roller.
5 Put away the cleaning brush, press the specified

position of the front cover and left cover 1 to close.
9-7
Maintenance
Toner Container and Waste Toner Box Replacement

When the touch panel displays Add toner, replace the toner.
Every time you replace the toner container, be sure to clean the parts as instructed below. Dirty parts may
deteriorate output quality.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks
may cause burns.
Toner Container Replacement

2 Turn the toner container release lever to the vertical

position.
9-8
Maintenance
3 Open the provided plastic disposal bag and place it

at the toner container slot.Open the provided
plastic disposal bag and place it at the toner
container slot.
4 Remove the old toner container by holding the

handle and place it in the provided plastic disposal
bag.
5 Hold the new toner container in both hands and

shake it from side to side several times.
9-9
Maintenance
6 Hold the new toner container in both hands and

gently push it in.
7 Turn the toner container release lever to the

horizontal position.
Use the same procedure to replace the other color

toner containers.
8 Close the front cover.
NOTE: Return the exhausted toner container and

waste toner box to your dealer or service
representative. The collected toner container and
waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in
accordance with the relevant regulations
9-10
Maintenance
Waste Toner Box Replacement

2 Press the release button (1) and pull out the waste
toner tray (2).
3 Cap the old waste toner box.
4 Remove the old waste toner box at an angle and

place it in the plastic disposal bag provided.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to incinerate the toner

container or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks
may cause burns.
9-11
Maintenance
5 Open the new waste toner box cap.
6 Install a new waste toner box.
7 Press on the left edge of the new waste toner box

to lock it.
8 Press the specified position to close the waste

toner tray. When the tray reaches the correct
position, it locks in place with a clicking sound.
9 Close the front cover.
NOTE: Return the exhausted toner container and

waste toner box to your dealer or service
representative. The collected toner container and
waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in
accordance with the relevant regulations.
9-12
10 Troubleshooting
This chapter explains how to solve problems with the machine.
• Solving Malfunctions .........................................................................10-2

• Responding to Error Messages ........................................................10-6
• Clearing Paper Jams ......................................................................10-15
10-1
Troubleshooting
Solving Malfunctions
The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving.
If a problem occurs with your machine, look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the
following pages. If the problem persists, contact your Service Representative.
Reference
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
The operation panel Is the machine plugged in? Plug the power cord into an AC —
does not respond outlet.
when the main power
switch is turned on.
Pressing the Start key Is there a message on the Determine appropriate response to 10-6
does not produce touch panel? the message and respond
copies. accordingly.
Is the machine in Sleep Press the Power key to recover 2-10
mode? the machine from Sleep mode. The
machine will be ready to copy
within a minute.
Blank sheets are Are the originals loaded When placing originals on the 2-32
ejected. correctly? platen, place them face-down and
align them with the original size
indicator plates.
When placing originals in the 2-34
optional document processor,
place them face-up.
Printouts are too light. Is the machine in Auto Set the correct density level for —
Density mode? auto density.
Is the machine in Manual Use [Image Quality] to set the 3-9
Density mode? correct density level.
When changing the default density —
level, adjust the density manually
and choose the desired level.
Is the toner distributed evenly Shake the toner container from 9-8
within the toner container? side to side about several times.
Is there a message indicating Replace the toner container. 9-8
the addition of toner?
Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. 2-20
Is the drum dirty? Carry out Drum Refresh. 8-45
Carry out Developer Refresh. 8-53
Is the scanner dirty? Carry out Laser Scanner Cleaning. 8-53
Is EcoPrint mode enabled? Disable EcoPrint mode. 8-36
10-2
Troubleshooting
Reference
Page
Printouts are too dark. Is the machine in Auto Set the correct density level for —
Density mode? auto density.
Is the machine in Manual Use [Image Quality] to set the 3-9
Density mode? correct density level.
When changing the default density —
level, adjust the density manually
and choose the desired level.
Copies have a moire Is the original a printed Set the image quality to [Print 3-9
pattern (dots grouped photograph? Photo].
together in patterns
and not aligned
uniformly).
Printouts are not Did you choose appropriate Select appropriate image quality. 9-2
clear. image quality for the original?
Printouts are dirty. Is the platen or the document Clean the platen or the document 9-2
processor dirty? processor.
Is the transfer roller dirty? Brush the transfer roller clean. 9-6
Is the drum dirty? Carry out Drum Refresh. 8-45
Carry out Developer Refresh. 8-53
Is the scanner dirty? Carry out Laser Scanner Cleaning. 8-53
Is the Printed Document Disable the Printed Document Appendix-
Guard Kit enabled? Guard Kit. 6 10
Printouts are fuzzy. Is the machine being used in Carry out Drum Refresh. 8-45
very humid conditions?
Images are skewed. Are the originals placed When placing originals on the 2-34
correctly? platen, align them with the original
size indicator plates.
When placing originals in the 2-34
optional document processor, align
the original width guides securely
before placing the originals.
Is the paper loaded Check the position of the paper 2-35
correctly? width guides.
10-3
Troubleshooting
Reference
Page
Paper often jams. Is the paper loaded Load the paper correctly. 2-21
correctly?
Is the paper of the supported Remove the paper, turn it over, and 2-21
type? Is it in good condition? reload it.
Is the paper curled, folded or Replace the paper with new paper. 2-21
wrinkled?
Are there any loose scraps or Remove any jammed paper. 10-15
jammed paper in the
machine?
Printouts from the Is the slit glass dirty? Clean the slit glass. 9-3
document processor
have black lines.
Printouts are Is the paper separator of the Clean the paper separator. 9-5
wrinkled. paper feed unit dirty?
Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. 2-20
Is the paper set in a proper Change the orientation in which the —
orientation? paper is positioned.
Cannot print. Is the machine plugged in? Plug the power cord into an AC —
outlet.
Is the machine powered on? Turn on the main power switch. 3-2
Is the printer cable Connect the correct printer cable 2-3
connected? securely.
Was the machine powered Power on the machine after 2-3
on before the printer cable connecting the printer cable.
was connected?
Is Press Status Key... Press the Status/Job Cancel key, —
displayed at the top of the [Printing Jobs], and then [Resume
screen? All Print Jobs] to restart printing.
Documents are Are the application software Check that the printer driver and —
printed improperly. settings at the PC set application software settings are
properly? set properly.
While the operation Is the operation panel Check the panel lock setting in KYOCERA
panel was being used, locked? COMMAND CENTER and change COMMAND
the keys locked up the setting if necessary. CENTER
and do not respond Operation
when pressed. Guide
10-4
Troubleshooting
Reference
Page
Cannot print with USB Was the USB memory Format the USB memory with this 6-20
memory. formatted with a machine machine.
other than this machine?
Is the USB host blocked? Select Unblock in the USB host 8-80
settings.
Check that the USB memory — —
is securely plugged into the
machine.
When displaying an Have you selected Select a scan resolution other than —
image sent from the 200×100dpi Normal or 200×100dpi Normal or 200×400dpi
machine on the PC, an 200×400dpi Super Fine for Super Fine when sending an
image size is shrunk the scan resolution? image.
vertically or
horizontally.
USB memory not Check that the USB memory — —
recognized. is securely plugged into the
machine.
Is the USB host blocked? Select Unblock in the USB host 8-80
settings.
Perform Gray Over long periods of use, the Whenever the printed hues differ 8-51
Adjustment in the effects of the ambient from the original document or
System Menu. is temperature and humidity image, carry out Gray Adjustment.
displayed. can cause color output hues
to vary slightly. 10
Performing Color The machine is carrying out a This is not a fault.Resume 8-50
Calibration... appears calibration process to ensure continuous copying when the
during continuous color stability. calibration process ends.
copying and copying
stops.
White or color streaks The inside of the machine Carry out Laser Scanner Cleaning. 8-53
appear on prints. may be dirty.
10-5
Troubleshooting
Responding to Error Messages

If the touch panel displays any of these messages, follow the corresponding procedure.
Alphanumeric
Reference
Error Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions
Page
Acceptable staple Is the acceptable staple Press [Continue] to print without —

count exceeded. count exceeded? For stapling.
details, refer to Press [Cancel] to cancel the job.
Specifications on page
Appendix-24.
Add paper in cassette Is the indicated cassette out Load paper. 2-20
1. of paper?
Add paper in Multi Is the paper of the selected Load the paper in the multi purpose 2-24
Purpose tray. size loaded in the multi tray which is of the size and type
purpose tray? indicated on the touch panel.
Add staples. Has any of the document If the staples are depleted, the —
finisher run out of staples? machine will stop and the location of
staple depletion will be indicated on
the touch panel.
Leave the machine on and follow the
instruction to replace the staple case.
Press [Continue] to print without
stapling.
Press [Cancel] to cancel the job.
Add toner. – Replace the toner container. 9-8
Box is not found. – This job is canceled because the —

specified box cannot be found. Press
[End].
Box limit exceeded. – Document box is full, and no further —

storage is available; Job is canceled.
Press [End].
– Repeat Copy box is full, and no —

further repeat copy is available.
Press [Continue] to print scanned
pages.
Cannot connect to – An error has occurred when 10-14

Authentication connecting to the authentication
Server. server. Refer to Responding to
Authentication Server Connection
Error for the error message and
corrective actions.
10-6
Troubleshooting
Reference
Page
Cannot duplex print Did you select a paper size/ Select the available paper type. 3-12
on this paper. media type that cannot be Press [Continue] to print without
duplex printed? using Duplex.
Cannot execute this – This job is canceled because it is —

job. restricted by Job Accounting. Press
[End].
Cannot offset this Did you select a paper size/ Select the available paper size/type. 3-14
paper. media type that cannot be Press [Continue] to print without
offset? using Offset.
Cannot print the – Only one copy is available due to —

specified number of processing too many jobs in parallel.
copies. Press [Continue] to continue printing.
Cannot staple at the Have you selected a Select a position that can be stapled. —
specified position. position that cannot be Press [Continue] to print without
stapled? using Staple.
Cannot staple this Did you select a paper size/ Select the available paper size/type. —
paper. type that cannot be stapled? Press [Continue] to print without
using Staple.
Check the cover. Is there any cover which is Close the cover indicated on the —
open? touch panel.
Check the document Is the document processor Close the document processor. — 10
processor. open?
Is the top cover of the Close the top cover of the document 10-28
document processor open? processor.
Check the finisher. Is the document finisher set Set the document finisher correctly. —
correctly? For details, refer to the respective
Operation Guides.
Clean the slit glass. – Clean the slit glass using the cleaning 9-3
cloth supplied with the document
processor.
Confidential – The machine detects the documents 8-81

document is guard pattern. The scanned
detected. document is printed in blank and
sending of the document is canceled.
Failed to specify Job – The job is canceled. Press [End]. —

Accounting.
Failed to store job – The job is canceled. Press [End]. —

retention data.
10-7
Troubleshooting
Reference
Page
FAX box limit – FAX box is full, and no further storage —

exceeded. is available. The job is canceled.
Press [End]. Try to perform the job
again after printing or deleting data
from the FAX box.
Finisher tray is full of Is the acceptable storage Remove paper from the document —
paper. capacity exceeded for the finisher tray.
document finisher tray? If printing can be restarted, the touch
panel display will prompt you to press
[Continue]. Then press [Continue].
Hard Disk error. – An error has occurred on the hard —

Job is canceled. disk. The possible error codes and
Press [End]. their descriptions are as follows.
01: Initialization error. Initialize the
hard disk.
04: Insufficient space on the hard
disk to complete this operation. Move
or delete data stored on the hard disk
to increase available space.
Incorrect account ID. – The Account ID does not match. —

Check the registered Account ID.
Incorrect box – Enter the correct password. —

password.
Incorrect Login User – Enter correct login user name or —

Name or Password. password.
Job Accounting Is the acceptable printing The printing count exceeded the —
restriction exceeded. count restricted by Job acceptable count restricted by Job
Accounting exceeded? Accounting. Cannot print any more.
This job is canceled. Press [End].
Job separator is full Is the maximum capacity of Take some paper out of the job —
of paper. the job separator exceeded? separator. Printing then resumes.
KPDL error. – PostScript error has occurred. —

The job is canceled. Press [End].
Machine failure. – Internal error has occurred. Make a —

note of the error code displayed on
the touch panel. Turn off the
machine, unplug the power cord, and
contact your Service Representative.
Maximum number of Is the acceptable scanning Only one copy of the scanned pages —
scanned pages. count exceeded? is available. Press [Continue] to print,
send or store the scanned pages.
Press [Cancel] to cancel printing,
sending or storing.
10-8
Troubleshooting
Reference
Page
Memory is full. – Unable to continue the job as the —

memory is used up.
Press [Continue] to print the scanned
pages. The print job cannot be
processed completely.
– The process cannot be performed —

due to insufficient memory. If only
[End] is available, press [End]. The
job will be canceled.
Paper jam. – If a paper jam occurs, the machine 10-15

will stop and the location of the jam
will be indicated on the touch panel.
instruction to remove the jammed
paper.
Removable memory – This job is canceled. Press [End]. —

error.
Removable memory – This job is canceled. Press [End]. —

is full.
Replace all originals – Remove originals from the document 2-34

and press [Continue]. processor, put them back in their
original order, and place them again.
Press [Continue] to resume printing.
10
Replace the waste – The waste toner box is full. Replace 9-8
toner box. the waste toner box.
Remove all originals Are there any originals left in Remove originals from the document —
in the document the document processor? processor.
processor.
Scanner memory is – Scanning cannot be performed due —

full. to insufficient memory of scanner.
Only one copy of the scanned pages
is available. Press [Continue] to print,
send or store the scanned pages.
Press [Cancel] to cancel the printing
job.
Send error. – An error has occurred during 10-11

transmission.Refer to Responding to
Send Error for the error code and
corrective actions.
Set the waste toner – The waste toner box is not installed 9-8
box. correctly. Set it correctly.
10-9
Troubleshooting
Reference
Page
Staple jam. – If a staple jam occurs, the machine —

will stop and the location of the jam
will be indicated on the touch panel.
instruction to remove the jammed
staple.
System error. – System error has occurred. Confirm —

that the Attention indicator is lighting,
and then turn the main power switch
off and on.
The phone receiver is – Put down the receiver. —

off the hook.
The removable Is the removable memory Use the removable memory —

memory is not formatted by this machine? formatted by this machine.
formatted.
Top tray of the – Remove paper from the top tray and —
machine is full of press [Continue].
paper.
Unknown Toner Is the unauthorized product Install our genuine product that is —
Installed. PC installed? specified for this machine.
Warning low memory. – Job cannot be started. Try again later. —
10-10
Troubleshooting
Responding to Send Error

When an error occurs during transmission, Send Error appears. Check the error code and error message below,
and follow the corresponding corrective actions.
Error
Error Message Corrective Actions Reference Page
Code
1101 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the host name of the SMTP 2-18
Failed to send i-FAX. server on the COMMAND CENTER.
Failed to send via FTP. Check the host name of FTP.
Failed to send via SMB. Check the host name of SMB.
1102 Failed to send via SMB. Check the SMB settings. 3-26
- Login user name and login
password
* If the sender is a domain user,
specify the domain name.
- Host name
- Path
Failed to send the e-mail. Check the followings on the

Failed to send i-FAX. COMMAND CENTER.
- SMTP login user name and login
password
- POP3 login user name and login
password
Failed to send via FTP. Check the FTP settings.

10
password
- Path
- Folder share permissions of the
recipient
1103 Failed to send via SMB. Check the SMB settings. 3-26
password
- Path
recipient
Failed to send via FTP. Check the FTP settings. 3-26

- Path
recipient
10-11
Troubleshooting
Error
Code
1104 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the e-mail address. 3-25
* If the address is rejected by the
domain, you cannot send the e-mail.
Failed to send i-FAX. Check the i-FAX address. FAX System (S)
*If the address is rejected by the Operation Guide
domain, you cannot send i-FAX. Chapter 8
"Internet Faxing
(i-FAX) (Option)"
1105 Failed to send via SMB. Select [On] of the SMB settings on 2-18
the COMMAND CENTER.
Failed to send the e-mail. Select [On] of the SMTP settings on

the COMMAND CENTER.
Failed to send via FTP. Select [On] of the FTP settings on the
COMMAND CENTER.
Failed to send i-FAX. Select [On] of the i-FAX settings on FAX System (S)
the COMMAND CENTER. Operation Guide
Chapter 8
"Internet Faxing
(i-FAX) (Option)"
1106 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the sender address of SMTP 2-18
Failed to send i-FAX. on the COMMAND CENTER.
1131 Failed to send via FTP. Select [On] of the secure protocol 2-18
settings on the COMMAND
CENTER.
1132 Failed to send via FTP. Check the followings of the FTP 2-18
server.
- Is FTPS available?
- Is the encryption available?
2101 Failed to send via SMB. Check the network and SMB settings. 2-18
Failed to send via FTP. Check the network and FTP settings.
- The network cable is connected.
- The hub is not operating properly.
- The server is not operating properly.
- Host name and IP address
- Port number
Failed to send the e-mail. Check the network and COMMAND

Failed to send i-FAX. CENTER.
- POP3 server name of the POP3
user
- SMTP server name
10-12
Troubleshooting
Error
Code
2102 Failed to send via FTP. Check the followings of the FTP –
2103 server.
- Is FTP available?
Failed to send the e-mail. Check the network.

Failed to send i-FAX. - The network cable is connected.
2201 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the network. –

Failed to send via FTP. - The network cable is connected.
Failed to send via SMB. - The hub is not operating properly.
Failed to send i-FAX. - The server is not operating properly.
2202 Failed to send the e-mail.

Failed to send via FTP.
Failed to send i-FAX.
2203 Failed to send via FTP.

Failed to send via SMB.
2231 Failed to send via FTP.
2204 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the e-mail size limit of the 2-18
Failed to send i-FAX. SMTP settings on the COMMAND
CENTER.
3101 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the authentication methods of – 10

Failed to send i-FAX. both the sender and the recipient.
Failed to send via FTP. Check the network.

3201 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the SMTP user authentication –
Failed to send i-FAX. method of the recipient.
5101 – Turn the main power switch off and –

5102 back on. If this error occurs several
5103 times, make a note of the displayed
error code and contact your service
5104
representative.
7102
720f
9181 – The scanned original exceeds the –

acceptable number of pages of 999.
Send the excess pages separately.
10-13
Troubleshooting
Responding to Authentication Server Connection Error

If an error occurs when connecting to the authentication server, check the error message and follow the
corresponding corrective action appears on the operation panel.
Symptom Corrective Actions Reference Page
Cannot connect to Set machine time to match the 2-12

authentication server. server’s time.
Cannot connect to Check the domain name. 11-2
authentication server.
Check the host name. 11-2
Check the connection status with the —
server.
Responding to an Attention Indicator Flashes

If an attention indicator flashes, press [Status/Job Cancel] to check an error message. If the message is not
indicated on the touch panel when [Status/Job Cancel] is pressed or the attention indicator flashes for 1.5
seconds, check the following.
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference Page
Cannot send fax. Is the modular cord Connect the modular —

connected correctly? cord correctly.
Is Permitted FAX No. or Check Permitted FAX FAX System (S)
Permitted ID No. No. and Permitted ID Operation Guide
registered correctly? No.. Chapter 6 "Registering
Permit FAX No." and
"Registering Permit ID
No."
Has a communication Check error codes in the FAX System (S)
error occurred? TX/RX Result Report Operation Guide
and Activity Report. If Appendix
the error code starts with "Error Code List"
"U" or "E", perform the
corresponding
procedure.
Is the destination FAX Send again. —
line busy?
Does the destination Send again. —
FAX machine respond?
Is there an error other Contact your Service —
than above? Representative.
10-14
Troubleshooting
Clearing Paper Jams

Job No.: 000021 Job Name: doc200810101010 User Name: Mike
If a paper jam occurs, the touch panel will display Paper
Paper jam. Jam. and the machine will stop. Refer to these
1.Remove any paper that is inside.
procedures to remove the jammed paper.
2.Open the fuser cover and remove
the jammed paper.
3.Open cassette 1.
4.Remove the paper.
5.Set the cassette
JAM
and close the cover.
03/05
Hold
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Jam Location Indicators

If a paper jam occurs, the location of the jam will be displayed as the following figure with a letter corresponding
to the affected component in the machine. Clearing instructions will also be displayed.
Job No.: 000021 Job Name: doc200810101010 User Name: Mike
Paper jam.
1.Remove the paper.
2.Open the fuser cover and remove
the jammed paper.
H
3.Close the cover.
JAM
I
G
01/03 I G
I I E G
Hold
I
10/10/2008 10:10 E
Status
E
I D D D
E
I
F
A
B
10
I F
C
I
C
I
Paper Jam
Paper Jam Location Reference Page
Location Indicator
A Cassette 1 10-16
B Cassette 2 10-17
C Cassette 3 or 4 (Option) 10-18
D Multi Purpose Tray 10-19
E Duplex unit 10-23
F Inside the left cover 1, 3 or 4 10-22
G Fixing unit 10-26
H Document processor (Option) 10-28
I Document finisher (Option) 10-29
10-15
Troubleshooting
After you remove the jam, the machine will warm up again and the error message will be cleared. The machine
resumes with the page which jam has occurred.
Precautions with Paper Jams

• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
• Discard paper that has jammed in the optional document finisher. A page affected by a paper jam will be
printed again.
CAUTION: The fixing unit is extremely hot. Take sufficient care when working in this area, as there is
a danger of getting burned.
Cassette 1
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in cassette 1.
1 Pull up left cover 1 lever and open the left cover 1.
2 Remove the jammed paper.
3 Pull out cassette 1.
10-16
Troubleshooting
If the paper tears, remove every loose scrap from

inside the machine.
5 Push cassette 1 back in place securely.
6 Press the specified position to close left cover 1.
Cassette 2
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in cassette 2.
1 Open left cover 3.

10
10-17
Troubleshooting

inside the machine.
6 Close left cover 3.
Optional Cassettes 3 and 4

Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in cassettes 3 or 4 when using the optional paper feeder.
1 Open left cover 4.

inside the machine.
10-18
Troubleshooting
3 Pull out the cassette in use.
5 Push the cassette back in place securely.
6 Close left cover 4.
Multi Purpose Tray

Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the multi purpose tray. 10
1 Remove all papers from the multi purpose tray.
2 If paper is jammed inside, pull the paper toward you

to remove.
10-19
Troubleshooting

inside the machine.
5 Open the feed guide B1.

inside the machine.
10-20
Troubleshooting
8 Turn the lower green knob (B2) to the left at least

10 times.
If you cannot remove the paper, proceed with the

next step.
10
10 Pull out paper feed unit (B3).
10-21
Troubleshooting
11 Open paper feed unit cover (B4) and remove the

jammed paper.
12 Push paper feed unit (B3) back in place, and push

the cassette back in place securely.
Inside the Left Covers 1, 3 and 4

Follow the steps below to clear paper jams inside left cover 1, 3 or 4 when using the optional paper feeder.
1 Open the left cover where the paper is jammed

inside.

inside the machine.
3 Close the left cover.
10-22
Troubleshooting
Duplex Unit
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the duplex unit.
1 Pull up left cover 1 lever and open the left cover.
10
10-23
Troubleshooting
Duplex Unit and Cassette 1

Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in duplex unit and cassette 1.
1 Pull up left cover 1 lever and open the left cover.
4 If the left cover 2 indicator is flashing, open left

cover 2.
10-24
Troubleshooting

inside the machine.
6 Close the left cover 2.
7 Pull out cassette 1 and remove the jammed paper.

inside the machine.
10
10-25
Troubleshooting
Fixing unit
Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the fixing unit.
3 Open the fuser cover (A1).
CAUTION: The fixing unit is extremely hot. Take

sufficient care when working in this area, as there is a
danger of getting burned.
10-26
Troubleshooting

inside the machine.
5 If jammed paper is seen through the paper ejection

slot, pull it toward your side to remove it.
6 Push fuser cover back in place, and press the

specified position to close left cover 1.
10
10-27
Troubleshooting
Optional Document Processor

Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the optional document processor.
1 Remove the original from the original tray.
2 Open the document processor top cover.
3 Remove the jammed original.
If the original tears, remove every loose scrap from

inside the machine.
If the original is difficult to remove, turn the dial. The

original will scroll out to a position where it can be
removed easily.

inside the machine.
10-28
Troubleshooting
4 Lift up reverse unit.
5 Remove the jammed original.

inside the machine.
6 Put reverse unit back in its original place and close

the document processor top cover.
7 Reload the originals on the document processor

tray.
Optional Document Finisher 10

If a misfeed occurs in the optional document finisher, refer to the respective Operation Guides to clear the jam.
Optional Job Separator

Follow the steps below to clear paper jams in the optional job separator.
1 If jammed paper is seen through the paper ejection

slot of the job separator, pull it toward your side to
remove it.

inside the machine.
10-29
Troubleshooting
2 Pull up left cover 1 lever and open left cover 1.
3 Press the lever and open the job separator.

inside the machine.
5 Press the indicated position to close left cover 1.
10-30
11 Management
This chapter explains the following operations.
• User Login Administration.................................................................11-2

• Job Accounting ...............................................................................11-14
• Data Security Kit Operations...........................................................11-27
11-1
Management
User Login Administration

User login administration specifies how the user access is administered on this machine. Enter correct login user
name and password for user authentication to login.
Access are in three levels - User, Administrator, and Machine Administrator. The security levels can be modified
only by the machine administrator.
First User Login Administration

Follow these steps for the first user login administration.
Enable user login administration. (page 11-2)
Add a user.(page 11-5)
Log out.(page 11-4)
The registered user logs in for operations.(page 11-3)
Enabling/Disabling User Login Administration

This enables user login administration. Select one of the following authentication methods:
Item Description
Local Authentication User authentication based on user properties on the local

user list stored in the machine.
Network Authentication User authentication based on Authentication Server. Use a

user property stored in Authentication Server to access the
network authentication login page.
Use the procedure below to enable user login administration.
2 Press [User Login/Job Accounting].
3 If user login administration is disabled, the user

authentication screen appears. Enter your login
user name and password and then press [Login].
For this, you need to login with administrator
privileges. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-5 for
the default login user name and password.
4 Press [Next] of User Login Setting and then

[Change] of User Login.
11-2
Management
User Login/Job Accounting - User Login

5 Select [Local Authentication] or [Network
User login administration.
Select authentication method.
Authentication]. Select [Off] to disable user login
administration.
Off
Host Name
Local # Keys
If you select [Network Authentication], enter the
Authentication
Domain Name host name (62 characters or less) and domain
Network
Authentication name (256 characters or less) for the
Expansion
Authentication Server Type Authentication Server. Select [NTLM] or [Kerberos]
NTLM Kerberos as the server type.
Cancel OK
Status 10/10/2008 10:10 NOTE: If the login user name and password are
rejected, check the following settings.
• Network Authentication setting of the machine
• User property of the Authentication Server
• Date and time setting of the machine and the
Authentication Server
If you cannot login because of the setting of the
machine, login with any administrator registered in the
local user list and correct the settings.
If the server type is [Kerberos], only domain names
entered in uppercase will be recognized.
6 Press [OK].
Login/Logout
Once you enable user login administration, a login user name and password entry screen appears each time
you use this machine.
Login
11
Use the procedure below to login.
1 If the screen below appears during the operations,

Enter login user name and password. press [Login User Name].

Login to: Local
Login
User Name abcdef numeric keys.
# Keys
Login
********
2 Enter the login user name and press [OK].
Password
# Keys
IC Card
Login
Check Counter Cancel Login
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
3 Press [Login Password].
Press [# keys] to enter the login data using the

numeric keys.
11-3
Management
4 Enter the login password and press [OK].
NOTE: If Job Accounting is enabled, you can browse

the number of pages printed and the number of pages
scanned by pressing [Check Counter].
If Network Authentication is selected as the user
authentication method, either Local or Network can be
selected as the authentication destination.
5 Check the login user name and password are

correct, and press [Login].
Logout
To log out the machine, press the Logout key to return
to the login user name/login password entry screen.
Auto Logout
Logout is automatically executed in the following cases:
• When the Power key is pressed to enter the sleep

mode
• When auto sleep is activated
• When auto panel reset is activated
• When auto low power mode is activated
• When low power mode is activated by pressing the
Energy Saver key.
11-4
Management
Adding a User
This adds a new user. You can add Up to 1,000 users (including the default login user name). The table below
explains the user information to be registered.
Item Description
User Name* Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).
Login User Name* Enter the login user name to login (up to 64 characters). The
same login user name cannot be registered.
Login Password* Enter the password to login (up to 64 characters).
Access Level* Select Administrator or User for user access privileges.
Account Name Add an account where the user belongs. The user, who
registered his/her account name, can login without entering the
account ID. Refer to Job Accounting on page 11-14.
E-mail Address The user can register his/her E-mail address. The registered
address will be automatically selected for subsequent operations
that need any E-mail function.
* Mandatory at user registration.
NOTE: By default, one of each default user with machine administrator rights and administrator privileges is
already stored. Each user's properties are:
Machine Administrator
User Name: DeviceAdmin
Login User Name: 25/25 ppm model : 2500, 30/30 ppm model : 3000, 40/40 ppm model : 4000,
50/40 ppm model : 5000, 55/50 ppm model : 5500
Login Password: 25/25 ppm model : 2500, 30/30 ppm model : 3000, 40/40 ppm model : 4000,
50/40 ppm model : 5000, 55/50 ppm model : 5500
Access Level: Machine Administrator
Administrator 11
User Name: Admin
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password: Admin
Access Level: Administrator
It is recommended to periodically change the user name, login user name and login password regularly for your
security.
Use the procedure below to register a new user.
1 Login as a user with administrator rights.

11-5
Management

5 Press [Next] of User Login Setting, [Register/Edit]

of Local User List, and then [Add].
User:
6 Press [Change] of User Name.
7
User Name: Change
01 User Enter the user name and press [OK].
Login User Name: Change Login Password: Change
0099 **********
Access Level: Change Account Name: Change NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on
User 02 Account
E-mail Address: Change IC Card Information: Change
[email protected] Empty
8 Enter the login user name and E-mail address

following 6 and 7 above.
Cancel Register
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
9 Press [Change] of Login Password and then

[Password].
10 Enter the login password and press [OK].

11 Press [Confirm Password].
12 Enter the same login password to confirm and
press [OK].
13 Press [OK].
14 Press [Change] of Access Level.
15 Select the user access privilege and press [OK].
16 Press [Change] of Account Name.
User: - Account Name

17 Select the account and press [OK].
Select account to which this user will be attached.
Sort Name
Account Name Account ID NOTE: Select [Name] and [ID] from the Sort pull-down
01 Account 00001000
Search(Name)
menu to sort the account list.
02 Account 00002000
Search(ID) Press [Search(Name)] or [Search(ID)] to search by
03 Account 00003000 1/2
Other Account account name or account ID.
04 Account 00004000
05 Account 00005000
Detail
Cancel OK
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
18 Press [Register] to add a new user on the local user

list.
11-6
Management
Changing User Properties

User properties can be changed. Types of user properties that could be changed may be different depending
on user access privilege.
For a user with administrator rights who logs in
User properties can be changed and users can be deleted. The items, which can be added, are all able to be
changed.
Use the procedure below to change the user properties.

4 Press [Next] of User Login Setting and [Register/

Edit] of Local User List.
5 Select the user whose properties you wish to

change.
NOTE: Select [Name] and [Login Name] from the Sort

pull-down menu to sort the user list.
Press [Search(Name)] or [Search(Login)] to search by
name or login user name.
11
The procedure differs depending on the details to
be edited.
Changing user information

1 Press [Detail].
User:
2 Refer to steps 6 to 17 of Adding a User to
User Name: Change change a user property.
01 User
Login User Name: Change Login Password: Change

3 Press [Register].
4 Press [Yes] in the registration confirmation
0099 **********
Access Level: Change Account Name: Change

User 02 Account screen. The user information is changed.
E-mail Address: Change IC Card Information: Change
Cancel Register
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
11-7
Management
Deleting a user
1 Press [Delete].
2 Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm deletion.
The selected user will be deleted.
NOTE: The default user with administrator rights

cannot be deleted.
For a user without administrator rights who logs in
These users can partially change their own user properties including user name, login password, and E-mail
address.
Although login user name, access level, or account name cannot be changed, the users can check the present
status.
Use the procedure below to change user properties.
2 Press [User Property].
User:
3 Refer to steps 6 to 17 of Adding a User to change
User Name: Change
user properties.
01 User
Login User Name: Detail Login Password: Change Press [Detail] of Login User Name or Account
0099 **********
Name to check the present status.
Access Level: Account Name: Detail
User 02 Account
E-mail Address: Change IC Card Information:

Cancel Register
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
4 Press [Register] to finalize changed user

properties.
11-8
Management
Unknown login user name Job

This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown login user names or User ID (i.e. unsent
IDs). If the User Login is set to invalid and Job Accounting is set to valid, follow the procedure when the Account
ID is unknown.
Item Description
Reject The job is rejected (not printed).
Permit The job is permitted to be printed.
Use the procedure below to process jobs sent from unknown users.

4 Press [Change] of Unknown ID Job.
5 Press [Reject] or [Permit].
6 Press [OK].
11
11-9
Management
Group Authorization Settings

Set restrictions of the machine usage by each individual group registered in the authentication server.
NOTE: To use the group authorization settings, [Network Authentication] must be selected for the
authentication method in Enabling/Disabling User Login Administration on page 11-2. Select [On] for LDAP in
Protocol Detail on page 8-75.
Group Authorization
Use the group authorization. Use the procedure below.

4 Press [Next] of User Login Setting, [Next] of Group

Authorization Set., and then [Change] of Group
Authorization.
5 Press [On].
6 Press [OK].
Group List
Register the groups that is restricted the machine usage. Up to 20 groups can be individually registered. Other
users and groups belong to Others.
The table below explains the group information to be registered.
Item Description
Group ID* Enter the ID displayed on the group list (between 1 and 4294967295).
Group Name Enter the name displayed on the group list (up to 32 characters).
Access Level Select Administrator or User for group access privileges.
Print Restriction Select whether or not to reject usage of print functions for the printer.
Print Restriction (Color) Select whether or not to reject usage of the color print functions for the
printer.
Copy Restriction Select whether or not to reject usage of copy functions.
Copy Restriction (Color) Select whether or not to reject usage of the color copy functions.
11-10
Management
Item Description
Copy Restr. (Full Color) Select whether or not to reject usage of only the full color copy functions.
Send Restriction Select whether or not to reject usage of the send functions.
FAX TX Restriction Select whether or not to reject usage of the FAX transmissions.
Storing Restr. in Box Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the document boxes.
Storing Restr. in Memory Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the removable memory.
* For Group ID, specify PrimaryGroupID assigned by ActiveDirectory of Windows. If you are using Windows
Server 2008, check Attribute Editor tab of user properties. If you are using Windows Server 2000/2003,
check ADSIEdit. ADSIEdit is a support tool included on the installation CD-ROM for Windows Server OS
(under \SUPPORT\TOOLS).

User Login/Job Accounting - Group List 4 Press [Next] of User Login Setting, [Next] of Group
Register the groups that is restricted the machine usage. (Maximum: 20) Authorization Set., [Register/Edit] of Group List,
and then [Add].
Group ID Group Name
11
Others
Add
Detail Delete
Cancel Register
Status 2008/10/10 10:10
Group:xxx 5 Press [Change] of Group ID.
6
Group ID: Change Group Name: Change
Enter the group ID and press [OK].
Access Level: Change Print Restriction: Change
7 Press [Change] of Group Name.

Print Restriction (Color): Change Copy Restriction: Change
8 Enter the group name and press [OK].

Copy Restriction (Color): Change Copy Restr. (Full Color): Change
Send Restriction: Change

1/2
Cancel Register
Status 2008/10/10 10:10
9 Press [Change] of Access Level.
11-11
Management
10 Select the user access privilege and press [OK].

11 Press [Change] of Print Restriction.
12 Select [Reject Usage] or [Off] and press [OK].
13 Follow steps 11 and 12 above to set Print
Restriction (Color), Copy Restriction, Copy
Restriction (Color), Copy Restr. (Full Color), Send
Restriction, FAX TX Restriction, Storing Restr. in
Box, and Storing Restr. in Memory.
14 Press [Register] to add a new group on the group

list.
Obtain Network User Property
Set the required information to obtain the network user property from the LDAP server.
NOTE: To obtain the network user property from the LDAP server, [Network Authentication] must be selected
for the authentication method in Enabling/Disabling User Login Administration on page 11-2.
The table below explains the required information to be registered.Use the procedure below.
Item Description
Server Name*1 Enter the LDAP server name or the IP address (up to 64 characters).
Port Set the LDAP port number or use the default port 389.
Name 1*2 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed from the
LDAP server (up to 32 characters).
Name 2*3 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed from the
LDAP server (up to 32 characters).
E-mail Address*4 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the e-mail address from the LDAP server (up
to 32 characters).
Search Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds (from 5 to 255
seconds).
LDAP Security Select the type of encryption according to the type of security employed by the
LDAP server.
*1 If using Active Directory of Windows, the server name may be same as the server name entered in the
network authentication.
*2 If using Active Directory of Windows, displayName of Attribute may be used as Name 1.
*3 Name 2 can be left out. When you assign displayName in Name 1 and department in Name 2, and if the
value of displayName is "Mike Smith" and the value of department is "Sales" in Active Directory of Windows,
the user name appears as Mike Smith Sales.
*4 If using Active Directory of Windows, mail of Attribute may be used as E-mail Address.
11-12
Management

4 Press [Next] of User Login Setting, [Change] of

Obtain NW User Property.
User Login/Job Accounting - Network User Property

5 Press [On].
Get the network user information.
LDAP Server Information:

6 Press [Server Name].
Off
Server Name 192.181.11.11
On Port: 389 # Keys

7 Enter the LDAP server name or the IP address and
30 sec.
press [OK].
Acquisition of User Information:
8
Search
Name 1 displayName Timeout Press [# keys] to enter the LDAP port number using
Name 2 Off
the numeric keys.
LDAP
E-mail Address Security
9
mail
Press [Name 1].
Cancel OK
Status 10/10/2008 10:10

10 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to
be displayed and press [OK].
11 Follow steps 9 and 10 above to set Name 2.

12 Press [E-mail Address].
13 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the e-mail 11
address and press [OK].
14 Press [Search Timeout] to set the amount of time to

wait before time-out.
15 Press [+], [-] or the numeric keys to enter the time.

16 Press [LDAP Security] to select the type of
encryption according to the type of security
employed by the LDAP server.
17 Select [Off], [LDAP over SSL], or [LDAPv3/TLS]

and press [OK].
11-13
Management
Job Accounting
Job accounting Manages the copy/print count accumulated by individual accounts by assigning an ID to each
account.
Job accounting helps the following activities in business organizations.
• Manageability of up to 1,000 individual accounts.

• Availability for account IDs with as many as eight digits (between 0 and 99999999) for security.
• Integrated management of printing and scanning statistics through the use of an identical account ID.
• Tracking the print volume for each account and for all accounts combined.
• Restricting the print counter in one-page increments up to 9,999,999 copies.
• Resetting the print counter for each account or for all accounts combined.
First Job Accounting Setup

Follow these steps for the first job accounting setup.
Enable job accounting. (page 11-14)
Add an account. (page 11-16)
Log out. (page 11-15)
Other users login for operations. (page 11-15)
Enabling/Disabling Job Accounting

Enable job accounting. Use the procedure below to specify the job accounting setting.

4 Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting, and then

[Change] of Job Accounting.
5 Press [On]. To disable job accounting, press [Off].
11-14
Management
6 Press [OK].
NOTE: When the display returns to the System Menu

default screen, logout is automatically executed and
the screen to enter the Account ID appears. To
continue the operation, enter the Account ID.
Login/Logout
If job accounting is enabled, an account ID entry screen appears each time you use this machine.
Use the procedure below to login and logout.
Login
1 In the screen below, enter the account ID using the
Enter the account ID.
numeric keys and press [Login].
NOTE: If you entered a wrong character, press the

******** Clear key and enter the account ID again.
If the entered account ID does not match the registered
ID, a warning beep will sound and login will fail. Enter
the correct account ID.
By pressing [Counter Check], you can refer to the
Check Counter Login
number of pages printed and the number of pages
10/10/2008 10:10
scanned.
Status
When the screen to enter the login user name and

password appears
If user login administration is enabled, the screen to

enter the login user name and password appears. Enter
11
a login user name and password to login. (Refer to
Login/Logout on page 11-3.) If the user has already
registered the account information, the account ID entry
would be skipped. (Refer to Adding a User on page 11-
5.)
2 Proceed to complete the rest of the steps.
Logout
When the operations are complete, press the Logout
key to return to the account ID entry screen.
11-15
Management
Adding an Account
This section explains how to add a new account. The following entries are required.
Item Description
Account Name Enter the account name (up to 32 characters).
Account ID Enter the account ID as many as eight digits (between 0 and

99999999).
Restriction This Prohibits printing/scanning or restricts the number of sheets to

load. Refer to Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 11-18.
Use the procedure below to register a new account.

4 Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting, [Register/

Edit] of Accounting List, and then [Add].
Account: xx 5 Press [Change] of Account Name.
6
Account Name: Change
01 Account Enter the account name and press [OK]. The
Account ID: Change Account screen reappears.
00001000
Copy Restriction (Total): Change Print Restriction (Total): Change

Off Off
Copy Restr. (Full Color): Change Print Restr. (Full Color): Change
Off Off
Copy Restr. (SingleColor): Change

1/2
Off
Cancel Register
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
7 Follow steps 5 and 6 above to enter the Account ID.
NOTE: Any account ID that has already registered

cannot be used. Enter any other account ID.
8 Activate or deactivate restriction. Refer to

Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 11-18.
9 Press [Register] to add a new account on the

Account List.
11-16
Management
Managing Accounts
This changes the registered account information or deletes the account.
Use the procedure below to manage accounts.

4 Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting and then

[Register/Edit] of Accounting List.
User Login/Job Accounting - Accounting List

5 Select an account to change or delete.
Register an account that is permitted to use this machine. (Maximum: 1000)
Sort Name
Account Name Account ID NOTE: Select [Name] or [ID] from the Sort pull-down
01 Account 00001000
Search(Name)
menu to sort the account names.
Press [Search(Name)] or [Search(ID)] to search by
02 Account 00002000
Search(ID)
03 Account 00003000 1/2
Add account name or account ID.
04 Account 00004000
05 Account 00005000
Detail Delete The procedure differs depending on the details to

Close
be edited.
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Changing account information

1 Press [Detail]. 11
Account: xx
2 Refer to steps 5 to 7 of Adding an Account and
Account Name: Change steps 2 to 5 of Restricting Using the Machine
01 Account
to change account information.
Account ID: Change
00001000 3 Press [Register].
Copy Restriction (Total): Change Print Restriction (Total): Change
Off Off 4 Press [Yes] in the registration confirmation
Copy Restr. (Full Color): Change Print Restr. (Full Color): Change screen. The account information is changed.
Off Off
Copy Restr. (SingleColor): Change

1/2
Off
Cancel Register
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Deleting an account
1 Press [Delete].
2 Press [Yes]. To delete the account.
11-17
Management
Managing the Copier/Printer Counts

You can select how the copying and printing page counts are shown - either the total of both or each of copying
and printing individually. The selection may influence restriction on the count and count method. Refer to
Restricting the Use of the Machine on page 11-18, Counting the Number of Pages Printed on page 11-23 and
Printing an Accounting Report on page 11-26 for details.
Use the procedure below to set the counting methods.

4 Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting, [Next] of

Default Setting and then [Change] of Copier/Printer
Count.
5 Press [Total] or [Split].
6 Press [OK].
Restricting the Use of the Machine

This section explains how to restrict the use of the machine by account or the number of sheets available.
The items that can be restricted differ depending on whether [Split] or [Total] is selected for Managing the
Copier/Printer Counts on page 11-18.
Restriction Items
 [Split] selected for Copier/Printer Count
Item Detail
Copy Restriction (Total) Limits the total number of sheets used for full-color, single-
color, and black and white copying.
Copy Restr. (Full Color) Limits the number of sheets used for full-color copying.
Copy Restr. (SingleColor) Limits the number of sheets used for single-color copying.
Print Restriction (Total) Limits the total number of sheets used for color and black and
white printing.
Print Restr. (Full Color) Limits the number of sheets used for color printing.
Scan Restriction (Others) Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying).
11-18
Management
Item Detail
FAX TX Restriction Limits the number of sheets sent by fax. This is displayed
when the optional fax kit is installed.
FAX Port Restriction Restricts the ports used for faxing. This is displayed when two
optional FAX kits are installed.
 [Total] selected for Copier/Printer Count
Item Detail
Print Restriction (Total) Limits the total number of sheets used for copying and
printing.
Print Restr. (Full Color) Limits the number of sheets used for full-color printing.
Print Restr. (SingleCol.) Limits the number of sheets used for single-color printing.
Scan Restriction (Others) Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying).
FAX TX Restriction Limits the number of sheets sent by fax. This is displayed
when the optional fax kit is installed.
FAX Port Restriction Restricts the ports used for faxing. This is displayed when two
optional FAX kits are installed.
Applying Restriction
Restriction can be applied in two modes as follows:
Item Description
Off No restriction given 11

Counter Limit Restricts the print counter in one-page increments up to
9,999,999 copies.
Reject Usage Restriction is applied.
*Select [Off], [Use Port 1 Only] or [Use Port 2 Only] as the FAX Port Restriction setting.
Use the procedure below to select a restriction method.
1 Follow steps 1 to 4 of Adding an Account on page

11-16.
2 Press [Change] for the item to be restricted.
11-19
Management
Account:** - Copy Restriction (Total)

3 Select the restriction mode.
Restrict use of the functions.
If [Counter Limit] is selected, press [+],[-] or
numeric keys to select the number of pages.
Limit
Off
(1 - 9999999)
Counter Limit
99999 page(s)
Reject Usage
Cancel OK
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
4 Press [OK].
5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 for other accounts to be

restricted.
6 Press [Register]. The restricted account is added.
Applying Limit of Restriction
This specifies how the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction. The table below
describes the action taken.
Item Description
Immediately * Job stops when the counter reaches its limit.
Subsequently Printing/scanning of the job continues but the subsequent job

will be rejected.
Alert Only Job continues while displaying an alert message.

* The next job will be prohibited in sending or in storing in the box.
Use the procedure below to apply the restriction limit.


Default Setting and then [Change] of Apply Limit.
5 Select [Immediately], [Subsequently], or [Alert

Only].
6 Press [OK].
11-20
Management
Default Counter Limit

When you add a new account, you can change the default restrictions on the number of sheets used.
You can set any number from 1 to 9,999,999 in 1-sheet increments.
The items that can be set differ depending on whether [Split] or [Total] is selected for Managing the Copier/
Printer Counts on page 11-18.
Available Settings
 [Split] selected for Copier/Printer Count
Item Detail
Copy Restriction (Total) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
color and black and white copying.
Copy Restr. (Full Color) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
full-color copying.
Copy Restr. (SingleColor) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
single-color copying.
Print Restriction (Total) Sets the default restriction on the total number of sheets used
for color and black and white printing.
Print Restr. (Full Color) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
color printing.
Scan Restriction (Others) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
scanning (excludes copying).
FAX TX Restriction Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
sending faxes. This is displayed when the optional fax kit is
installed.
11
 [Total] selected for Copier/Printer Count
Item Detail
Print Restriction (Total) Sets the default restriction on the total number of sheets used
for copying and printing.
Print Restr. (Full Color) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
full-color printing.
Print Restr. (SingleCol.) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
single-color printing.
Scan Restriction (Others) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
scanning (excludes copying).
FAX TX Restriction Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for
sending faxes. This is displayed when the optional fax kit is
installed.
11-21
Management
Use the procedure below to specify the counter limits.

authentication screen appears. Enter a login user
name and password, and press [Login]. For this,
you need to login with administrator privileges.
Refer to Adding a User on page 11-5 for the default
login user name and password.

Default Setting and then [Next] of Default Counter
Limit.
User Login/Job Accounting - Copy Restriction (Total)

5 Press [Change] for the item you want to modify and
Set the default limit value for restricting use of the functions for each account then press [+] or [-] or use the numeric keys to enter
by counter.
the default restriction on the number of sheets.
6 Press [OK].
(1 - 9999999)
9999999
7 To set another default restriction, repeat steps 5 to
6.
Cancel OK
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
11-22
Management
Counting the Number of Pages Printed

This counts the number of pages printed. Counts are classified into Total Job Accounting and Each Job
Accounting. A new count can also be started after resetting the count data which was stored for a certain period
of time.
Types of the counts are as follows.
Item Detail
Printed Pages Displays the number of pages copied and printed, and the total
number of pages used. You can also use [Count by Paper Size] and
[Count by Duplex/Combine] to check the number of pages used.
• For copying, you can check the pages used for black and white,
full-color and single-color copying as well as the total pages
used.
• For printing, you can check the pages used for black and white
and full-color printing as well as the total pages used.
• You can use [Count by Paper Size] to check the number of
pages used in the paper size set in Counting by Paper Size on
page 11-25 as well as the number of pages used in other paper
sizes.
• You can use the [Count by Duplex/Combine] to check the
number of pages used in Duplex (1-sided) mode, Duplex (2-
sided) mode and the total for both, as well as the pages used in
Combine (None) mode, Combine (2in1) mode, Combine (4in1)
mode and the total for all three.
Scanned Pages Displays the number of pages scanned for copying, faxing* and
other functions, as well as the total number of pages scanned.
FAX Transmission Pages* Displays the number of pages faxed. 11

FAX Transmission Time* Displays the total duration of fax transmissions.
* Only displayed when the optional fax kit is installed.
Total Job Accounting/Resetting the Counter
This counts the number of pages for all accounts and resets the counts for those accounts together at the same
time.
Use the procedure below to check and reset the counter.

11-23
Management

[Next] of Total Job Accounting.
User Login/Job Accounting - Total Job Accounting

5 Press [Check] at the function to check the count.
Printed Pages: Check Scanned Pages: Check
The results will be displayed.
FAX Transmission Pages: FAX Transmission Time: 6 Confirm the count and press [Close].
2 00:00:10
7 Press [Execute] of Counter Reset to reset the

counter.
Counter Reset: Execute

8 Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the reset. The
counter is reset.
Close
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Each Job Accounting/Resetting the Counter
This counts the number of pages for each account and resets the counts by account.
Use the procedure below to display and reset the counter.

4 Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting and [Check]

of Each Job Accounting.
User Login/Job Accounting - Each Job Accounting 5 Select the account to check the count.
Maintain a separate counter for each account (department).
Sort Name
Account Name Account ID NOTE: Select [Name] or [ID] from the Sort pull-down
06 Account 00006000
Search(Name)
menu to sort the account names.
Search(ID) Press [Search(Name)] or [Search(ID)] to search by
2/2
account name or account ID.
Detail 6 Press [Detail].

Close
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
11-24
Management
Account:
7 Press [Check] at the function to check the count.
Printed Pages: Check Scanned Pages: Check
The results will be displayed.
FAX Transmission Pages: FAX Transmission Time: 8 Confirm the count and press [Close].
2(20) 0:00:10
9 Press [Execute] of Counter Reset to reset the

counter.
Counter Reset: Execute

10 Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the reset. The
counter will be reset.
Close
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Counting by Paper Size
This counts the number of pages by paper size (e.g. Letter).
NOTE: Paper size is available in five types, - 1 to 5. These types are specified in accounting reports. Refer to
Printing an Accounting Report on page 11-26.
In addition to paper size, media type can also be specified (e.g. count the letter-size color paper used). If no
media type is specified, usage is counted for all media types of that size.
Use the procedure below to count the number of pages.

For this, you need to login with administrator 11

Default Setting, [Change] of Count by Paper Size,
[Change] of Paper Size 1 to 5 and then [On].
User Login/Job Accounting - Paper Size 1

5 Select the paper size.
Select the paper sizes and types to count.
6 Press [Media Type] to specify media type.

Off
A3 A4
On A5 B4
7 Select the media type and press [OK].
B5 Folio
8 Press [Close].
Ledger Legal
Plain
Letter Statement
Media Type
Cancel OK
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
11-25
Management
Printing an Accounting Report

Total pages counted at all relevant accounts can be printed as an accounting report.
Reports have different formats depending on how the count of copiers and printers is administered.
When Split is selected for Managing the Copier/Printer Count
ACCOUNT.REPORT
TASKalfa xxxxx
Firmware Version
For the count by paper size, the report will be printed by size.
Use the procedure below to print a job accounting report.
1 Check that Letter or A4 paper is loaded in the

cassette.


[Print] of Print Accounting Report.
6 Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the printing.
11-26
Management
Unknown Account ID Jobs

The behavior of the machine when it receives a job from unknown account ID (i.e. unsent ID) can be specified.
Refer to Unknown login user name Job on page 11-9 for details.
Checking and Printing Counter

Counter Press the Counter key to check the number of sheets
Printed Pages printed and scanned.
Copy Printer FAX Total
Black&White: 300 600 100 1000 You can check the number of pages printed in each
Full Color: 200 500 100 800
paper size by pressing [Printed Pages by Paper Size].
SingleColor: 100 100 0 200
Total: 600 1200 200 2000
Scanned Pages
Copy FAX Others Total
Originals: 600 200 1000 1800
Print Printed Pages

Status Page by Paper Size Close
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Data Security Kit Operations

Installing the optional Data Security Kit adds [Data Security] on the System Menu.
Refer to the Data Security Kit (E) Operation Guide on the bundled CD-ROM for descriptions of the [Data
Security] options and the procedures for using them.
11
11-27
Management
11-28
Appendix
• Optional Equipment ...............................................................Appendix-2

• Character Entry Method.........................................................Appendix-7
• Paper ...................................................................................Appendix-10
• Specifications .......................................................................Appendix-18
• Glossary...............................................................................Appendix-28
Appendix-1
Optional Equipment
Overview of Optional Equipment

The following optional equipment is available for the machine.
Document Processor
Document Processor (Dual scan DP) Document Table
Job Separator
3,000 Sheet
Document Finisher
3,000 Sheet
Document Finisher Paper Feeder
Paper Feeder
Appendix-2
Key Counter
FAX Kit
Expansion Memory
Appendix-3
Document Processor
Automatically scans originals. Also you can perform
duplex copying and split copying.
For document processor operation, refer to Loading

Originals in the Document Processor on page 2-34.
Paper Feeder
Two additional cassettes identical to the printer’s double
cassettes can be installed in the printer. Paper capacity
and loading method are the same as Cassettes 1 and 2.
NOTE: Left cover 4 is located on the left side of the

paper feeder for use in clearing paper jams.
3,000 Sheet Paper Feeder

In addition to the printer's cassettes, you can also install
an optional 3,000 sheet paper feeder capable of holding
up to 3,000 sheets of A4 or B5 paper.
NOTE: The 3,000 sheet paper feeder features a

removable cover on the left side of the feeder (left
cover 4) for removing paper when a paper jam occurs.
Document Finisher
The document finisher holds a large quantity of finished
copies. The finisher offers a convenient means of
sorting. Sorted finished copies may also be stapled. For
further details, refer to the document finisher Operation
Guide.
3,000 Sheet Document Finisher

This is a large-capacity document finisher capable of
holding large print runs and of separating and offsetting
multiple copies of a printout into individual copies. It can
also staple or hole-punch (optional) the offset printouts.
For details, refer to the 3,000 Sheet Document Finisher
Operation Guide. A mail box and folding unit are also
available as options.
Appendix-4
Job Separator
Separate paper according to output tray for easier
sorting. Specify as the output tray for copy or print jobs.
Or, specify as the default output tray for printing from
the copy or Document Box screen, printing from the PC,
and printing of the received fax data.
There is a paper indicator in the front of the machine

that shows whether there is paper in the Job Separator.
CAUTION: Note that some paper types have a

tendency to curl and may jam in the paper eject unit.
If the ejected paper slips or stacks unevenly, turn the
paper in the cassette over and try again.
NOTE:
• To ensure that paper is delivered to the Job
Separator, select the output destination or change
the default setting. (For details, refer to the Paper
Output on page 8-14.)
• When removing paper from the Job Separator, pull
it out at an angle.
Key Counter
Use the key counter to monitor machine usage. The key
counter offers a convenient solution for centralized
management of copy volume for different departments
in a large company.
Inserting the Key Counter

Insert the key counter securely into the key counter slot.
NOTE: When the key counter function is activated,

copies can only be made when a key counter is
inserted. If the key counter is not inserted, Insert key
counter. will be displayed.
Appendix-5
FAX Kit
By installing the FAX kit, fax send/receive is enabled. Also, it is possible to use it as a network fax, by using it
with a computer. When two FAX kits are installed, the units can be connected to two different telephone lines
which will enable quicker message transmission to a number of recipients. If one of the lines is dedicated to
receiving, the busy line time can be reduced. For further details, refer to Fax Kit Operation Guide.
Expansion Memory
Image storage memory (128 MB) that allows the machine to receive more pages of incoming faxed originals.
Expansion memory should only be installed or removed by the service representative.
Data Security Kit

The Data Security Kit overwrites all unnecessary data in the storage area of the hard disk so that it cannot be
retrieved. The Data Security Kit encrypts data before storing it in the hard disk. It guarantees higher security
because no data cannot be decoded by ordinary output or operations.
Printed Document Guard Kit

This prevents the unauthorized copying and/or transmission of documents that contain important confidential or
personal information. When a document is printed from a computer, this feature imprints a special pattern on
the document. When anyone attempts to copy or send that document on this machine, the machine detects the
pattern and protects the information by printing the document in blank, prohibiting transmission.
Document Table
Place original or other documents when using the machine. It has a drawer to accommodate clips.
Appendix-6
Character Entry Method
To enter characters for a name, use the on-display keyboard in the touch panel following the steps as explained
below.
NOTE: QWERTY, QWERTZ and AZERTY are available as keyboard layouts the same as a PC keyboard.
Press the System Menu key, [Common Settings] and then [Change] of Keyboard Layout to choose desired
layout. QWERTY layout is used here as an example. You may use another layout following the same steps.
Entry Screens
Lower-case Letter Entry Screen
2
1 Use the keyboard to enter.
3
Input: 0 characters
Backspace
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ! = ^
q w e r t y u i o p [ ] \
5
a s d f g h j k l ; :
6 z x c v b n m , . /
Cancel OK
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
7 8 9 10 11
No. Display/Key Description
1 Display Displays entered characters.
2 Limit Display Displays maximum number of characters.
3 Cursor Key Press to move the cursor on the display.
4 [Backspace] Press to delete a character to the left of the

cursor.
5 Keyboard Press a character to enter.
6 [Upper-case] Press to use upper-case letters.
7 [Lower-case] Press to use lower-case letters,
8 [No./Symbol] Press to enter numbers and symbols.
9 [Space] Press to insert a space.
Appendix-7
10 [Cancel] Press to cancel entered characters and return

to the screen before the entry.
11 [OK] Press to finalize entry and return to the screen

before the entry.
Upper-case Letter Entry Screen

Input: 0 characters
Backspace
! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ + ˜
Z X C V B N M < > ?
Lower-case
Cancel OK
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
Number/Symbol Entry Screen

Input: 0 characters
Backspace
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ! " #
12
$ % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / :
; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ` {
| } ˜
Lower-case Space
Upper-case Lower-case No./Symbol
Cancel OK
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
12 [ ]/[ ] To enter a number or symbol not shown in the

keyboard, press the cursor key and scroll the
screen to view other numbers or symbols to
enter.
Appendix-8
Entering Characters
Follow the steps shown below to enter List A-1 for example.
1 Press [Upper-case].
2 Press [L]. The letter L is shown on the display.

L Input: 1 characters
Backspace
! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ + ˜
Z X C V B N M < > ?
Upper-case Lower-case
Lower-case No./Symbol Space
Cancel OK
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
3 Press [Lower-case].
4 Press [i], [s], [t] and [Space].

List
Input: 4 characters
Backspace
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ! = `
q w e r t y u i o p [ ] \
a s d f g h j k l ; ’
z x c v b n m , . / @ _
Cancel OK
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
5 Press [Upper-case].
6 Press [A].
7 Press [No./Symbol].
8 Press [ ] or [ ] repeatedly to view the keyboard

containing [-] and [1].
9 Press [-] and [1].

List_A-1
Input: 8 characters
Backspace
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ! " #
$ % & ’ ( ) * + , - . / :
; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ` {
| } ˜
Upper-case Lower-case
Lower-case No./Symbol Space
Cancel OK
Status 10/10/2008 10:10
10 Check that the entry is correct. Press [OK].
Appendix-9
Paper
This section explains the paper sizes and types that can be used in the paper source.
Cassettes 1
Supported types Supported paper sizes No. of sheets
Plain paper (60 to 163 g/m2) Letter, Letter-R, Statement, A4, A4-R, B5, 500 (80 g/m2)
Recycled paper (60 to 163 g/m2) B5-R, A5-R, Folio, 16K, 16K-R
Plain paper (60 to 163 g/m2) Ledger, Legal, A3, B4, Oficio II, 250 (80 g/m2)
Recycled paper (60 to 163 g/m2) 8.5 × 13.5", 8K
Cassettes 2 and the optional paper feeder
Plain paper (60 to 163 g/m2) Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement, 500 (80 g/m2)
Recycled paper (60 to 163 g/m2) A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Oficio II,
8.5 × 13.5", Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R
Optional 3,000 sheet paper feeder
Plain paper (60 to 105 g/m2) Letter, A4, B5 3,000 (80 g/m2)
Recycled paper (60 to 105 g/m2)
Multi Purpose tray (MP tray)
Plain paper (60 to 220 g/m2) Letter, Letter-R, Executive-R, Statement, 100 (80 g/m2)
Recycled paper (60 to 220 g/m2) A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, B6-R, A6-R,
Colored paper (60 to 220 g/m2) Folio, 16K, 16K-R
Other sizes:
Portrait - 3 7/8 to 11 5/8" or 98 to 297 mm
Landscape - 5 7/8 to 17" or 148 to 432 mm
Plain paper (60 to 220 g/m2) Ledger, Legal, A3, B4, Oficio II, 50 (80 g/m2)
Recycled paper (60 to 220 g/m2) 8.5 × 13.5", 8K
Colored paper (60 to 220 g/m2)
Postcards Postcards (100 × 148 mm) 30

Oufuku Hagaki (return postcard) Return postcard (148 × 200 mm)
Appendix-10
Envelopes Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4, 10

Envelope #10 (Commercial #10),
Envelope #9 (Commercial #9),
Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4),
Monarch, ISO B5, Youkei 2, Youkei 4
Other sizes:
Portrait - 3 7/8 to 11 5/8" or 98 to 297 mm
Landscape - 5 7/8 to 17" or 148 to 432 mm
Transparency (OHP film) Letter, Letter-R, A4, A4-R 10
Basic Paper Specifications

This machine is designed to print on standard copy paper as used in regular ('dry') copiers and page printers
such as laser printers. It also supports a variety of other types of paper that conform to the specifications given
in this appendix.
Be careful when choosing paper. Paper unsuitable for the machine may cause jams or may be wrinkled.
Supported Paper
Use standard copy paper for regular copiers or laser printers. The printing quality will be affected by the quality
of paper. Poor quality paper may result in unsatisfactory output.
Basic Paper Specifications
The following table lists the specifications of paper that is supported with this machine. Refer to the subsequent
sections for further details.
Criteria Specifications
Weight Cassettes: 60 to 163 g/m2
Multi purpose tray: 60 to 220 g/m2
Thickness 0.086 to 0.110 mm
Dimensional accuracy ±0.7 mm
Squareness of corners 90° ±0.2°
Moisture content 4 to 6%
Grain direction Long grain (paper supply direction)
Pulp content 80% or more
NOTE: Some recycled paper does not meet requirements for use with this machine as listed in the Basic
Paper Specifications shown below, such as moisture or pulp content. For this reason, we recommend
purchasing a small amount of recycled paper as a sample for testing prior to use. Choose recycled paper that
gives the best printing results and contains low levels of paper dust.
We are not responsible for the problems occurred from the use of paper that does not conform to our
specifications.
Appendix-11
Choosing the Appropriate Paper
This section describes guidelines for choosing paper.
Condition
Avoid using paper with bent corners or that is curled, dirty, or torn. Do not use paper that has a rough surface or
paper fiber lint, or that is especially delicate. Use of paper in any of these conditions will not only deliver poor
copies but may also cause jams and shorten the useful life of the machine. Choose paper with a smooth and even
surface; however, avoid coated paper or paper with a treated surface as it may damage the drum or fusing unit.
Ingredient
Do not use paper such as paper that has been coated or surface-treated or paper that contains plastic or carbon.
These paper may produce harmful fumes from the heat of printing and may damage the drum.
Be sure to use the standard paper that contains at least 80% pulp, i.e., not more than 20% of the total paper
content consists of cotton or other fibers.
Supported Paper Sizes
Paper of the following sizes is supported by the machine.
Measurements in the table take into account a ±0.7 mm dimensional accuracy for length and width. Corner
angles must be 90° ± 0.2°.
Multi Purpose Tray Cassette or Multi Purpose Tray
A6-R (105 × 148 mm) A3 (297 × 420 mm)
B6-R (128 × 182 mm) B4 (257 × 364 mm)
Hagaki (100×148mm) A4 (297 × 210 mm)
Oufuku Hagaki (148 × 200 mm) A4-R (210 × 297 mm)
Executive (7 1/4 ×10 1/2") B5 (257 × 182 mm)
Envelope DL (110 × 220 mm) B5-R (182 × 257 mm)
Envelope C5 (162 × 229mm) A5-R (148 × 210 mm)
Envelope C4 (229 × 324mm) Folio (210 × 330 mm)
ISO B5 (176 × 250 mm) Ledger
Envelope #10 (Commercial #10) (4 1/8 × 9 1/2") Legal
Envelope #9 (Commercial #9) (3 7/8 × 8 7/8") Letter
Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4) (3 5/8 × 6 1/2") Letter-R
Envelope Monarch (3 7/8 ×7 1/2") Statement-R
Youkei 2 (114 × 162 mm) Oficio II
Youkei 4 (105 × 235 mm) 8.5 × 13.5"
Appendix-12
Multi Purpose Tray Cassette or Multi Purpose Tray
Size Entry (98 × 148 to 297 × 432 mm) 8K (273 × 394 mm)
16K (273 × 197 mm)
16K-R (197 × 273 mm)
Smoothness
The paper surface should be smooth, but it must be uncoated. With paper that is too smooth and slippery,
several sheets may accidentally be supplied at once, causing jams.
Basis Weight
In countries that use the metric system, basis weight is the weight in grams of one sheet of paper one square
meter in area. In the United States, basis weight is the weight in pounds of one ream (500 sheets) of paper cut
to the standard size (or trade size) for a specific grade of paper. Paper that is too heavy or too light may be
supplied incorrectly or cause paper jams, which may cause excessive wear of the machine. Mixed paper weight
(i.e., thickness) may cause several sheets to be supplied at once accidentally and may also cause blurring or
other printing problems if the toner fails to adhere correctly.
Thickness
Avoid using paper that is too thick or thin. Signs that paper may be thin include frequent problems with paper
jams or with several sheets being supplied at once. Paper jams may also indicate that the paper is too thick. The
proper thickness is between 0.086 and 0.110 mm.
Moisture Content
Paper moisture content is the ratio of moisture to dryness expressed as a percentage. Moisture affects how the
paper is supplied, the electrostatic changeability of the paper, and how the toner adheres.
Paper moisture content varies depending on the relative humidity in the room. High relative humidity causes
paper to become damp, making the edges expand so it appears wavy. Low relative humidity causes paper to
lose moisture, making the edges tighten and weakening print contrast.
Wavy or tight edges may cause the paper to slip when it is supplied. Try to keep the moisture content between
4 to 6%.
To maintain the right level of moisture content, bear in mind the following considerations.
• Store paper in a cool, well-ventilated place.

• Store paper flat and unopened in the package. Once the package is opened, reseal it if the paper is not to
be used for a while.
• Store paper sealed in the original package and box. Put a pallet under the carton to keep it raised above the
floor. Especially during rainy seasons keep the paper a sufficient distance away from wooden or concrete
floors.
• Before using paper that has been stored, keep it at the proper moisture level for at least 48 hours.
• Do not store paper where it is exposed to heat, sunlight, or dampness.
Appendix-13
Other Paper Specifications
Porosity: The density of the paper fibers
Stiffness: Paper must be stiff enough or it may buckle in the machine, causing jams.
Curl: Most paper naturally tends to curl after the package is opened. When paper passes through the fixing unit,
it curls upward slightly. To deliver flat printouts, load the paper so that the curl faces towards the bottom of the
paper tray.
Static electricity: During printing, paper is electrostatically charged so that the toner adheres. Choose paper
that can be discharged quickly so that copies do not cling together.
Whiteness: Paper whiteness affects print contrast. Use whiter paper for sharper, brighter copies.
Quality: Machine problems may occur if sheet sizes are not uniform or if corners are not square, edges are
rough, sheets are uncut, or edges or corners are crushed. In order to prevent these problems, be especially
careful when you cut the paper yourself.
Packaging: Choose paper that is properly packaged and stacked in boxes. Ideally, the packaging itself should
have been treated with a coating to inhibit moisture.
Specially treated paper: We do not recommend printing onto the following types of paper, even if it conforms to
the basic specifications. When you use these kinds of paper, purchase a small amount first as a sample to test.
• Glossy paper
• Watermarked paper
• Paper with an uneven surface
• Perforated paper
Special Paper
This section describes printing onto special paper and print media.
The following paper and media can be used.
• Transparencies
• Preprinted paper
• Bond paper
• Recycled paper
• Thin paper (from 60 g/m2 to 64 g/m2 or less)
• Letterhead
• Colored paper
• Prepunched paper
• Envelopes
• Cardstocks (Hagaki)
• Thick paper (from 106 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 or less)
• Labels
• Coated paper
• High-quality paper
When using these paper and media, choose that are designed specifically for copiers or page printers (such as
laser printers). Use the multi purpose tray for transparencies, thick paper, envelopes, cardstocks, and label paper.
Appendix-14
Choosing Special Paper
Although special paper that meets the following requirements can be used with the machine, print quality will
vary considerably due to differences in the construction and quality of special paper. Thus, special paper is more
likely than regular paper to cause printing problems. Before purchasing special paper in volume, try testing a
sample to ensure the print quality is satisfactory. General precautions when printing onto special paper are given
below. Note that we are not responsible for any harm to the user or damage to the machine caused by moisture
or specifications of special paper.
Select a cassette or multi purpose tray for special paper.
Transparencies
Transparencies must be able to withstand the heat of printing. Transparencies must meet the following
conditions.
Criteria Specifications
Heat resistance Must withstand at least 190°C
Thickness 0.100 to 0.110 mm
Material Polyester
Dimensional accuracy ±0.7 mm
Squareness of corners 90° ±0.2°
To avoid problems, use the multi purpose tray for transparencies and load transparencies with the long side
facing the machine.
If transparencies jam frequently at output, try pulling the leading edge of sheets gently as they are ejected.
Hagaki
Before loading Hagaki into the multi purpose tray, fan
them and align the edges. If the Hagaki paper is curled,
Burrs straighten it before loading. Printing onto curled Hagaki
may cause jams.
Burrs
Use unfolded Oufuku Hagaki (available at post offices).
Some Hagaki may still have rough edges developed by
a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such
rough edges by placing the Hagaki on a flat surface and
rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler.
Envelopes
Use the multi purpose tray for envelopes.
Due to the structure of envelopes, printing evenly over the entire surface may not be possible in some cases.
Thin envelopes in particular may be wrinkled by the machine in some cases as they pass through. Before
purchasing envelopes in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the print quality.
Storing envelopes for a long period may cause them to become wrinkled. Thus, keep the package sealed until
you are ready to use them.
Appendix-15
Keep the following points in mind.
Do not use envelopes with exposed adhesive. In addition, do not use the type of envelope in which the adhesive
is exposed after the top layer is peeled off. Serious damage may be caused if the paper covering the adhesive
comes off in the machine.
Do not use envelopes with certain special features. For example, do not use envelopes with a grommet for
winding a string to close the flap or envelopes with an open or film-covered window.
If paper jams occur, load fewer envelopes at once.
To prevent paper jams when printing onto multiple envelopes, do not allow more than ten envelopes remain in
the output tray at once.
Thick Paper
Before loading thick paper in the multi purpose tray, fan it and align the edges. Some thick paper may still have
rough edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges just as with Hagaki
by placing the paper on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler. Printing onto paper
with rough edges may cause jams.
NOTE: If the paper is not supplied correctly even after it is smoothed, load the paper in the multi purpose tray
with the leading edge raised a few millimeters.
Label
Be sure to feed labels from the multi purpose tray.
For selecting labels, use extreme care so that the adhesive may not come in direct contact with any part of the
machine and that the labels are not easily peeled from the carrier sheet. Adhesives that stick to the drum or
rollers and peeled labels remaining in the machine may cause a failure.
When printing onto labels, you must be liable for the print quality and possible trouble.
Labels consist of three layers as shown in the

illustration. The adhesive layer contains materials that
are easily affected by the force applied in the machine.
Top sheet The carrier sheet bears the top sheet until the label is
Adhesive layer used. This composition of labels may cause more
problems.
Carrier sheet
The label surface must be covered completely with the
top sheet. Gaps between labels may cause peeling of
labels, resulting in a serious failure.
Appendix-16
Some label paper has large margins on the top sheet. When using such paper, do not peel these margins from
the carrier sheet before completing output.
Allowed Not allowed
Top sheet
Carrier sheet
Use label paper that conforms to the following specifications.
Item Specifications
Top sheet weight 44 to 74 g/m²
Basis weight 104 to 151 g/m²

(overall paper weight)
Top sheet thickness 0.086 to 0.107 mm
Overall paper thickness 0.115 to 0.145 mm
Moisture content 4 to 6 % (composite)
Colored Paper
Colored paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 2 of the Appendix. In addition, the pigments
in the paper must be able to withstand the heat of printing (up to 200°C or 392°F).
Preprinted Paper
Preprinted paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 2 of the Appendix. The colored ink must
be able to withstand the heat of printing. It must be resistant to silicone oil as well. Do not use paper with a
treated surface such as glossy paper used for calendars.
Recycled Paper
Recycled paper must conform to the specifications listed on the page 2 of the Appendix; however, its whiteness
may be considered separately.
NOTE: Before purchasing recycled paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure that the print quality.
Appendix-17
Specifications
NOTE: Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Machine
Item Description
Type Desktop
Printing Method Electrophotography by semiconductor laser, tandem drum system
Supported Original Types Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (maximum original size: 11 × 17"/
A3)
Original Feed System Fixed
Paper Weight Cassette 60 to 163 g/m2 (Duplex: 60 to 163 g/m2)
1, 2
Multi Purpose 60 to 220 g/m2
Tray
Paper Type Cassette Plain, Rough, Vellum, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color (Colour),
1, 2 Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8 (Duplex:
Same as Simplex)
Multi Purpose Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled,
Tray Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color (Colour), Prepunched, Letterhead,
Thick, Coated, Envelope, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
Paper Size Cassette Maximum: 11 × 17"/A3 (Duplex: 11 × 17"/A3)
1, 2 Minimum: 5 1/2 × 8 1/2"/A5R (Duplex: 5 1/2 × 8 1/2"/A5R)
Multi Purpose Maximum: 11 × 17"/A3
Tray Minimum: 5 1/2 × 8 1/2"/A6R
Zoom Level Manual mode: 25 to 400%, 1% increments
Auto mode: Preset Zoom
Appendix-18
Item Description
Printing Black and White copying Full color copying
Speed 25/25 ppm A4/Letter 25 sheets/min 25 sheets/min
model A4-R/Letter-R 17 sheets/min 17 sheets/min
A3/Ledger 13 sheets/min 13 sheets/min
B4/Legal 13 sheets/min 13 sheets/min
B5 25 sheets/min 25 sheets/min
30/30 ppm A4/Letter 30 sheets/min 30 sheets/min
55/50 ppm When the Document Finisher is not installed:
model When the 3,000 Sheet Document Finisher is installed:
A4/Letter 55 sheets/min 50 sheets/min
A4-R/Letter-R 37 sheets/min 33 sheets/min
When the Document Finisher is installed:
A4/Letter 50 sheets/min 50 sheets/min
A4-R/Letter-R 37 sheets/min 33 sheets/min
First Print Black and 25/25 ppm model: 6.2 seconds or less
Time White 30/30 ppm model: 6.2 seconds or less
(A4, feed from 40/40 ppm model: 5.3 seconds or less
Cassette) 50/40 ppm model: 4.9 seconds or less
55/50 ppm model: 4.6 seconds or less
Full color 25/25 ppm model: 8.1 seconds or less
Appendix-19
Item Description
Warm-up Time Power on 25/25 ppm model: 30 seconds or less
(22°C/71.6°F, 30/30 ppm model: 30 seconds or less
60%) 40/40 ppm model: 45 seconds or less
50/40 ppm model: 45 seconds or less
Low Power 25/25 ppm model: 30 seconds or less
Sleep 25/25 ppm model: 30 seconds or less
Paper Cassette 1 500 sheets (80 g/m2, A4/Letter or less),
Capacity 250 sheets (80 g/m2, B4/Legal or more)
Cassette 2 500 sheets (80 g/m2)
Multi Purpose 100 sheets (80 g/m2, A4/Letter or less),
Tray 50 sheets (80 g/m2, more than Letter/A4)
Output Tray Top tray 250 sheets (80 g/m2)
Capacity with optional 150 sheets (80 g/m2)
job separator
Continuous Copying 1 to 999 sheets
Image Write System Semiconductor laser and electrophotography
Main Memory Standard 2048 MB
Maximum 2048 MB
Hard Disk 25/25:80GB or more (standard)
30/30:80GB or more (standard)
Interface Standard USB Interface Connector: 1 (USB Hi-Speed)
USB memory slot: 2 (Full-Speed USB)
Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX)
Option KUIO/W slot: 2
Resolution 600 × 600 dpi
Operating Temperature 10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F
Environment Humidity 15 to 80 %
Altitude 2,500 m/8,202 ft maximum
Brightness 1,500 lux maximum
Appendix-20
Item Description
Dimension (W × D × H) 23 53/64 × 26 49/64 × 29 11/32"
(Main unit only) 605 × 680 × 745 mm
Weight (without toner 233.7 lb/106 kg
container and waste toner
box)
Space Required (W × D) 35 × 26 49/64"
(Using multi purpose tray) 889 × 680 mm
Power Source 120 V AC, 60 Hz, 12 A/220 to 240 V AC, 50 Hz/ 60 Hz, 7.2 A
Options Document processor, Paper feeder, 3,000 sheet paper feeder,
Document finisher, 3,000 sheet document finisher, Job separator, Key
counter, FAX kit, Expansion memory, Data Security Kit, Printed
Document Guard Kit
Printer
Item Description
Printing Speed Same as Copying Speed.
First Print Black and 25/25 ppm model : 9.4 seconds or less
Time White 30/30 ppm model : 9.4 seconds or less
(A4, feed 40/40 ppm model : 7.1 seconds or less
from 50/40 ppm model : 5.8 seconds or less
Cassette) 55/50 ppm model : 5.2 seconds or less
Full color 25/25 ppm model : 10.9 seconds or less

30/30 ppm model : 10.9 seconds or less
Resolution 600 dpi
Operating System Windows 2000 (Service Pack 2 or later), Windows XP, Windows Server
2003, Windows Vista, Windows 7 , Windows Server 2008, Apple
Macintosh OS 10.x
Interface Standard USB Interface Connector: 1 (USB Hi-Speed)

Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX)
Page Description Language PRESCRIBE
Appendix-21
Scanner
Item Description
System requirements CPU: 600Mhz or higher

RAM: 128MB or more
Resolution 600 dpi, 400 dpi, 300 dpi, 200 dpi, 200 ×100 dpi, 200 × 400 dpi
(Resolution in FAX mode included)
File Format TIFF (MMR/JPEG compression), JPEG, XPS, PDF (MMR/JPEG

compression), PDF (high compression)
Scanning Speed *1 25/25 ppm model 1-sided B/W 50 Images/min

30/30 ppm model Color 50 Images/min
2-sided B/W 60 Images/min

Color 60 Images/min
(A4 landscape, 300 dpi,
Image quality: Text/Photo original)
40/40 ppm model 1-sided B/W 75 Images/min

50/40 ppm model Color 75 Images/min
55/50 ppm model 2-sided B/W 100 Images/min
Color 100 Images/min
(A4 landscape, 300 dpi,
Image quality: Text/Photo original)
Interface Ethernet (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX)
Network Protocol TCP/IP
Transmission PC transmission SMB Scan to SMB

System FTP Scan to FTP, FTP over SSL
E-mail transmission SMTP Scan to E-mail
TWAIN scan*2
WIA scan*3
*1 When using the dual scan document processor (except TWAIN and WIA scanning)
*2 Available Operating System : Windows 2000 (Service Pack 2 or later), Windows XP, Windows Server 2003,
Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2008
*3 Available Operating System : Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2008
Appendix-22
Document Processor (option)
Item Description
Original Feed Automatic feed

Method
Supported Sheet originals

Original Types
Paper Size Maximum: Ledger/A3

Minimum: Statement-R/A5-R
Paper Weight 45 to 160 g/m2
Loading Capacity 100 sheets (50 to 80 g/m2) maximum

Mixed original sizes (auto selection): 30 sheets (50 to 80 g/m2) maximum
Dimensions 22 23/32 × 21 13/64 × 7 5/64"

(W) × (D) × (H) 577 × 534 × 180 mm
Weight 14 kg or less
Dual scan DP model: 14 kg or less
Paper Feeder (option)
Item Description
Paper Supply Friction Feed (No. Sheets: 500, 80 g/m2, 2 cassettes)

Method
Paper Size Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 8.5×13.5", Letter, Letter-R, Executive, Executive-R,
Statement-R, A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5-R, A5-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R
Supported Paper Paper weight: 60 - 163 g/m2

Media types: standard, recycled, color
Dimensions 23 1/32 × 24 1/2 × 12 13/32"

(W) × (D) × (H) 585 × 622.5 × 315 mm
Weight Approx. 45.2 lbs. / Approx. 20.5 kg
3,000 Sheet Paper Feeder (option)
Item Description
Paper Supply Friction Feed (No. Sheets: 3,000 (80 g/m2))

Method
Paper Size A4, B5, Letter
Supported Paper Paper weight: 60 - 105 g/m2

Media types: standard, recycled, color
Appendix-23
Item Description
Dimensions 23 5/16 × 23 5/8 × 12 23/64"

(W) × (D) × (H) 585 × 600 × 314 mm
Weight Approx. 50.71 lbs / Approx. 23 kg
Document Finisher (option)
Item Description
Number of Trays 1 tray
Paper Size Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 8.5×13.5", A3, B4, Folio, 8K: 500 sheets
(Non-stapling) Letter, Letter-R, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, 16K: 1,000 sheets
Supported Paper Stapling: 90 g/m2 or less

Weight
Maximum Sheets Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 8.5×13.5", A3, B4, 8K: 25 sheets
for Stapling Letter, Letter-R, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, 16K: 50 sheets (Paper weight 90 g/m2 or less)
Dimensions 25 × 20 63/64 × 40 5/16"

(W) × (D) × (H) 634.9 × 533 × 1013.5 mm
Weight Approx. 58.42 lbs. / Approx. 26.5 kg
3,000 Sheet Document Finisher (option)
Item Description
Number of Trays 3 trays
Paper Tray A Ledger, Legal, A3, B4, 8K: 1,500 sheets

Size (Non- Letter, Letter-R, A4, A4R, B5, 16K: 3,000 sheets
Stapling)
Tray B Folio, Ledger, Legal, 12×18", A3, B4, 8K: 100 sheets
Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, 16K, 16KR: 200 sheets
Tray C Letter, Statement-R, A4, B5, A5, A5R, 16K: 50 sheets
Supported Paper Stapling: 90 g/m2 or less

Weight
Maximum Sheets A3, B4, Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 8.5×13.5", Folio, 8K: 30 sheets
for Stapling A4, A4-R, B5, Letter, Letter-R, 16K: 50 sheets
(Paper weight 90 g/m2 or less)
Dimensions 27 1/2 × 22 9/16 × 42 13/16"

(W) × (D) × (H) 687 × 573 × 1087mm
Weight 121.3 lbs or less / 55 kg or less
Appendix-24
Job Separator (option)
Item Description
Number of Trays 1 tray
Maximum Sheets 100 sheets (80 g/m2)
Paper Size Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 8.5×13.5", Letter, Letter-R, Executive, Executive-R,
Statement-R, A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R
Paper Type Paper weight: 60 - 163 g/m2

Paper type: plain, recycled, color, vellum
Dimensions 22 29/64 × 22 29/64 × 9 26/64"

(W) × (D) × (H) 570 × 570 × 240 mm
Weight 5.1 lbs. or less / 2.3 kg or less
Appendix-25
Environmental Specifications (25/25 ppm model and 30/30 ppm model)
Item Description
25/25 ppm model 30/30 ppm model
Nose emission During copying Black & White 66.2 dB(A) (Lwad) 67.1 dB(A) (Lwad)
Color 66.4 dB(A) (Lwad) 67.0 dB(A) (Lwad)
Power During copying Black & White 710 W or less 730 W or less
consumption*1 (120V) (120V)
760 W or less 790 W or less
(230V) (230V)
Color 800 W or less 810 W or less
(120V) (120V)
(230V) (230V)
During stanby 160 W or less
During Low Power Mode 100 W or less
Recovery time from Low Power 30 seconds or less
Mode
Time to Low Power Mode 3 minutes
During sleep 16 W or less
Recovery time from sleep 30 seconds or less
Time to sleep 30 minutes
During Plugged-in Mode*2 1W or less
Duplexing Standard
*1 Factory default
*2 Power consumption in Plugged-in Mode can only be terminated by removing the power plug from
the outlet.
Appendix-26
Environmental Specifications (40/40 ppm model and 50/40 ppm model)
Item Description
40/40 ppm model 50/40 ppm model
Nose emission During copying Black & White 68.0 dB (A) (Lwad) 69.5 dB (A) (Lwad)
Color 68.2 dB (A) (Lwad) 68.3 dB (A) (Lwad)
Power During copying Black & White 980 W or less 1110 W or less
consumption*1 (with full optional (120V) (120V)
equipment)
(230V) (230V)
Color 1130 W or less (120V)
1150 W or less (230V)
During stanby 210 W or less
During Low Power Mode 130 W or less
Recovery time from Low Power 30 seconds or less
Mode
Time to Low Power Mode 3 minutes
During sleep 19 W or less
Recovery time from sleep 45 seconds or less
Time to sleep 45 minutes 60 minutes
During Plugged-in Mode*2 1W or less
Duplexing Standard
*1 Factory default
*2 Power consumption in Plugged-in Mode can only be terminated by removing the power plug from
the outlet.
NOTE: Consult your dealer or service representative for recommended paper types.
“Maschinenlärminformations-Verordnung - 3.GPSGV, der höchste Schalldruckpegel beträgt 70 dB(A) oder

weniger gemäss EN ISO 7779”.
Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz gemäß BildscharbV vorgesehen.
Um störende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden, darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren

Gesichtsfeld platziert werden.
Appendix-27
Glossary
Accessibility
The machine is designed featuring good accessibility even for the elderly and those who are physically
challenged or visually impaired. Touch panel characters can be enlarged while the touch panel is adjustable in
two angles.
AppleTalk
AppleTalk, which comes with Apple Computer's Mac OS, is a network protocol. AppleTalk enables file/printer
sharing and also enables you to utilize application software that is on another computer on the same AppleTalk
network.
Auto Form Feed Timeout
During data transmission, the machine may sometimes have to wait until receiving the next data. This is the auto
form feed timeout. When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically put paper out. However, no
output is performed if the last page has no data to be printed.
Auto Paper Selection
A function to automatically select paper in the same size as original at printing
Auto Sleep
A mode designed for electrical power saving, activated when the machine is left unused or data transfer for a
specific period. In Sleep mode, power consumption is kept to a minimum.
Bonjour
Bonjour, also known as zero-configuration networking, is a service that automatically detects computers,
devices and services on an IP network. Bonjour, because an industry-standard IP protocol is used, allows
devices to automatically recognize each other without an IP address being specified or DNS server being set.
Bonjour also sends and receives network packets by UDP port 5353. If a firewall is enabled, the user must check
that UDP port 5353 is left open so that Bonjour will run correctly. Some firewalls are set up so as to reject only
certain Bonjour packets. If Bonjour does not run stably, check the firewall settings and ensure that Bonjour is
registered on the exceptions list and that Bonjour packets are accepted. If you install Bonjour on Windows XP
Service Pack 2 or later, the Windows firewall will be set up correctly for Bonjour.
Default Gateway
This indicates the device, such as a computer or router, that serves as the entrance/exit (gateway) for accessing
computers outside the network that you are on, When no specific gateway is designated for a destination IP
address, data is sent to the host designated as the Default Gateway.
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) that automatically resolves IP addresses, subnet masks, and
gateway addresses on a TCP/IP network. DHCP minimizes the load of network management employing a large
number of client computers because it relieves individual clients including printers from the IP address being
assigned.
Appendix-28
DHCP (IPv6)
DHCP (IPv6) is the next-generation of the Internet's Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol and supports IPv6. It
extends the BOOTP startup protocol that defines the protocols used for transferring configuration information to
hosts on the network. DHCP (IPv6) permits the DHCP server to use its expanded functionality to send
configuration parameters to an IPv6 node. Because the network addresses that can be used are allocated
automatically, the IPv6 node management workload is reduced in systems where the administrator has to
exercise close control over IP address allocation.
dpi(dots per inch)
A unit for resolution, representing the number of dots printed per inch (25.4 mm).
EcoPrint Mode
A printing mode that helps save toner. Copies made in this mode are thus lighter than normal.
Emulation
The function to interpret and execute other printers' page description languages. The machine emulates
operation of PCL6, KPDL, and KPDL (automatic).
FTP(File Transfer Protocol)
A protocol to transfer files on the TCP/IP network, whether the Internet or an intranet. Along with HTTP and
SMTP/POP, FTP is now frequently used on the Internet.
Grayscale
A computer color expression. Displayed images of this sort are typically composed of shades of gray, varying
from black at the weakest intensity to white at the strongest, without any other colors. Gray levels are displayed
in numerical levels: that is, white and black only for 1 bit; 256 gray levels (including white and black) for 8 bits;
and 65,536 gray levels for 16 bits.
Help
A Help key is provided on this machine's operation panel. If you are unsure of how to operate the machine,
would like more information on its functions or are having problems getting the machine to work properly, press
the Help key to view a detailed explanation on the touch panel.
IP Address
An Internet protocol address is a unique number that represents a specific computer or related device on the
network. The format of an IP address is four sets of numbers separated by dots, e.g. 192.168.110.171. Each
number should be between 0 and 255.
IPP
IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) is a standard that uses TCP/IP networks such as the Internet to enable print jobs
to be sent between remote computers and printers.IPP is an extension of the HTTP protocol used to view
websites and enables printing to be carried out via routers on printers in remote locations. It also supports the
HTTP authentication mechanisms along with SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption.
Appendix-29
KPDL (Kyocera Page Description Language)
Kyocera's PostScript page description language compatible with Adobe PostScript Level 3.
Multi Purpose (MP) Tray
The paper supply tray on the right side of the machine. Use this tray instead of the cassettes when printing onto
envelopes, Hagaki, transparencies, or labels.
NetBEUI (NetBIOS Extended User Interface)
An interface, developed by IBM in 1985, as an update from NetBIOS. It enables more advanced functions on
smaller networks than other protocols such as TCP/IP, etc. It is not suitable for larger networks due to lack of
routing capabilities to choose the most appropriate routes. NetBEUI has been adopted by IBM for its OS/2 and
Microsoft for its Windows as a standard protocol for file sharing and printing services.
NetWare
Novell's network management software that is able to run on a variety of operating systems.
POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3)
A standard protocol to receive E-mail from the server in which the mail is stored on the Internet or an intranet.
PostScript
A page description language developed by Adobe Systems. It enables flexible font functions and highly-
functional graphics, allowing higher quality printing. The first version called Level 1 was launched in 1985,
followed by Level 2 that enabled color printing and two-byte languages (e.g. Japanese) in 1990. In 1996, Level
3 was released as an update for the Internet access and PDF format as well as gradual improvements in
implementation technologies.
PPM (prints per minute)
This indicates the number of A4 size printouts made in one minute.
Printer Driver
The software to enable you to print data created on any application software. The printer driver for the machine
is contained in the CD-ROM enclosed in the package. Install the printer driver on the computer connected to the
machine.
RA(Stateless)
The IPv6 router communicates (transmits) information such as the global address prefix using ICMPv6. This
information is the Router Advertisement (RA). ICMPv6 stands for Internet Control Message Protocol, and is a
IPv6 standard defined in the RFC 2463 "Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMPv6) for the Internet Protocol
Version 6 (IPv6) Specification".
Send as E-mail
A function to send the image data stored in the machine as an E-mail attachment. E-mail addresses can be
selected from the list or entered at each time.
Appendix-30
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
A protocol for E-mail transmission over the Internet or an intranet. It is used for transferring mail between mail
servers as well as for sending mail from clients to their servers.
Status Page
The page lists machine conditions, such as the memory capacity, total number of prints and scans, and paper
source settings.
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask is a way of augmenting the network address section of an IP address. A subnet mask
represents all network address sections as 1 and all host address sections as 0. The number of bits in the prefix
indicates the length of the network address. The term "prefix" refers to something added to the beginning and,
in this context, indicates the first section of the IP address. When an IP address is written, the length of the
network address is indicated by the prefix length after a forward slash (/). For example, "24" in the address
"133.210.2.0/24". In this way, "133.210.2.0/24" denotes the IP address "133.210.2.0" with a 24-bit prefix
(network section). This new network address section (originally part of the host address) made possible by the
subnet mask is referred to as the subnet address.When you enter the subnet mask, be sure to set the DHCP
setting to Off.
TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol)
TCP/IP is a suite of protocols designed to define the way computers and other devices communicate with each
other over a network.
TCP/IP (IPv6)
TCP/IP (IPv6) is based on the current Internet protocol, TCP/IP (IPv4). IPv6 is the next-generation Internet
protocol and expands the available address space, which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under
IPv4, while also introducing other improvements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to
prioritize data transmission.
TWAIN (Technology Without Any Interested Name)
A technical specification for connecting scanners, digital cameras, and other image equipment to the computers.
The TWAIN compatible devices enable you to process image data on any relevant application software. TWAIN
is adopted on a large amount of graphic software (e.g. Adobe Photoshop) and OCR software.
USB (Universal Serial Bus)2.0
A USB interface standard for Hi-Speed USB 2.0. The maximum transfer rate is 480 Mbps. This machine is
equipped with USB 2.0 for high-speed data transfer.
Appendix-31
WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition)
A function to import images supported after Windows Me/XP from digital cameras and other peripheral
devices.This function replaces what TWAIN used to do; the feature is provided as a part of Windows functions
and improves ease of operation, so that you import images directly to My Computer without using any
application.
Appendix-32
Index
Index
Numerics Copy 4-35

Send 5-20
1-sided/2-sided Selection 5-10 Bonjour Appendix-28
3,000 sheet document finisher Appendix-4 Booklet from Sheets 4-18
3,000 sheet paper feeder Appendix-4 Left side 4-18
Right side 4-18
A Top binding 4-19
Border Erase
Accessibility 8-84, Appendix-28 Copy 4-16
Adjusting Density 5-17 Send 5-23
Auto 3-8 Bundled Items 2-2
Manual 3-8 Buzzer 8-3
Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle 2-11
Adjustment/Maintenance 8-44
C
Auto Color Correction 8-47
Color Calibration 8-52 Calibration Cycle 8-50
Color Calibration Cycle 8-50 Cassette
Color Registration 8-47 Loading Paper 2-21
Copy Density Adjustment 8-44 Paper Size and Media Type 8-5
Correcting Fine Black Lines 8-46 Cassette 1 1-4
Developer Refresh 8-53 Cassette 2 1-4
Display Brightness 8-46 Caution Labels ix
Drum Refresh 8-45 CD-ROM 2-2
Gray Adjustment 8-51 Centering 5-6
Laser Scanner Cleaning 8-53 Changing Language 2-11, 8-2
MP Tray Cleaning 8-53, 8-54 Character Entry Method Appendix-7
Send/Box Density 8-45 Cleaning
Silent Mode 8-47 Dual scanning area 9-3
System Initialization 8-46 Glass Platen 9-2
AppleTalk Appendix-28 Original Cover 9-2
Setup 2-15 Separator 9-5
Applications 8-69 Slit Glass 9-3
Attention Indicator 1-4 Transfer Roller 9-6
Auto Image Rotation 4-37 Cleaning Brush 1-5
Auto Low Power Mode 2-9 Clip Holder 1-4
Auto Paper Selection Appendix-28 Color
Auto Sleep 2-10, Appendix-28 Background Density Adjust 4-35, 5-20
Color / Grayscale / Black and White
B Selection 5-21
Color balance adjust 4-30
Background density adjust Color Calibration Cycle 8-50
Index-1
Index
Color Profiles 5-32 Counting the Number of Pages Printed

Color Registration 8-47 by Paper Size 11-25
Color Type 5-31, 8-30, 8-31 Counter 11-27
Gray Adjustment 8-51 Each Job 11-24
Hue adjust 4-31 Printing a Report 11-26
One touch image adjust 4-33 Total Job 11-23
Single Color copy 4-29 Unknown Account ID Jobs 11-27
Color balance adjust 4-30 Counting the Number of Pages
Color Calibration 8-52 Printed 11-23
Color mode 3-6 Cover Mode 4-21
Color Selection (Copy) 8-17 Custom Box
Color Selection (Send/Store) 8-18 Creating a New Box 6-2
Color Toner Empty Action 8-15 Deleting Documents 6-11
Color type 5-31 Editing Documents 6-8
Combine Mode Form Overlay 6-7
2-in-1 Mode 4-12 Join Documents 6-9
4-in-1 Mode 4-12 Move Documents 6-8
Page Boundary Lines 4-13 Printing Documents 6-5
COMMAND CENTER 2-17 Sending Documents 6-6
Connecting Storing Documents 6-4
LAN Cable 2-5 User Privileges 3-40
Power Cable 2-6
USB Cable 2-6 D
Connection Method 2-3
Continuous Scan Date/Timer 8-55
Copy 4-36 Auto Error Clear 8-58
Send 5-22 Auto Panel Reset 8-56
Conventions in This Guide xxvii Auto Sleep 8-57
Copy Appendix-6 Date Format 8-55
Adjusting Density 3-8 Date/Time 8-55
Collate Copying 3-14 Low Power Timer 8-57
Duplex Copying 3-12 Setup 8-55
Offset Copying 3-14 Time Zone 8-56
Originals 4-2 Default 8-15
Selecting Image Quality 3-9 Auto Image Rotation 8-22
Setup 8-27 Border Erase 8-21
Zoom Copying 3-10 Border Erase to Back Page 8-21
Copy Settings 8-27 Collate/Offset 8-22
Auto % Priority 8-28 Color Selection (Copy) 8-17
Auto Paper Selection 8-27 Color Selection (Send/Store) 8-18
Border Erase for Back Page 8-27 Color TIFF Compression Settings 8-24
Paper Selection 8-27 Continuous Scan 8-16
Preset Limit 8-29 Density 8-19
Quick Setup Registration 8-29 EcoPrint 8-23
Reserve Next Priority 8-28 E-mail Subject/Body 8-20
Copying Functions 4-1 File Format 8-18, 8-19
Index-2
Index
File Name 8-20 Appendix-24

High Comp. PDF Image 8-24 Document Guard 8-81
JPEG/TIFF Print 8-25 Document Processor Appendix-4,
Margin 8-22 Appendix-23
Original Image 8-17 How to Load Originals 2-35
Original Orientation 8-16 Loading Originals 2-34
PDF/TIFF/JPEG Image 8-23 Not Supported Originals 2-34
Repeat Copying 8-24 Part Names 2-34
Scan Resolution 8-17 Supported Originals 2-34
XPS Fit to Page 8-26 Document Table Appendix-6
Zoom 8-20 Double Copy 4-27
Default Gateway Appendix-28 dpi Appendix-29
Default Screen 8-2 Duplex 3-12, 8-37
Density Adjustment
Copy 3-8 E
Send 5-17
Destination 8-60 EcoPrint Mode Appendix-29
Adding 8-60 Copy 4-12
Adding a contact 8-60 Print 8-36
Adding a Group 8-62 E-mail
Choosing by One Touch Key 3-32 Send as E-mail 3-25
Choosing by Speed Dial 3-32 Emulation Appendix-29
Choosing from the Address Book 3-30 Selection 8-35
Editing 8-63 Energy Star Program xxv
One Touch Key 8-64 Enlarged Display 8-84
Quick No. Search key 3-3 Enter E-mail Subject and Body 5-26
Search 3-31 Enter key 1-3, 3-3
Sending to Different Types of Entry
Destinations (Multi Sending) 3-32 Body 5-26
Device 7-16 Document Name 5-25
Canceling FAX Communication 7-18 File Name 4-41, 5-25
Checking Status 7-16 Subject 5-26
Configuring 7-17 Error Handling 8-12
Displaying Screen 7-16 Error Messages 10-6
USB Memory 7-17 Expansion Memory Appendix-6
DHCP Appendix-28
DHCP (IPv6) Appendix-29 F
Document Box 3-33, 6-1
Basic Operation 3-35 File
Custom Box 3-33, 6-2 Format 5-12
Document deletion time 6-3 PDF 5-14
Form Overlay 6-7 File Name 4-41
Job Box 3-33, 6-12 File Separation 5-13
Quick Setup Registration 8-33 Form Overlay 4-22
What is Document Box? 3-33 Storing a Form 6-17
Document Finisher Appendix-4, Front Cover 1-4
Index-3
Index
FTP Appendix-29 Canceling 3-42, 7-13

FTP (Reception) Checking History 7-9
Protocol Detail 8-75 Checking Status 7-2
FTP Encrypted TX 5-31 Detailed Information 7-7
Detailed Information of Histories 7-10
G Details of the Status Screens 7-3
Displaying History Screen 7-9
Glass Platen Displaying Status Screens 7-2
Cleaning 9-2 Pause and Resumption 7-13
GPL xxii Reordering 7-14
Gray Adjustment 8-51 Sending the Log History 7-11
Grayscale 5-21, Appendix-29 Job Accounting 11-14
Green Knob 1-6 Managing the Copier/Printer Counts 11-
Grounding the Machine xi 18
Restricting the Use of the Machine 11-
H 18
Job Box
Handles 1-4 Form Overlay Box 6-17
Help Appendix-29 Private Print/Stored Job Box 6-12
Host Name 8-73 Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Print
HTTP Box 6-13
Protocol Detail 8-75 Repeat Copy Box 6-15
HTTPS Job Finish Notice 5-29
Protocol Detail 8-75 Copy 4-39
Hue adjustment 4-31 Send 5-29
I K
Image Quality Key Counter Appendix-5
Send 5-16 KPDL Appendix-30
Image repeat copy 4-27
Included Guides 2 L
Installation Precautions ix
Interface Block 8-80 Label Appendix-16
Internet Browser 8-67 LAN Cable
Interrupt Clear Timer 8-59 Connecting 2-5
Interrupt Copy 3-17 LAN Interface
IP Address Appendix-29 Setup 8-79
IPP Appendix-29 LDAP
IPP over SSL Protocol Detail 8-75
Protocol Detail 8-75 Left Cover 1 1-4
Left Cover 1 Lever 1-4
J Left Cover 2 1-4
Left Cover 3 1-4
Job Legal Information xx
Available Status 7-2 Login 3-2, 11-3
Index-4
Index
Logout 3-2, 11-3 Information 8-65

Low Power Timer 8-57 Editing 8-65
LPD One-touch image adjust 4-33
Protocol Detail 8-75 Open SSL xxii
Operation Panel 1-2, 1-4
M Option
3,000 sheet document finisher
Main Power Switch 1-6 Appendix-4
Management 11-1 3,000 sheet paper feeder Appendix-4
Job Accounting 11-14 Data Security Kit Appendix-6
User Login Administration 11-2 Document Finisher Appendix-4
Margin/Centering Mode 4-14 Document Processor Appendix-4
Memo Mode 4-24 Document Table Appendix-6
Mirror Image 4-38 Expansion Memory Appendix-6
Mixed Size Originals 4-6 FAX Kit Appendix-6
Combinations 4-6 Job Separator Appendix-5
Copy Size 4-8 Key Counter Appendix-5
Send 5-7 Overview Appendix-2
Monotype Imaging License Agreement xxiv Paper Feeder Appendix-4
MP Tray Cleaning 8-53 Option Interface Slot 1-6
Multi Purpose (MP) Tray 1-6, Appendix-30 Optional Functions 8-83
Paper Size and Media 2-30, 8-6 Orientation Confirmation 8-15
Multi Sending (Sending to Different Types Original
of Destinations ) 3-32 Loading in the Document
Processor 2-34
N Placing on the Platen 2-32
Size xxviii
Negative Image 4-37 Original Cover 1-4
NetBEUI Appendix-30 Cleaning 9-2
Protocol Detail 8-75 Original Orientation
NetWare Appendix-30 Copy 4-9
Setup 8-76 Document Processor 4-9
Network Orientation Confirmation 8-15
Preparation 2-13 Send 5-11
Setup 8-73 Original Placement Indicator
Network Cable 2-4 Indications and Status 2-35
Connecting 2-5 Original Size Indicator Plates 1-4, 2-32
Network Interface 2-4 Original Size Selection
Send 5-2
O Original SSLeay License xxiii
Originals
OHP backing sheet mode 4-44 Automatic Detection 8-9
One Touch Key Copy 4-2
Changing the Registered Custom 8-4
Information 8-65 Setup 8-4
Deleting the Registered Size Selection 4-2, 5-2
Index-5
Index
Output Destination 4-11 Placing Originals 2-32

Output Tray 8-14 POP3 Appendix-30
POP3 (E-mail RX)
P Protocol Detail 8-75
Poster 4-26
Page Numbering 4-23 PostScript Appendix-30
Paper Power Cable
Appropriate Paper Appendix-12 Connecting 2-6
Auto Selection 8-9 Power Off 2-8
Before Loading 2-20 Power On 2-7
Cassette 8-5 Power Supply xi
Checking the Remaining Amount of PPM Appendix-30
Paper 7-15 Precautions for Use xii
Custom 8-4 Preparation 2-1
Default Paper Source 8-9 Preparing Cables 2-4
Loading Envelopes 2-26 Print Job
Loading in the Cassettes 2-21 Reordering 3-43
Loading in the Multi Purpose Tray 2-24 Printed Document Guard Kit Appendix-6
Multi Purpose Tray 8-6 Printer
Paper Source for Cover Paper 8-10 Setup 8-35
Setup 8-4 Printer Driver Appendix-30
Size and Media 2-28, Appendix-10 Printer Settings 8-35
Special Paper 8-10, Appendix-14 Color Setting 8-36
Specifications Appendix-11 Copies 8-37
Weight 8-7 CR Action 8-39
Paper Feed Unit 1-6 Duplex 8-37
Paper Feeder Appendix-4 EcoPrint 8-36
Paper Jam 10-15 Emulation 8-35
Cassette 1 10-16 Form Feed Timeout 8-38
Cassette 2 10-17 LF Action 8-39
Cassettes 3 and 4 10-18 Orientation 8-38
Document Finisher 10-29 Override A4/Letter 8-37
Document Processor 10-28 Paper Feed Mode 8-40
Duplex Unit 10-23 Printing 3-22
Duplex Unit and Cassette 1 10-24 Printing from Applications 3-22
Inside the Left Covers 1, 2 and 3 10-22 Printing Reports/Sending Notice 8-41
Jam Location Indicators 10-15 Font List 8-41
Multi Purpose Tray 10-19 Network Status Page 8-42
Precaution 10-16 Service Status Page 8-42
Paper Length Guide 2-21 Status Page 8-41
Paper Selection 4-3 Transmission Result Reports 8-42
Cassette 4-3 Priority Override 4-41, 7-14
Multi Purpose Tray 4-4 Product Library 2-2
Paper Width Guides 2-22 Programmed Copying 3-46
Part Names 1-1 Editing and Deleting 3-47
Platen 1-4 Recalling 3-46
Index-6
Index
Registering 3-46 Send as E-mail 3-25

Punch 3-20 Send to Folder (FTP) 3-28
Send to Folder (SMB) 3-27
Q Sending E-mail 2-18
Sending Functions 5-1
Quick No. Search key 1-3, 3-3 Sending Settings 8-30
Quick Setup Screen 3-43 Color Type 8-30, 8-31
Changing Registration 3-44, 8-29, 8-30, Quick Setup Registration 8-30
8-33 Sending Size Selection 5-3
Sending to Different Types of Destinations
R (Multi Sending) 3-32
Separator
RA (Stateless) Appendix-30 Cleaning 9-5
Raw Port Setting Date and Time 2-12
Protocol Detail 8-75 Sharpness adjust
Receive Indicator 1-4 Copy 4-34
Repeat Copy 4-42 Send 5-19
Maximum Number 4-43 Shortcuts 3-48
Outputting 4-42 Adding 3-48
Selecting 4-42 Single Color copy 4-29
Replacement Sleep 2-10
Toner Container 9-8 Slit Glass 1-4
Waste Toner Box 9-8 Cleaning 9-3
Reserve Next 3-16 SMTP Appendix-31
Reserve Next Priority 8-28 SMTP (E-mail TX)
Resolution Appendix-21 Protocol Detail 8-75
Restarting the System 8-72 SNMP
Protocol Detail 8-75
S SNMPv3
Protocol Detail 8-75
Safety Conventions i Solving Malfunctions 10-2
Safety Instructions Regarding the Specifications
Disconnection of Power xvi Document Finisher Appendix-24
Scan Resolution 5-18 Document Processor Appendix-23
Default settings 8-17 Environmental Specifications
Scanner Cleaning 8-53, 8-54 Appendix-26
Secure Protocol 8-77 Job Separator Appendix-25
Send Machine Appendix-18
File Format 5-12 Paper Feeder Appendix-23
Image Quality 5-16 Printer Appendix-21
Original Size Selection 5-2 Scanner Appendix-22
Print 5-30 Specifying Destination 3-29, 3-30
Sending Size Selection 5-3 Status / Job Cancel 7-1
Setup 8-30 Status Page 8-41, Appendix-31
Store 5-30 Subnet Mask Appendix-31
Sending Supplies
Index-7
Index
Checking the Remaining Amount 7-15 Enabling/Disabling 11-2

Switching the Language 2-11, 8-2 Group Authorization Settings 11-10
Switching Unit of Measurement 8-11 Login 11-3
Symbols i Logout 11-4
System Initialization 8-72 Unknown login user name Job 11-9
System Menu 8-1
W
T
Waste Toner Box 1-5
TCP/IP Appendix-31 Replacement 9-8
TCP/IP (IPv4) Status 7-15
Setup 2-13 WIA Appendix-32
TCP/IP (IPv6) Appendix-29 WSD Print
Setup 8-73 Setup 8-77
Toner Container 1-5 WSD Scan 5-27
Checking the Remaining Amount of Setup 8-76
Toner 7-15
Replacement 9-8 X
Trade Names xxi
Transfer Roller XPS
Cleaning 9-6 File formats 5-12, 8-18
TWAIN Appendix-31 Printing documents stored in
Removable USB Memory 6-20
U Saving documents to Removable USB
Memory 6-22
USB Appendix-31
USB Cable Z
Connecting 2-6
USB Interface 1-6, 2-4 Zoom Copying
USB Memory Auto Zoom 3-10
Printing Documents 6-20 Manual Zoom 3-10
Removing 6-21 Preset Zoom 3-10
Saving Documents 6-22 XY Zoom 3-11
User Login Administration 11-2 Zoom Mode
Adding 11-5 Copy 5-5
Changing Properties 11-7 Send 5-5
Index-8
We recommend the use of our own brand supplies. We will not be liable for any damage caused by the
use of third party supplies in this machine.
E1
MEMO
MEMO
First Edition 2009.12

TASKalfa 250ci 300ci 400ci 500ci 552ci ENG

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TASKalfa 250ci 300ci 400ci 500ci 552ci ENG

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TASKalfa 250ci 300ci 400ci 500ci 552ci ENG

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OPERATION GUIDE

Operation Guide (This Guide)

Quick Guide to Adjusting Image Quality

WARNING: Indicates that serious injury or even death may result

.... [General warning]

.... [Warning of danger of electrical shock]

.... [Warning of high temperature]

.... [Warning of prohibited action]

.... [Disassembly prohibited]

.... [Alert of required action]

.... [Remove the power plug from the outlet]

[Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground

2 Preparation before Use

Paper Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

OPERATION GUIDE iii

Send and Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

7 Status / Job Cancel

8 Default Setting (System Menu)

Job Accounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14

To make copies To print

Copying with Printing Documents Print

Install the printer

Send Send to Saving

Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) Plug the USB

Create a shared folder on the destination computer.

Place the originals on the platen

Sending...3-24 *1 Saving Documents

FAX directly FAX without using the

Connect the modular cord for the

Selection of Telephone Line

Install the Network FAX

Using the Address Book...3-17

FAX Operation About Network Internet Fax (i-FAX)

High temperature inside. Do not

Do not touch the support area for the

High temperature inside.

Label inside the machine

Do not incinerate toner and toner

• Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight.

Power supply/Grounding the machine

Handling of plastic bags

Cautions when using the machine

When lifting or moving the machine, contact your service representative.

Do not attempt to perform any operations not explained in this guide.

Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight.

This machine is classified as Class 1 laser product under IEC 60825.

Radio Frequency Transmitter (Europe)

Radio Tag Technology (Europe)

Do not remove and dispose of the batteries included in this machine.

• Legal Information ................................................................................. xx

Open SSL License

Copyright (c) 1998-2006 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE

Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected]) All rights reserved.

Low Power Mode

Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function

Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program

Chapter 1 - Part Names

Chapter 2 - Preparation before Use